2014 ram om

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2014-ram-om 1/783

1 5 0 0 / 2 5 O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

2 0 1 4R A M T R U

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in CanaChrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be de

name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitut

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequaccidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impair

alcohol levels far below the legal minimu

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


TABLE OF CONTENTSSECTION

1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

VAN CONVERSIONS/CAM

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIO

VEHICLE MODIFICATION

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler GroupLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precisionworkmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - allessentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaintyou with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and variouscustomer-oriented documents. Please take the time toread these publications carefully. Following the instruc-tions and recommendations in this manual will help

assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, itshould be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remedealer knows your vehicle besnicians and genuine parts, andtion.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAConsult the Table of Contents tcontains the information you d

Since the specification of youitems of equipment ordered,illustrations may differ from y

The detailed index at the back

contains a complete listing of Consult the following table symbols that may be used on ythis Owner’s Manual:

4 INTRODUCTION

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If youdo not read this entire Owners Manual, you may missimportant information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-tions.

VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by vanconversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer

to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Suchequipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage andservice on these items, contact the applicable manufac-turer.

Operating instructions for thstalled by the conversion/camalso be supplied with your veare missing, please contact yoassistance in obtaining replace

applicable manufacturer.

For information on the Bodywww.dodgebodybuilder.com.mensional and technical specifis intended for Second Stage support. For service issues, dealer.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION The Vehicle Identification Numleft front corner of the instrumthe windshield. This number a

6 INTRODUCTION

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Infor-mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on yourvehicle, the vehicle registration and title.

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/

WARNI

Any modifications or alterati

seriously affect its roadwormay lead to a collision resuldeath.

Vehicle Identification Number

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOU

CONTENTS

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12▫ Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped. .12

▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) — If Equipped . . .13

▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . .16

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

VEHICLE SECURITY ALA▫ Rearming Of The System

▫ To Arm The System. . . .

▫ To Disarm The System.

▫ Security System Manual

ILLUMINATED ENTRY .

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

▫ Remote Unlock The Door

▫ To Lock The Doors . . .

▫ Sound Horn With Remo

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

▫ RKE Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The Vehicle) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .29

▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .30

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

▫ Manual Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .39

▫ Child-Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™

WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Power Windows – If Equ

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . .

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . .

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untw

▫ Adjustable Upper Should

▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . .

▫ Seat Belts In Passenger S

▫ Automatic Locking RetraIf Equipped . . . . . . . . .

▫ Energy Management Fe

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .68

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

▫ Air Bag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .72

▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .76

▫ Event Data Recorder (E

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . .

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECO

SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . .

▫ Transporting Passengers

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . .

▫ Safety Checks You ShoulThe Vehicle . . . . . . . .

▫ Periodic Safety Checks YoOutside The Vehicle . . .

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE ST

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system orkeyless ignition system. The key start ignition systemconsists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chipin it, or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). Thekeyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob withRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a KeylessIgnition Node (KIN).

Ignition Node Module (IGN

The Ignition Node Module (IGNignition switch. It has four operdetents and one that is springtions are OFF, ACC, and ON/R

is a spring-loaded momentarreleased from the START posically returns to the ON/RUN

NOTE: If your vehicle is equiN-Go™, the Electronic Veh(EVIC) will display the ignitiACC/RUN). Refer to “ElectrCenter (EVIC) — If Equipped”Instrument Panel” for further


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Keyless Ignition Node (KIN

This feature allows the driveswitch with the push of a buttKeyless Entry (RKE) transmcompartment.

The Keyless Ignition Node (positions, three of which are lawhen in position. The three poON/RUN. The fourth positioRUN will illuminate.

NOTE: In case the ignition swthe push of a button, the RKE t

have a low or dead battery. Inmethod can be used to operatthe nose side (side opposite of Key Fob against the ENGINE push to operate the ignition sw

1 — OFF2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)3 — ON/RUN4 — START


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: For further information, refer to Starting Proce-dures in ”Starting And Operating”.

Key Fob

The Key Fob operates the igsquare end of the key fob into on the instrument panel and rtion. It also contains the Rem

transmitter and an emergencyrear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows fshould the battery in the vehicgo dead. You can keep the emevalet parking.

To remove the emergency key,

at the top of the Key Fob sidewthen pull the key out with you

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)

1 — OFF2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)3 — ON/RUN


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: You can insert the douinto the lock cylinder with eith

Emergency Key Removal (IGNM) Emergency Key Removal Ke(KIN


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Removing Key Fob From Ignition

Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with anautomatic transmission). Turn the Key Fob to the OFFposition and then remove the Key Fob.

NOTE:• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), the power windowswitches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), andpower outlets will remain active for 45 seconds afterthe ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the powerwindow switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),and power outlets will remain active for up to 10minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFFposition. Opening either front door will cancel thisfeature. The time for this feature is programmable.

Refer to “Electronic Veh(EVIC)/Personal Settings Features)” in “Understandinfor further information.

CAUTI• If your vehicle battery bec

Key Fob will become lock• Do not attempt to remove t

condition, damage could ignition module. Only remfor locking and unlocking

• Leave the Key Fob in the i

• Jump Start the vehicle.• Charge the battery.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parkingbrake, shift the transmission into PARK, and pushignition button to place ignition in OFF position.

When leaving the vehicle, always lock your ve-hicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended isdangerous for a number of reasons. A child orothers could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-dren should be warned not to touch the parkingbrake, brake pedal or the shift lever.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• Do not leave the Key Fob iin a location accessible tleave the ignition of a Keyless Enter-N-Go™ inmode. A child could operatcontrols, or move the vehi

• Do not leave children orvehicles in hot weather. Incause serious injury or dea

CAUTI

An unlocked car is an invitaremove the key from the ignwhen leaving the vehicle un


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Key-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in theignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,a chime will sound to remind you to remove the Key Fob.

NOTE:• Keyed Ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC

when the driver door is open.

• “Keyless Ignition systems will chime in ACC or RUNwhen the driver door is open.

• If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) the EVIC will display “Key In Ignition”.

SENTRY KEY®

The Sentry Key® Immobilizethorized vehicle operation by system does not need to be armis automatic, regardless of wh

or unlocked.

The system uses a Key Fob witKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitte(KIN) and a RF receiver to preoperation. Therefore, only Kgrammed to the vehicle can bethe vehicle. The system will noif an invalid Key Fob is usedvehicle. The system will shuseconds if an invalid Key Fob

NOTE: A Key Fob that has noconsidered an invalid key.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


During normal operation, after turning on the ignitionswitch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for threeseconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with theelectronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after

the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalidKey Fob to try to start the engine. Either of theseconditions will result in the engine being shut off aftertwo seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normalvehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon

as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTI

The Sentry Key® Immobilizible with some after-market Use of these systems may r

problems and loss of securit

All of the Key Fobs provided w been programmed to the vehic

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only Key Fobs that vehicle electronics can be usevehicle. Once a Key Fob is pr

cannot be programmed to any


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CAUTION!

• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle andlock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-tended.

•

For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,always remember to place the ignition in the OFFposition.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is providedwith a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number isrequired for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-

rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fobis one that has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Senttem serviced, bring all vehicauthorized dealer.

Customer Key Programmin

Programming Key Fobs or Rperformed at an authorized de

General Information

The Sentry Key® system compand with RSS-210 of Industsubject to the following condit

• This device may not cause h

• This device must accept anyreceived, including interferesired operation.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doorsand ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Ve-hicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches fordoor locks are disabled. The system provides both au-

dible and visible signals, for the first three minutes thehorn will sound and the headlights will turn on, the parklamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle SecurityLight will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutesonly, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/orturn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.

Rearming Of The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle SecurityLight flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If thecondition which initiated the alarm is still present, thesystem will ignore that condition and monitor the re-maining doors and ignition.

To Arm The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm wpower door locks, or use the Retransmitter to lock the doorslocked and closed, the Vehic

instrument panel cluster will seconds to indicate that the alalarm is set, the Vehicle Secuslower rate to indicate that the

To Disarm The System

Use the RKE transmitter to unlhas triggered the Vehicle Secur

the horn will sound three timdoors and the exterior lights wthe vehicle for tampering.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if a pro-grammed Sentry Key® is inserted into the ignitionswitch. To exit the alarming mode, press the RKE trans-mitter UNLOCK button, or insert a programmed SentryKey® into the ignition switch.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect yourvehicle; however, you can create conditions where thesystem will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-ously described arming sequences has occurred, theVehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whetheryou are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicleand open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Security System Manual Ov

The Vehicle Security Alarm wdoors using the manual door l

ILLUMINATED ENTRY

The courtesy lights will turnRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) doors or open any door.

This feature also turns on theoutside mirrors (if equipped“Understanding The Features ther information.

The lights will fade to off after aor they will immediately fadswitch is turned to ON/RUN


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE:

• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-tesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is inthe “Dome ON” position (rotate horizontal thumbwheel on the bottom of the switch to the far right

detent position).

• The illuminated entry system will not operate if thedimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotatehorizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch tothe far left detent position).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

The RKE system allows you totailgate, and the RamBox® activate the Panic Alarm frommately 66 ft (20 m) using a ha

with integrated key. The transpointed at the vehicle to activrelease the LOCK button on thall doors, the tailgate and theThe turn signal lights will flashacknowledge the signal.

NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob the ignition switch disables th

to any button presses from thaat speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and from responding to all RKE tRKE transmitters.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter(IGNM)

Key Fob With RKE TransmittFob (KI


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Remote Unlock The Doors

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE trans-mitter once to unlock the driver’s door (If EVIC is setup fordriver door first, otherwise this will unlock all doors), orpress the unlock button twice within five seconds to unlock

all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox® (if equipped). Theturn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlocksignal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First

This feature lets you program the system to unlock eitherthe driver’s door or all doors on the first press of theUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the

current setting, proceed as follows:• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for furtherinformation.

• For vehicles not equipped wfollowing procedure:

1. Press and hold the LOCK bRKE transmitter for at lealonger than ten seconds. T

UNLOCK button while still

2. Release both buttons at the

3. Test the feature while outsiing the LOCK/UNLOCK bmitter with the ignition switthe key removed.

4. Repeat these steps if you wa

its previous setting.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate theVehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with theVehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause thealarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate

the Vehicle Security Alarm System.Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash whenthe doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To changethe current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for furtherinformation.


1. Press and hold the UNLOCKRKE transmitter for at lealonger than ten seconds. T

LOCK button while still hol

2. Release both buttons at the

3. Test the feature while outsiing the LOCK/UNLOCK bmitter with the ignition switthe key removed.

4. Repeat these steps if you wa

its previous setting.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the VehicleSecurity Alarm System. Opening a door with the VehicleSecurity Alarm System activated will cause the alarm tosound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate theVehicle Security Alarm System.

To Lock The Doors

Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-ter to lock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox® (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the hornwill chirp to acknowledge the signal.

Sound Horn With Remote K

This feature will cause the horare locked with the RKE transturned on or turned off. To chproceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped withtronic Vehicle Information Programmable Features (Systanding Your Instrumeinformation.


1. Press the LOCK button on amitter for at least four seconseconds. Then, press the Pholding the LOCK button.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. Release both buttons at the same time.

3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with theignition switch in the OFF position and the keyremoved.

4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature toits previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the VehicleSecurity Alarm System. Opening a door with the VehicleSecurity Alarm System activated will cause the alarm tosound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the

Vehicle Security Alarm System.Using The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press andhold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for atleast one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,

the headlights will turn on, thehorn will pulse on and off, anturn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay onyou turn it off by either pres

second time or drive the veh(8 km/h) or greater.

NOTE:

• The interior lights will turn switch to the ACC or ON/Panic Alarm is activated. Hand horn will remain on.

• You may need to be less thvehicle when using the RKEPanic Alarm due to the radio by the system.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


RKE Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of TheVehicle) — If Equipped

For easy entry and loading, your vehicle can belowered by pressing the Key Fob air suspen-sion lowering button two times. When Remote

key FOB lowering is requested, the vehicle willsend a series of chirps and flashes to alert the customerthat the operation has begun and will continue thesealerts until it successfully lowers.

The following conditions must be met for the vehicle tolower remotely:

The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit (Park) rideheight.

The vehicle battery must be fully charged.

All doors must be closed.

The ignition key must be out of the vehicle.

Cancelling Remote Lowering Vcancelled at anytime. When vecelled, the vehicle will raise uplevel and lock out the remote lignition has been cycled ON/O

To cancel vehicle lowering, presion lowering button one tiprocess. When vehicle lowerinchirp two times and the haztimes. Once raising is completetime.

NOTE: For further informationSystem in ”STARTING AND O

Programming Additional Tr

If you do not have a progrcontact your authorized deale


THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Transmitter Battery Replacement

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the backhousing or the printed circuit board.

1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanicallatch on the back of the RKE transmitter sidewayswith your thumb and then pull the key out with your

other hand.

Ignition Node Module (IGNM



8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. separating RKE halves requires screw removal and

gently prying the two halves of the RKE transmitterapart. Make sure not to damage the seal duringremoval.

Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Emergency Key Removal Remove Screw From



8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Separating Ignition Node Module (IGNM) TransmitterCase

Separating Keyless Ignition Case



8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on asolid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + signon the battery to the + sign on the inside of the batteryclip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching thenew battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean itwith rubbing alcohol.

4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the twohalves together.

General Information

This device complies with ParRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Ofollowing conditions:


• This device must accept aincluding interference that eration.

NOTE: Changes or modificaproved by the party responsivoid the user’s authority to op

If your RKE transmitter fails

distance, check for these two c

1. A weak battery in the transmthe battery is a minimum o



8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio stationtower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CBradios.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-niently from outside the vehicle while stillmaintaining security. The system has a range of

approximately 300 ft (91 m).

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatictransmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans-mitter may reduce this range.

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditionengine will remote start:

• Shift lever in PARK

• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• HAZARD switch off

• BRAKE switch inactive (bra

• Ignition key removed from

• Battery at an acceptable cha

•

RKE PANIC button not pre• Fuel meets minimum requir

• System not disabled from p

• Vehicle theft alarm not activ



8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage orconfined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. CarbonMonoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-jury or death when inhaled.

• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmittersaway from children. Operation of the Remote StartSystem, windows, door locks or other controlscould cause serious injury or death.

Remote Start Abort MessageInformation Center (EVIC) —

The following messages will vehicle fails to remote start orturely:

• Remote Start Aborted — Do

• Remote Start Aborted — Ho

• Remote Start Aborted — Fu

• Remote Start Aborted — Sy

• Remote Start Disabled — St

The EVIC message stays activeto the ON/RUN position.



8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


To Enter Remote Start Mode

Press and release the REMOTE START buttonon the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-onds. The parking lights will flash vehicledoors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if

programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the enginewill run for 15 minutes.

NOTE:

• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Startwill automatically lock the doors.

• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, thevehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on duringRemote Start mode.

• For security, power windoweration (if equipped) are disin the Remote Start mode.

• The engine can be started tw15-minute cycles) with the R

the ignition switch must bposition before you can repethird cycle.

To Exit Remote Start Mode Vehicle

Press and release the REMOTEallow the engine to run for the

NOTE: To avoid unintentionawill disable the one time pres button for two seconds after Start request.



8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and releasethe UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlockthe doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute

cycle, press and release the START/STOP button.NOTE:

• The message “Push Start Button” will display in theEVIC until you push the START button.

• “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will dis-play in the EVIC until you press the start button. Referto “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” for

further information.

Remote Start Comfort Syste

When remote start is activawheel, and driver heated seat fturn on in cold weather. In wvented seat feature will autom

remote start is activated. Ththrough the duration of remotswitch is turned to the ON/RU

The Remote Start Comfort Sysdeactivated through the Uconinformation on Remote Start Crefer to “Uconnect® Settings”Instrument Panel”.



8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lockknob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up.

Front doors may be opened wwithout lifting the lock knob.

Doors locked before closing closed.

The emergency key will unloc

your vehicle.

WARNI

• Do not leave children orvehicles in hot weather. Incause serious injury or dea

• For personal security and collision, lock the vehiclwell as when you park an

Door Lock Knob

38 GS O O O S G OU C


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING! (Continued)

• Before exiting a vehicle, always turn the vehicleOFF, apply the parking brake, shift the automatictransmission into PARK or the manual transmis-sion into REVERSE, and remove the Key Fob from

the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lockyour vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended isdangerous for a number of reasons. A child orothers could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• Do not leave the Key Fob iin a location accessible tleave the ignition of a Keyless Enter-N-Go in the

A child could operate powtrols, or move the vehicle.

Power Door Locks — If Equ

A power door LOCK switch ipanel. Use this switch to lock


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


If you press the power door LOCK switch while the Key

Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, thepower locks will not operate. This prevents you fromaccidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle. Remov-ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to

operate. A chime will soundignition switch and a door iremove the Key Fob.

Automatic Door Locks — If

The auto door lock feature def

When enabled, the door lockwhen the vehicle’s speed exceeauto door lock feature can be enauthorized dealer per writtenPlease see your authorized de

Auto Unlock Doors — If Eq

This feature unlocks all of the

either front door is opened. Thvehicle has been shifted into thvehicle has been driven (shifdoors closed).

Power Door Lock Switch Location


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Auto Unlock Doors Programming — If Equipped

The Auto Unlock Doors feature can be enabled or dis-abled as follows:

For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings

(System Setup)” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accor-dance with local laws.

Child-Protection Door Lock

To provide a safer environment for children riding in therear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle

have the Child-Protection Door Lock system.

To use the system, open each

screwdriver (or emergency kengage and disengage the Chithe system on a door is engagopened by using the outsideinside door lock is in the unloc

Child-Protection Doo


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.Remember that the rear doors can only be openedfrom the outside when the Child-Protection locks areengaged.

NOTE:

• After setting the Child-Protalways test the door from this in the desired position.

• For emergency exit with the

door lock switch to the UNLthe window and open the dhandle.

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™

The Passive Entry system isvehicle’s Remote Keyless Enfeature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™

refer to “Keyless Enter-N-GoOPERATING”. This feature unlock the vehicle’s door(s) wRKE transmitter lock or unloc

Child Lock Control


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to“Uconnect® settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-ment Panel” for further information.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been

raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlocksensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-sponse time.

• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry DoorHandle, and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, thevehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the theftalarm.

• The vehicles theft alarm can be armed/disarmed bypressing the passive entry key fob lock/unlock buttons(if equipped).

To Unlock From The Driver’s

With a valid Passive Entry RK(1.5 m) of the driver door handoor handle to unlock the driThe interior door panel lock

door is unlocked.

Grab The Door Han


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed alldoors will unlock when you grab hold of the frontdriver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock DriverDoor 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-ment Panel” for further information.

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the frontpassenger door handle to unlock all doors automatically.The interior door panel lock knob will raise when thedoor is unlocked.

NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passengerdoor handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s doorunlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1stPress” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).

Preventing Inadvertent LockiTransmitter In Vehicle

To minimize the possibility ofPassive Entry RKE transmittePassive Entry system is equipp

unlock feature which will funcis in the OFF position.

If one of the vehicle doors is switch is used to lock the vehhave been closed the vehicloutside of the vehicle for anytransmitters. If one of the vehtransmitters is detected inside

valid Passive Entry RKE transide the vehicle, the Passive Enunlocks all vehicle doors and c(on the third attempt ALL doorEntry RKE transmitter can be


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitterswithin 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front doorhandles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock alldoors.

Press The Door Handl

Do NOT grab the door handle

handle lock button. This could


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE:

• After pressing the door hmust wait two seconds befothe doors, using either Passiis done to allow you to check

pulling the door handle, wiand unlocking.

• The Passive Entry system wtransmitter battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also betransmitter lock button or the vehicle’s interior door panel.

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WINDOWS

Power Windows – If Equipped

The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWNswitches that give you fingertip control of all powerwindows. There is a single opening and closing switch on

the front passenger door for pand on the rear doors of the models. The windows will oswitch is turned to the ON/Rfor up to 10 minutes after the until a front door is opened.

NOTE: The Key Off Power Depower windows to operate forignition is turned OFF. This feither front door is opened.

Power Window Switches


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children tobe in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for anumber of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedalor the shift lever.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (orin a location accessible to children), and do notleave the ignition of a vehicle equipped withKeyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUNmode. A child could operate power windows, other

controls, or move the vehicle.

Auto-Down

Both the driver and front passean Auto-Down feature. Press thfirst detent, release, and theautomatically. To cancel the Aerate the switch in either the urelease the switch.

To stop the window from gointhe Auto-Down operation, pul

To open the window part wayand release it when you want

h h f h d


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection(4-Door Models Driver And Front Passenger DoorOnly) — If Equipped

Lift the window switch fully upward to the seconddetent, release, and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during theAuto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch tothe first detent and release when you want the window tostop.

NOTE: If the window runs inauto-closure, it will reverse ddown. Remove the obstacle anagain to close the window. Anyconditions may trigger the aupectedly during auto closure

switch lightly to the first detwindow manually.

WARNI

There is no anti-pinch proteis almost closed. Be sure to cwindow before closing.

R A U l h d d i i T


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Reset Auto-Up

Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the windowprobably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:

1. Make sure the door is fully closed.

2. Pull the window switch up to close the windowcompletely and continue to hold the switch up for anadditional two seconds after the window is closed.

3. Push the window switch down firmly to the seconddetent to open the window completely and continueto hold the switch down for an additional two secondsafter the window is fully open.

Window LOCKOUT Switch (4–Door Models Only)

The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver’s doorallows you to disable the window control on the frontpassenger and rear passenger doors. To disable thewindow controls on the front passenger and rear passen-ger doors, press the window LOCK button into the

latched or down position. To enpress the window LOCK butswitch to the released or up po

Window Locko

Wi d B ff ti OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in theears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with thewindows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certainopen or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs withthe rear windows open, then open the front and rearwindows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-roof opening to minimize the buffeting.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

Some of the most importantvehicle are the restraint system

• Three-point lap and shouldall passengers

• Front seat belts may incormay enhance occupant protpant energy during an impa

• Advanced Front Air Bags foger

• Supplemental Side Air Bag (SABIC) — if equipped

S l t l S t M t d Sid Ai B (SAB) Pl l tt ti t


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)

• An energy-absorbing steering column and steeringwheel

• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants

• All seat belt systems (except driver’s, front center andsecond row center position) include Automatic Lock-ing Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way outand then adjusting the belt to the desired length torestrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat —if equipped

Please pay close attention tosection. It tells you how to uproperly, to keep you and yopossible.

If you will be carrying childrenseat belts, the seat belts or the Lfor CHildren (LATCH) featurinfant and child restraint systeon LATCH, refer to Lower CHildren (LATCH).

NOTE: The Advanced Front Ainflator design. This allows thrates of inflation based on sev

severity and type of collision.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the ride properly buckled up in t


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize therisk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ridebuckled up in a rear seat.

WARNING!• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an

air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front AirBag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12years or younger, including a child in a rearwardfacing infant seat.

• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rearseat.

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should besecured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not usechild restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should

ride properly buckled up in tchildren to slide the shoulder btheir arm.

If a child from 2 to 12 years oldseat) must ride in the front pasas far back as possible and use(Refer to “Child Restraints”).

You should read the instructchild restraint to make sure tha

2. All occupants should alwshoulder belts properly.

3. The driver and front pamoved back as far as practiFront Air Bags room to inf

4 Do not lean against the door or window If your


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


4. Do not lean against the door or window. If yourvehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, theside air bags will inflate forcefully into the spacebetween you and the door.

5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to bemodified to accommodate a disabled person, contactthe Customer Center. Phone numbers are providedunder If You Need Assistance.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to moresevere injuries in a collision. The air bags workwith your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.Always wear your seat belts even though you haveair bags.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• Being too close to the steerpanel during Advanced Frcould cause serious injurBags need room to inflate

extending your arms to reainstrument panel.• Supplemental Side Air

(SABIC) — if equipped andBags (SAB) also need roomagainst the door or windcenter of the seat.

Research has shown that seat


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM



• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffermuch greater injuries if you are not properly buck-led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle orother passengers, or you can be thrown out of the

vehicle. Always be sure you and others in yourvehicle are buckled up properly.• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag

Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) — if equipped and/orSeat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB) during deploy-ment could cause you to be severely injured orkilled.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even

on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driverand cause a collision that includes you. This can happenfar away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat can reduce the seriousness of inof the worst injuries happen from the vehicle. Seat belts ejection and the risk of injurinside of the vehicle. Everyone

be belted at all times.Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions except theand Crew Cab front center seanation lap/shoulder belts. Thedesigned to lock during very sThis feature allows the should

freely with you under normal collision the belt will lock anstriking the inside of the vehic

(


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside oroutside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding inthese areas are more likely to be seriously injuredor killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourvehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat usinga seat belt properly.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• Wearing a seat belt incorrbelts are designed to go aryour body. These are the body and take the forces

Wearing your belt in the wyour injuries in a collisionsuffer internal injuries, or of part of the belt. Follow thyour seat belt safely and tsafe, too.

• Two people should neverseat belt. People belted toganother in a collision, hurNever use a lap/shoulder bthan one person, no matte

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back andadjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the frontseat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch

plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up thewebbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to goaround your lap.

3. When the belt is long enou

plate into the buckle until y

Pulling Out Latch Pla

WARNI


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNI

• A belt buckled into the protect you properly. The lhigh on your body, possibries. Always buckle you

nearest you.• A belt that is too loose wi

erly. In a sudden stop yforward, increasing the poyour seat belt snugly.

Latch Plate To Buckle

WARNING! (C ti d)4. Position the lap belt across


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM



• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.Your body could strike the inside surfaces of thevehicle in a collision, increasing head and neckinjury. A belt worn under the arm can cause inter-

nal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so thatyour strongest bones will take the force in a colli-sion.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protectyou from injury during a collision. You are morelikely to hit your head in a collision if you do notwear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder beltare meant to be used together.

o o t e ap be t ac ossabdomen. To remove slack iup on the shoulder belt. To lotight, tilt the latch plate and

belt reduces the risk of slicollision.

Removing Slack

WARNING!6. To release the belt, push the


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk ofinternal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’tbe at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but acrossyour abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as

possible and keep it snug.• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a

collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the beltis straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in a vehicle,take it to your authorized dealer immediately andhave it fixed.

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it iscomfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.

, pThe belt will automatically tion. If necessary, slide thwebbing to allow the belt to

WARNI

A frayed or torn belt could rileave you with no protectionperiodically, checking for cuDamaged parts must be repnot disassemble or modifyassemblies must be replacedhave been damaged (bent etc.) or if the air bag deploy

Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g

1. The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may bedisconnected to open up utilization of the storageareas behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be detached from the black keyed seat belt bucklelocated on the inboard side of the passenger seat.Insert the seat belt tongue into the center red slot onthe black buckle. The black buckle latch plate can beremoved when the seat belt tongue is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor to take up the extra webbing, and the buckles will hang vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing up all the area behind thefront seats.

2. To reattach the seat belt to the black buckle latch plate panel and insert it into thethere is an audible “click”. Frefer “Lap/Shoulder Belt O

Detaching Buckle With


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Inserting Latch Plate In Use Po

WARNING!2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

• If the black latch and black buckle are not properlyconnected when the seat belt is used by an occu-pant, the seat belt will not be able to provideproper restraint and will increase the risk of injury

in a collision.• When reattaching the black latch and black buckle,

ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If thewebbing is twisted, follow the preceding proce-dure to detach the black latch and black buckle,untwist the webbing, and reattach the black latchand black buckle.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to theanchor point.

grasp and twist the belt weba fold that begins immediat

3. Slide the latch plate upwardThe folded webbing must ethe latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch pfolded webbing.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder

In the front row outboard seatadjusted upward or downwaraway from your neck. Press tupper belt guide, and then mposition that fits you best.

Center Lap Belts


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


As a guide, if you are shorter than average you willprefer a lower position, and if you are taller than averageyou will prefer a higher position. When you release theanchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure thatit is locked in position.

The center seating position foCab® and Crew Cab front sefasten the lap belt, slide the luntil you hear a “click”. To lenlatch plate and pull. To remov

of the webbing. Wear the lap bSit back and erect in the seatightly as is comfortable.

WARNI

• A lap belt worn too loose o• A belt worn too loose can

and under the belt in a col• A belt that is too loose or t

forces to the abdomen, nbones. In either case, the rigreater. Wear a lap belt low

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions For Standard Cab Only


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The seat belts in the passenger seating positions areequipped with either a switchable Automatic LockingRetractors (ALR) or with a Cinching Latchplate which isused to secure a child restraint system. For additionalinformation, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using

The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”section. The chart below defines the type of feature foreach seating position.

For Quad Cab®, Mega Cab® and Crew Cab Only

Driver Center Passenger

First Row N/A Cinch ALR

Second Row ALR Cinch ALR• N/A — Not Applicable

• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

Driver

First Row N/A

Second Row N/A

•

N/A — Not Applicable• ALR — Automatic Locking

If the passenger seating posiALR and is being used for nor

Only pull the belt webbing outwrap around the occupant’sactivate the ALR. If the ALR is

ratcheting sound as the belt reto retract completely in this caout only the amount of webbably wrap around the occupanlatch plate into the buckle unt

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode –If E i d

3. Allow the belt to retract. Ash li ki d Thi


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


If Equipped

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack inthe shoulder belt.

When To Use The Automatic Locking ModeUse the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safetyseat is installed in a seating position that has a belt withthis feature. Children 12 years old and under shouldalways be properly restrained in the rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward untilthe entire belt is extracted.

hear a clicking sound. This now in the Automatic Lock

How To Disengage The Aut

Unbuckle the combination lap/

to retract completely to disengaMode and activate the vehilocking mode.

WARNI

• The belt and retractor assemthe seat belt assembly Auto(ALR) feature or any other

working properly when cprocedures in the Service

• Failure to replace the beltcould increase the risk of i

Energy Management Feature NOTE: These devices are not ab lt l t b th t


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


This vehicle has a safety belt system with an EnergyManagement feature in the front seating positions to helpfurther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-oncollision.

This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that isdesigned to release webbing in a controlled manner. Thisfeature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting onthe occupant’s chest.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

The seat belts for both front seating positions areequipped with pretensioning devices that are designed toremove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.

These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupantearly in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-pants, including those in child restraints.

belt placement by the occupantworn snugly and positioned p

The pretensioners are triggerstraint Controller (ORC). Likesioners are single use items. A

a deployed air bag must be rep

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Re(BeltAlert®)

BeltAlert® is a feature intendedfront passenger (if equippeBeltAlert®) to fasten their seat whenever the ignition is on.

passenger is unbelted, the Seaturn on and remain on untilfastened.

The BeltAlert® warning sequenspeed is over 5 mph (8 km/h)

Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.O th t t it ill ti f th ti

BeltAlert® can be enabled ori d d l Ch l G L


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entireduration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt ReminderLight remains illuminated until the respective seat beltsare fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-

pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt isunbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visualnotification.

The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active whenthe front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on thefront passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if

equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained inthe rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that aresecured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

rized dealer. Chrysler Group Ldeactivating BeltAlert®.

NOTE: Although BeltAlert® Seat Belt Reminder Light wiwhile the driver’s or front pa

BeltAlert®) seat belt remains u

Seat Belts And Pregnant W

We recommend that pregnanthroughout their pregnancies. the best way to keep the baby

Pregnant women should weaacross the thighs and as snug a

Keep the belt low so that it dabdomen. That way the strongthe force if there is a collision.

Seat Belt Extender Supplemental Restraint Sy


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended andwhen the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorizeddealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. Thisextender should be used only if the existing belt is not

long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-tender and store it.

WARNING!

Using a seat belt extender when not needed canincrease the risk of injury in a collision. Only usewhen the seat belt is not long enough when it is wornlow and snug and in the recommended seating posi-tions. Remove and store the extender when notneeded.

This vehicle has Advanced Frdriver and front passenger as belt restraint systems. The driBag is mounted in the center opassenger’s Advanced Front A

instrument panel, above the words SRS AIRBAG are embo

NOTE: The Driver and Front PAir Bags are certified to the ne


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


eb

Air Bags are certified to the neAdvanced Air Bags.

The Advanced Front Air Bags design. This allows the air baginflation based on several fact

and type of collision.

This vehicle may be equipped passenger seat belt buckle swthe driver or front passenger seat belt buckle switch may adjAdvanced Front Air Bags.

This vehicle may also be equi

Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtaidriver, front, and rear passendow. If the vehicle is equippedare located above the side winalso labeled: SRS AIRBAG.

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Ad-vanced Front Air Bags

2 — Knee Bolster

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced

• Steering Wheel and Column


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhancedprotection for an occupant during a side impact. TheSupplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags they are lo-cated in the outboard side of the front seats.

NOTE:

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to anauthorized dealer immediately.

Air Bag System Components

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag

system components:• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver Advanced Front Air

•

Passenger Advanced Front • Supplemental Seat-Mounted

• Supplemental Side Air Bag (SABIC) — may be equippe

• Front and Side Impact Sens

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

•

Seat Belt Pretensioners

Advanced Front Air Bag Features

h d d h lWARNI


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistagedriver and front passenger air bags. This system providesoutput appropriate to the severity and type of collision asdetermined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),which may receive information from the front impact

sensors (if equipped).The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during animpact that requires air bag deployment. This low outputis used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output isused for more severe collisions.

• No objects should be plabag on the instrument pobjects could cause harmcollision severe enough t

inflate.• Do not put anything on

covers or attempt to open tdamage the air bags andbecause the air bags may nThe protective covers for designed to open only winflating.

• Do not drill, cut or tamperany way.

• Do not mount any accessosuch as alarm lights, stereetc.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)

S l l S M d Sid Ai B id

When the air bag deploys, it opfront and side of the seat’s


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags may provideenhanced protection to help protect an occupant during aside impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side AirBag is marked with an air bag label sewn into theoutboard side of the front seats.

front and side of the seat s deploys independently; a left sair bag only and a right-side im bag only.

Supplemental Side Air Bag

(SABIC) — If Equipped

SABIC air bags may offer sideover protection to front and reain addition to that provided byair bag features inflated chambhead of each outboard occupanfor side-impact head injuries. Tward, covering both windows

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

NOTE:

Ai B b b


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Air Bag covers may not be ob but they will open during a

• Being too close to the SAB adeployment could cause yo

killed.• Should a vehicle rollover o

equipped) and/or SAB andsides of the vehicle may dep

The system includes side imp brated to deploy the side air require air bag occupant prote

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)Label Location

WARNING!SAB and SABIC air bags are a srestraint system. Occupants, in


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• If your vehicle is equipped with left and rightSupplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo uphigh enough to block the location of the SABIC.

The area where the SABIC is located should remainfree from any obstructions.• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects

between you and the side air bags; the performancecould be adversely affected and/or objects could bepushed into you, causing serious injury.

• If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,do not have any accessory items installed whichwill alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to

your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that requirepermanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roofof the vehicle for any reason.

es sys e Occ p s,up against or very close to SABseriously injured or killed. Odren, should not lean on or slwindows, or area where theinflate, even if they are in an i

Always sit upright as possible seat back, use the seat beltappropriate sized child rest booster seat recommended forchild.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters heldriver and front passengers, anfor the best interaction with Bags.

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced FrontAir Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide

including the severity and typFront Air Bags are not expec


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g p pimproved protection for the driver and front passenger.

Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety systemrequired for this vehicle.

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/orside air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. Acentral electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front AirBags, SABIC air bags — if equipped, SAB air bags, andfront seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending onseveral factors, including the severity and type of impact.

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-tional protection by supplementing the seat belts incertain frontal collisions depending on several factors,

g pinjury in rear, rollover, or side

The Advanced Front Air Bagfrontal collisions, including sostantial vehicle damage — for

sions, truck underrides, and athe other hand, depending onimpact, Advanced Front Air Bwith little vehicle front-end dsevere initial deceleration.

The side air bags will not depSide air bag deployment will dtype of collision.

Because air bag sensors meaover time, vehicle speed and dnot good indicators of whethehave deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,

turns on the Air Bag Warning or continuously. A single chim


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p p y paway from an inflating air bag.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in theSTART or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the LOCK

position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, theair bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system thatmay deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power orit becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag WarningLight in the instrument panel for approxi-

mately four to eight seconds for a self-checkwhen the ignition is first turned on. After theself-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If theORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it

y gcomes on again after initial sta

It also includes diagnostics thatment cluster Air Bag Warningnoted that could affect the air

tics also record the nature of t

WARNI

Ignoring the Air Bag Warniment panel could mean youto protect you in a collision. Ion as a bulb check when theon, stays on after you start th

on as you drive, have an authair bag system immediately.

Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air BagInflator Units

The Advanced Front Air Bag vent holes in the sides of the a


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air BagInflator Units are located in the center of the steeringwheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A largequantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate theAdvanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation ratesare possible, based on several factors, including thecollision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trimcover and the upper right side of the instrument panelseparate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate totheir full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70

milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate whilehelping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

bags do not interfere with you

Supplemental Seat-MountedInflator Units

The Supplemental Seat-Mounsigned to activate only in cert

The ORC determines if a side air bags to inflate, based on collision.

Based on the severity and typ bag inflator on the crash sidtriggered, releasing a quanti

inflating SAB exits through th between the occupant and the in about 10 milliseconds. The sihigh speed and with such a hig

you if you are not seated properly, or if items arepositioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This

inflates. This especially applcurtain air bag is only about 3


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


especially applies to children.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped

During collisions where the impact is confined to aparticular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC maydeploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severityand type of collision. In these events, the ORC willdeploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.

A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the sidecurtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushesthe outside edge of the headliner out of the way and

covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takesto blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if youare not belted and seated properly, or if items arepositioned in the area where the side curtain air bag

it is inflated.

Because air bag sensors estimavehicle speed and damage arwhether or not an air bag shou

NOTE: In a rollover the pretenSABIC air bags may deploy on

Front And Side Impact SensRollover

In front and side impacts, imORC in determining appropevents.

Front And Side Impact Sens

In front and side impacts, imORC in determining appropevents.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if

In order to reset the Enhancedfunctions after an event, the


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and thepower remains intact, depending on the nature of theevent the ORC will determine whether to have theEnhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-

ing functions:• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power oruntil the ignition key is turned off.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long asthe battery has power or until the ignition key isremoved.

• Unlock the doors automatically.

changed from IGN ON to IGN

9-1-1 Call Operating Instruc

1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button

NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call bthere will be a 10 second desystem initiates a call to a 9-19-1-1 Call connection, press thRearview Mirror or press the cPhone Screen . Termination of green LED light on the Rearvi

2. The LED light located betw

buttons on the Rearview Miconnection to a 9-1-1 opera

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit

f f

NOTE: Once a connection is m9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1operator:

• indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call;

• the vehicle brand; and

• the last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operatorthrough the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.

tor may be able to open a vovehicle to determine if additiothe 9-1-1 operator opens a vvehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the speak with you or other vehsounds occurring in the vehiclsystem will attempt to remainoperator until the 9-1-1 operattion.

5. The 9-1-1 operator may atteemergency responders and tant vehicle information and

WARNING! WARNING! (C

• Modifications to any part


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditionsor location), do not wait for voice contact from a9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicleimmediately and move to a safe location.

• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarketelectrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending asignal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-waymobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your

vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennason your vehicle.

(Continued)

• Modifications to any part could cause the air bag sneed it. You could be injuis not there to help protect

9-1-1 Call System LimitationsVehicles sold in Canada and MCall system capabilities.

9-1-1 or other emergency lineMexico may not answer or res

If the 9-1-1 Call system detectsfollowing may occur at the

detected, and at the beginning

• The Rearview Mirror light land 9-1-1 buttons will conred;

• The Phone Screen will display the following message“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact yourd l ” d

Even if the 9-1-1 Call system i beyond Chrysler Group LLC’

t th 9 1 1 C ll t


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


dealer.”; and,

• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phonerequires service. Please contact your dealer.”

WARNING!• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you

will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the RearviewMirror light is illuminated, have an authorizeddealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.

• The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light onthe instrument panel if a malfunction in any part ofthe system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light

is illuminated, have an authorized dealer servicethe ORC system immediately.

stop the 9-1-1 Call system opeare not limited to, the followin

• The ignition key has been rand the delayed accessories

• The ignition key is in OFF p

• The vehicle’s electrical syste

• The 9-1-1 Call system softwdamaged during a crash;

• The vehicle battery loses pnected during a vehicle cras

• Wireless and/or Global Poare unavailable or obstructe

• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility;

• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator;

General Information

This device complies with P


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p y p ;

• Wireless network congestion;

• Weather; and

• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.

NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’swireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wirelessand GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehiclefrom placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signalreception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to functionproperly.

pOperation is subject to the follThis device may not cause harthis device must accept any inting interference that may caus

If A Deployment Occurs

The Advanced Front Air Bagimmediately after deployment

NOTE: Front and/or side air bcollisions. This does not meanthe air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, anyor all of the following may occur:

throat irritation, move to continues, see your doctor. your clothing follow the ga


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• The nylon air bag material may sometimes causeabrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver andfront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. Theabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those

you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasiumfloor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.However, if you haven’t healed significantly within afew days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctorimmediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-likeparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the

process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate theskin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eyeirritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or

your clothing, follow the gastructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle afployed. If you are involved in

bags will not be in place to pr

WARNI

Deployed air bags and seat bprotect you in another colliseat belt pretensioners, and ttor assemblies replaced by amediately. Also, have the O

troller (ORC) system service

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

WARNING! (C

• Do not attempt to modify


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag systemcould cause it to fail when you need it. You couldbe injured if the air bag system is not there to

protect you. Do not modify the components orwiring, including adding any kind of badges orstickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or theupper right side of the instrument panel. Do notmodify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, oradd aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who

works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

(Continued)

Do not attempt to modify system. The air bag may innot function properly if mTake your vehicle to an auair bag system service. If y

trim cover and cushion, neway (including removal orseat attachment bolts), taauthorized dealer. Only seat accessories may be umodify the air bag systemabilities, contact your auth

Air Bag Warning Light

You will want to have the air bags ready to

• The Air Bag Warning Light reight-second interval.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


inflate for your protection in a collision. TheAir Bag Warning Light monitors the internalcircuits and interconnecting wiring associated

with air bag system electrical components. While the air

bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer servicethe air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on duringthe four to eight seconds when the ignition switch isfirst turned to the ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light cremains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tarelated gauges are not workin

Controller (ORC) may also be dnot be ready to inflate for ycheck the fuse block for blowlocated on the inside of the proper air bag fuses. See youfuse is good.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder( ) h f d

These data can help provide the circumstances in which cra


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicleis designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety beltswere buckled/fastened;

•

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

NOTE: EDR data are recordednon-trivial crash situation occuthe EDR under normal drivinsonal data (e.g., name, gender

are recorded. However, otherforcement, could combine the personally identifying data rocrash investigation.

To read data recorded by an Erequired, and access to the vehIn addition to the vehicle masuch as law enforcement, tha

ment, can read the informationvehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at alltimes including babies and children Every state in the

NOTE: For additional www.seatcheck.org or call 1–dian residents should refer to


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


times, including babies and children. Every state in theUnited States, and every Canadian province, requiresthat small children ride in proper restraint systems. Thisis the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crashstatistics, children are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seats rather than in the front.

There are different sizes and types of restraints forchildren from newborn size to the child almost largeenough for an adult safety belt. Always check the childseat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correctseat for your child.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it hasa label certifying that it meets all applicable SafetyStandards. You should also make sure that you can installit in the vehicle where you will use it.

dian residents should refer to site for additional informatieng/roadsafety/safedrivers-ch

WARNI

In a collision, an unrestrainprojectile inside the vehiclehold even an infant on yougreat that you could not hohow strong you are. The chbadly injured. Any child should be in a proper restra

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended T


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


, g , g g

Infants and Tod-dlers

Children who are two years old oryounger and who have not reached theheight or weight limits of their child re-

straint

Either an Infant CChild Restraint, fa

seat o

Small Children Children who are at least two years old orwho have out-grown the height or weight

limit of their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing five-point Harnes

rear sea

Larger Children Children who have out-grown theirforward-facing child restraint, but are toosmall to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Bhicle seat belt, seat

Children Too Large

for Child Restraints

Children 12 years old or younger, who

have out-grown the height or weight limitof their booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt,

th

Infants And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-f i i th hi l til th t ld til

their infant carrier but are still old. Children should remain rreach the highest weight or


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or untilthey reach either the height or weight limit of their rearfacing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible

child seats.The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in thevehicle. It is recommended for children from birth untilthey reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible childseats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be

used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown

eac t e g est e g t oconvertible child seat.

WARNI

• Never place a rear facing iair bag. A deploying passeBag can cause death or seryears or younger, includinfacing infant seat.

• Only use a rearward-facingseat.

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrowntheir rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward

seat. The child and belt-positioin the vehicle by the seat belt.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats andconvertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-tion are for children who are over two years old or who

have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children shouldremain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness foras long as possible, up to the highest weight or heightallowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above theforward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts

fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent overthe vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is againstthe seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster

WARNI

• Improper installation caninfant or child restraint. I

collision. The child coulkilled. Follow the child directions exactly when child restraint.

• When your child restraint the vehicle with the seat ages, or remove it from theloose in the vehicle. In a sucould strike the occupantsserious personal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder beltcomfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend

3. Does the shoulder belt cr between their neck and arm

4 Is the lap part of the belt as


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bendover the front of the seat when their back is against theseatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use thissimple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the

vehicle’s seat belt alone:1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of

the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the frontof the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all theway back?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as the child’s thighs and not th

5. Can the child stay seated lik

If the answer to any of these quchild still needs to use a boostechild is using the lap/shouldeodically. A child’s squirming o belt out of position. If the shouor neck, move the child closer tNever allow a child to put the sor behind their back.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints — Quad Cab®/Crew Cab

Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown wit


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Weight of theChild + Child

Restraint

LATCH –Lower Anchors

Only

Seat Belt Only LATCHLower An

+ Top TeAncho

Rear-FacingChild Restraint

Up to 65 lbs(29.5 kg)

X X


More than65 lbs (29.5 kg)

X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint


X

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints — Standard Cab, Mega Cab®

Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown wit


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Weight of theChild + Child

Restraint

LATCH –Lower Anchors

Only

Seat Belt Only LATCHLower An

+ Top TeAncho



X X


More than65 lbs (29.5 kg)

X

Forward-FacingChild Restraint


X

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

X

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with age system called LATCH, Anchors and Tethers for CHil


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


has three vehicle anchor poinequipped child seats. There alocated at the back of the seat cseatback and one top tether anc

seating position. These anchorages are used to installLATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’sseat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether

LATCH Positions For InstalThis Vehicle


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seatingpositions, the seat belt must be used with the top tetheranchorage to install the child restraint. Please see thefollowing table for more information.

Standard

Lower Anchorage Symbolposition

Top Tether Anchorage Sym


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Quad Cab®/Crew Cab Full Bench

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seatingposition

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Quad Cab®/Mega Cab®/C

Lower Anchorage Symbolposition

Top Tether Anchorage Sym

Quad Cab®/Crew Cab

What is the weight limit (child’s 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LA


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


weight + weight of the child re-straint) for using the LATCH an-chorage system to attach the childrestraint?

until the child an

65 lbs (29and tethe

LATCH syweigh

Can the LATCH anchorages andthe seat belt be used together toattach a rear-facing or forward-

facing child restraint?

No Do not ususe the LAto attach a

faciCan a child seat be installed in the

center position using the innerLATCH lower anchorages (Full

Bench Only) ?

No Use the se

to install aseating

equipped

Can two child restraints be at-tached using a common lower

LATCH anchorage?

No Never “shawith two

If the cente


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


dedicatedages, use child sea

next to

LATCH an

Can the rear-facing child restrainttouch the back of the front passen-

ger seat?

Yes The child of the frochild restallows costraint ow

Can the head restraints be re-moved?

No

Mega Cab®/Standard Cab

What is the weight limit (child’si h i h f h hild

65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LAil h

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


weight + weight of the child re-straint) for using the LATCH an-chorage system to attach the childrestraint?

until the child an

65 lbs (29alone ins

chorage syweigh

Can the LATCH anchorages andthe seat belt be used together toattach a rear-facing or forward-

facing child restraint?

No Do not ususe the LAto attach a

faci

Can two child restraints be at-tached using a common lower

LATCH anchorage?

No Never “shawith two

If the cented d d


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


dedicatedages, use child sea

next to

LATCH an

Can the rear-facing child restrainttouch the back of the front passen-

ger seat?

Yes The child of the frochild restallows costraint ow

Can the head restraints be re-moved?

No

Locating The LATCH Anchorages — QuadCab®/Mega Cab®/Crew Cab

The lower anchorages are round bars that are


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


found at the rear of the seat cushion where itmeets the seatback. They are just visible whenyou lean into the rear seat to install the child

restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your fingeralong the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Quad Cab®/Mega Cab®/CrewDriver S

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

In addition, Regular Cab models have tetherstrap anchorages behind the front center and

h d b b d


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


right seats. Quad Cab®, Mega Cab® and CrewCab models have tether strap anchorages lo-

cated behind each of the rear seats.

1 — Tether Strap Hook

2 — Tether Strap to Child Res

3 — Tether Anchor

Regular Cab Tether

tether strap. The tether strap wto attach to the top tether anchthe strap after it is attached to


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will beequipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.

Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the loweranchorage and a way to tighten the connection to theanchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and somerear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a

Center Seat LATCH — StanCab®/Crew Cab Full Bench

Do not install a child restraint i

the LATCH system. Use the seainstall a child seat in the cente

WARNI

Never use the same lower athan one child restraint. PleThe LATCH-Compatible Chtypical installation instructio

Always follow the directions ofacturer when installing your crestraint systems will be instal

Mega Cab® Tether Strap Mounting (Behind Covers)

Center Seat LATCH — Quad Cab®/MegaCab®/Crew Cab Split Bench

If a child restraint installed in the center position blocksth t b lt bbi b kl f th tb d iti

To Install A LATCH-compat

1. If the selected seating positimatic Locking Retractor (ALb l f ll i h i i


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in thecenter position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors orseat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard

position.

WARNING!

Never use the same lower anchorage to attach morethan one child restraint. Please refer to “InstallingThe LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” fortypical installation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all childrestraint systems will be installed as described here.

belt, following the instructi“Installing Child RestraintBelt” to check what type position has.

2. Loosen the adjusters on thetether strap of the child seeasily attach the hooks or anchorages.

3. Place the child seat betweenthat seating position. For somay need to recline the sea

restraint to get a better fit.

4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the childrestraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-ing position.

5 If th hild t i t h t th t t it t th

How To Stow An Unused A

When using the LATCH attachild restraint, stow all ALR se

d b th t b


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to thetop tether anchorage. See the section “Installing ChildRestraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-tions to attach a tether anchor.

6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraintrearward and downward into the seat. Remove slackin the straps according to the child restraint manufac-turer’s instructions.

7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly bypulling back and forth on the child seat at the beltpath. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

used by other occupants or brestraints. An unused belt coulwith it and accidentally lock thinstalling a child restraint u

buckle the seat belt behind thethe child’s reach. If the bucklethe child restraint installatio behind the child restraint, routchild restraint belt path and ththe seatbelt. Remind all childrseat belts are not toys and thatthem.

WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to theLATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-

the seat belt tight around the not necessary to use a locking c be “switched” into a locked mwebbing out of the retractor an


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directionsexactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle SeatBelt

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions areequipped with either a Switchable Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Bothtypes of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of

gretract back into the retractor. Imake a clicking noise while thinto the retractor. For additio

refer to the “Automatic Lockinder “Occupant Restraints.” Tdesigned to hold the lap porwhen webbing is pulled tighchild restraint’s belt path. Pleathe following sections for mortypes of seat belts.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing ChildRestraints in this Vehicle


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Standard Cab

Quad Cab®/Mega C

Quad Cab®/Crew Cab

What is the weight limit (child’sweight + weight of the child re-

Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always ususing the


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g gstraint) for using the Tether Anchorwith the seat belt to attach a forwardfacing child restraint?

gward facinrecommendchild restra

Can the rear-facing child restrainttouch the back of the front passengerseat?

Yes Contact betseat and tlowed, if tfacturer als

Can the head restraints be removed? No

Can the buckle stalk be twisted totighten the seat belt against the beltpath of the child restraint?

Yes In positioplates (CINmay be twi

not twist thposition w

Mega Cab®/Standard Cab

What is the weight limit (child’sweight + weight of the child re-

65 lbs (29.5 kg) The Tetherthe seat b


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g gstraint) for using the Tether Anchorwith the seat belt to attach a forwardfacing child restraint?

weight of restraint isseat belt w

once the cothan 65 lbs

Can the rear-facing child restrainttouch the back of the front passengerseat?

Yes Contact betseat and tlowed, if tfacturer als

Can the head restraints be removed? NoCan the buckle stalk be twisted to

tighten the seat belt against the beltpath of the child restraint?

Yes In positio

plates (CINmay be twinot twist thposition w

Installing A Child Restraint with a SwitchableAutomatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seatingposition For some second row seats you may need to

5. To lock the seat belt, pull dothe belt until you have pulleout of the retractor. Then, al back into the retractor. As


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


position. For some second row seats, you may need torecline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractorto pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a“click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tightagainst the child seat.

will hear a clicking sound. Tnow in the Automatic Lock

6. Try to pull the webbing ou

locked, you should not be bing. If the retractor is not

7. Finally, pull up on any excelap portion around the childthe child restraint rearwardvehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and theseating position has a top tether anchorage, connectthe tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tetherstrap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-

Installing A Child RestraintLatch Plate (CINCH) — If E

1. Place the child seat in tposition For some second r


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions toattach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the beltpath. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

position. For some second rrecline the seat and / or raisa better fit.

2. Next, pull enough of the seretractor to pass it throughrestraint. Do not twist thepath.

3. Slide the latch plate into th“click.”

4. Finally, pull up on any excelap portion around the childthe child restraint rearwardvehicle seat.

5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and theseating position has a top tether anchorage, connectthe tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tetherstrap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-d (LATCH) R i S ” f di i

If the buckle or the cinching la belt path opening of the childtrouble tightening the seat belnect the latch plate from the bb kl d b l h f l


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions toattach a tether anchor.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the beltpath. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

buckle-end belt up to three fulthe latch plate into the bucklfacing out, away from the chil

to 6, above, to complete therestraint.

If the belt still cannot be tighte buckle, disconnect the latch pthe buckle around one half turninto the buckle again. If you srestraint installation tight, try a

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top TetherAnchorage

Regular and Mega Cab® Trucks: In the regular cabtruck, the top tether anchorages are located behind the


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


truck, the top tether anchorages are located behind thecenter and right passenger seats. In the mega cab truck,the top tether anchorages are located behind each rearseating position. There is a plastic cover over each an-

chorage. To attach the tether strap of the child restraint:

1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust thetether strap so that it will reach over the seat back,under the head restraint and to the tether anchordirectly behind the seat.

1 — Tether Strap Hook

2 — Tether Strap to Child Res

3 — Tether Anchor

Regular Cab Tether

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchorage and the child seat. The tetherstrap should go between the head restraint postsunderneath the head restraint. You may need to adjustth h d t i t t th d iti t th


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the head restraint to the upward position to pass thetether strap underneath the head restraint and be-tween its posts.

3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook tothe square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten thetether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions.

Mega Cab® Tether S

WARNING!

Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an airbag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag

d th i i j t hild 12

Right or Left Outboard Seats

1. Raise the head restraint anseat and rear glass to access


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years oryounger, including a child in a rearward facing infantseat.

Quad Cab® or Crew Cab Trucks: The top tether an-chorages in this vehicle are tether strap loops located between the rear glass and the back of the rear seat.There is a tether strap loop located behind each seatingposition. Follow the steps below to attach the tetherstrap of the child restraint.

Head Restraint In R

3. Pass the tether strap hook behind the child seat, thou behind the seat and over loop.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tetherstrap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the

head restraint, through the tether strap loop behindthe seat and over to the tether strap loop behind thecenter seat.

Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In RaisedPosition

Tether Strap Through Outb

4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (seediagram). Tighten the tether strap according to thechild seat manufacturer’s instructions.

NOTE: If there are child seats inand right) seating positions, both child seats should be constrap loop. This is the correct wchild seats


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


child seats.

Center Seat:

1. Raise the head restraint anseat and rear glass to access

Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop AndAttached To Center Tether Strap Loop

3. Pass the tether strap hook behind the child seat, thou behind the seat and over totether strap loop.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tetherstrap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the

head restraint, through the tether strap loop behindthe seat and over to the tether strap loop behind eitherthe right or left outboard seat.

Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In RaisedPosition

Tether Strap Through Cen

4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (seediagram). Tighten the tether strap according to thechild seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Installing Three Child Restra

1. Place a child restraint on Route the tether straps folright and left seating positi


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. Attach both hooks to the cedo not tighten the straps ye

3. Place a child restraint on thetether strap following the seating position, above.

4. Attach the hook to the outb

5. Tighten the tether straps acmanufacturer’s instructionleft tether straps before the

Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop AndAttached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop

WARNI

• An incorrectly anchored teincreased head motion anchild Use only the anch


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


child. Use only the anchbehind the child seat to setether strap.

•

If your vehicle is equippemake sure the tether strapopening between the seaslack in the strap.

Left Outboard And Center Seating Position Shown

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possiblyinjured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in

lli i

While cruising, brief full-throtlimits of local traffic laws contrWide-open throttle acceleratiomental and should be avoided

Th i il i t ll d i th


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnessesor pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine anddrivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

The engine oil installed in thehigh-quality energy conservchanges should be consistent

conditions under which vehiclethe recommended viscosity an“Maintenance Procedures” inhicle”.

CAUTI

Never use Non-Detergent Oiin the engine or damage ma

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during itsfirst few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. Thisshould be considered a normal part of the break-in andnot interpreted as an indication of difficulty.

WARNING! (C

• It is extremely dangerousinside or outside of a vehicriding in these areas are mo


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGOAREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside parkedvehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up maycause serious injury or death.

(Continued)

injured or killed.• Do not allow people to r

vehicle that is not equipp

belts.• Be sure everyone in your

using a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbonid (CO) hi h i l l d d l

WARNING! (C

• If it is necessary to sit in a engine running, adjust ycontrols to force outside ai


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.Breathing it can make you unconscious and caneventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),

follow these safety tips:• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in

confined areas any longer than needed to moveyour vehicle in or out of the area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgateopen, make sure that all windows are closed andthe climate control BLOWER switch is set at highspeed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

blower at high speed.

The best protection against ca

the vehicle body is a properly msystem.

Whenever a change is noticed isystem, when exhaust fumes cvehicle, or when the undersiddamaged, have a competent mplete exhaust system and adjacdamaged, deteriorated, or m

seams or loose connections coto seep into the passenger cinspect the exhaust system eacfor lubrication or oil change. R

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside TheVehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,

Air Bag Warning Light

The light should cofour to eight secondsignition switch is firsnot lit during start


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replacedimmediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after acollision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced aftera collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding beltor retractor condition, replace the belt.

not lit during startdealer. If the light stays on, fldriving, have the system ch

dealer.Defroster

Check operation by selecting ththe blower control on high speedthe air directed against the wirized dealer for service if your

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of yourvehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal areaunobstructed and that are firmly secured so that theycannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals

WARNING! (C

• Never place or install flocoverings in the vehicle tsecured to prevent them fri ith th d l th


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedalsor impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss ofvehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-sonal injury.

• Always make sure that floor mats are properlyattached to the floor mat fasteners.

(Continued)

ing with the pedals or thvehicle.

• Never put floor mats or oth

of already installed floormats and other coverings wpedal area and interfere w

• Check mounting of mats onproperly reinstall and secubeen removed for cleaning


• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into thedriver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-jects can become trapped under the brake pedal

d l t d l i l f hi l

lodged in the tread or sidewalland cracks. Inspect sidewalls fCheck the wheel nuts for t(including spare) for proper co

Lights


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehiclecontrol.

• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-

stalled, if not equipped from the factory.Failure to properly follow floor mat installation ormounting can cause interference with the brakepedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss ofcontrol of the vehicle.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make OutsideThe Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wearpatterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

Lights

Have someone observe the opeexterior lights while you worksignal and high beam indicatopanel.

Door Latches

Check for positive closing, latc

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after

engine coolant, oil, or other flufumes are detected or if fuelequipped), or brake fluid leakshould be located and correcte

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOU

CONTENTS

MIRRORS 136 H d Mi If E

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .137

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear ViewCamera Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .139

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .140

▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors —

If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .142

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equ

▫ Driver’s Outside Automa

Mirror — If Equipped .▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirro

▫ “Slide-On-Rod” Features If Equipped. . . . . . . . .

▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors —

SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If

▫ Passenger’s Power Seat —

▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .150

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .153

▫ Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped. . . . . . . .154

TO OPEN AND CLOSE TH

LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . .

▫ Automatic Headlights —

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


▫ Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped. . . . . . . .154

▫ 40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . .156

▫ Mega Cab® Rear Seat Features . . . . . . . . . . . .156▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .162

▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .163

▫ Linking And Unlinking The RemoteKeyless Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . .164

▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

▫ Automatic Headlights

▫ Headlights On With WipWith Automatic Headlig

▫ Daytime Running LightsIf Equipped . . . . . . . .

▫ Headlight Delay . . . . .

▫ Automatic High Beam HIf Equipped . . . . . . . .

▫ Parking Lights And Pan

▫ Fog Lights — If Equipp

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

▫ Windshield Washers . . .

▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . .

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers —

TILT STEERING COLUMN

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATUR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .180

▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180


HEATED STEERING WHEIF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .

DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDIF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .

ELECTRONIC SPEED CO

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . .

▫ To Set A Desired Speed

▫

To Deactivate . . . . . . . .▫ To Resume Speed . . . . .

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

PARKSENSE® FRONT ANASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . .

▫ ParkSense® Warning Di


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

▫ ParkSense® Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . .196

▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park AssistSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .197

▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .197

▫ ParkSense® Display. . .

▫ Enabling And Disabling FRear ParkSense® . . . . .

▫ Service The ParkSense® P

▫ Cleaning The ParkSense

▫ ParkSense® System Usag

PARKVIEW® REAR BACKIF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .

▫ Turning ParkView® On OUconnect® 5.0. . . . . . .

▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off — WithUconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

▫ Turning ParkView® Camera Delay On OrOff — With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN . . . . . . . .211

OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED 211

▫ Troubleshooting Tips .

▫ General Information. . .

POWER SUNROOF — IF E

▫ Opening Sunroof — Man


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .211

▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED. . . .213

▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . .214

▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .217

▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .218

▫ Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

p g

▫ Closing Sunroof — Man

▫ Opening Sunroof — Exp▫ Closing Sunroof — Expr

▫ Pinch Protect Feature .

▫ Venting Sunroof — Expre

▫ Sunshade Operation. . .

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . .

▫ Sunroof Maintenance .

▫ Ignition Off Operation

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .226

CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .231

▫ Center Storage CompartmIf Equipped . . . . . . . .

▫ Second Row In-Floor StoIf Equipped. . . . . . . . .

▫ Seatback Storage


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

▫ Front Seat Cupholders — (40–20–40 Seats) . . . .232

▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — FloorMounted Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

▫ Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab®. . . . . . . . . . . .233

▫ Rear Cupholder — Crew Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

▫ Glove Box Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

▫ Door Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

▫ Seatback Storage . . . . . .

▫ Storage (Regular Cab) .

▫ Storage and Seats (Crew

▫ Plastic Grocery Bag RetaiModels) . . . . . . . . . . . .

REAR WINDOW FEATUR

▫ Rear Window Defroster

▫ Power Sliding Rear Wind

If Equipped . . . . . . . .

▫ Manual Sliding Rear WinIf Equipped . . . . . . . .

FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

PICKUP BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

RAMBOX® — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

EASY-OFF TAILGATE . . .

▫ Disconnecting the Rear CKeyless Entry — If Equ

▫ Removing The Tailgate


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


▫ RamBox® Integrated Box Side Storage Bins . . .248

▫ Locking And Unlocking RamBox® . . . . . . . . .251

▫ RamBox® Safety Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252

▫ Bed Extender — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .253

▫ Bed Rail Tie-Down System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

SLIDE-IN CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

▫ Camper Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

▫ Locking Tailgate . . . . . .

TRI-FOLD TONNEAU CO

▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover

▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover

▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover ICleaning. . . . . . . . . . .

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It isa twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-shield The mirror installs on the windshield button with


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button witha counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools formounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,

left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should beadjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the nightposition (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirrorshould be adjusted while the small control under themirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Adjusting Rearv

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It isa twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button witha counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for

i Th i h d b dj d d


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be

adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glarefrom vehicles behind you.

NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rearview viewing. NOTE: The mirror contains an

button located on the bottom

Automatic Dimm

Assist Call

The rear view mirror contains an ASSIST push buttonwhich automatically connects the vehicle occupants to oneof several predefined locations for immediate support:

• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a

• Vehicle Customer Care – Tvehicle issues.

9-1-1 Call

Report an accident without takJust press 9-1-1 on your mirro


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Roadside Assistance If you get a flat tire, or need atow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be con-nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance

will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.

• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle supportfor Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access via Mo- bile features.

Just press 9 1 1 on your mirro

CAUTI

To avoid damage to the mirrospray any cleaning solution Apply the solution onto a cmirror clean.

Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear ViewCamera Display — If Equipped

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It isa twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with

t l k i t ti d i t l f


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools formounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,

left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should beadjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glarefrom vehicles behind you.

When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear a videodisplay illuminates to display the image generated by therear view camera located on the tailgate handle. The autodimming feature is also disabled to improve rear view

viewing.

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, to center on the adjacent lan

overlap of the view obtained o

Automatic Dimming Mirror

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger sideconvex mirror will look smaller and farther awaythan they really are. Relying too much on yourpassenger side convex mirror could cause you to


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


passenger side convex mirror could cause you tocollide with another vehicle or other object. Use yourinside mirror when judging the size or distance of a

vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger sidemirror.

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature

All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manu-ally folded both forward and rearward to prevent dam-age.

CAUTI

It is recommended to fold t

rearward position to resist dcar wash or a narrow locatio

Folding M

Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped

If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can beelectrically folded rearward and unfolded into the driveposition.

The switch for the power folding mirrors is located


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, press

the switch a second time and the mirrors will return tothe normal driving position.

If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled,a potential extra button push is required to get themirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does notelectrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivotarea which can cause excessive drag.

Power Folding M

Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mirrors

You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if thefollowing occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.

• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/

Power Mirrors — If Equippe

The controls for the power mdriver’s door trim panel.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.

• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.

• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal drivingspeeds.

To reset the power folding mirrors : Fold and unfoldthem by pressing the button. (This may require multiple button pushes). This resets them to their normal position.

The power mirror controls cotons and a four-way mirror co

Power Mirror Con

To adjust a mirror, press eith button to select the mirror tha

Using the mirror control switcarrows for the direction that yo


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Power Mirror Controls

1 — Mirror Select Buttons2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch

Power Mirror M

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. Thisfeature can be activated whenever you turn on the

rear window defroster (if equipped). Some vehicles maynot be equipped with rear window defroster, in this casethe heated mirrors will still function as intended Refer to

Illuminated Vanity Mirror —

Illuminated vanity mirrors areTo use the mirror, rotate the sthe mirror cover upward. Thematically. Closing the mirror c


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the heated mirrors will still function as intended. Refer to“Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Fea-tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —If Equipped

The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust forglare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto-matically adjust for headlight glare when the insidemirror adjusts.

Illuminated Va

“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor —If Equipped

The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addi-tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out thesun.

T th “Slid O R d” f t t t th i


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visordownward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the

“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desiredposition.

“Slide-On-Rod

Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirrorhead to provide a greater vision range when towingextra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in orout).

NOTE: Fold the trailer towingentering an automated car wa

A small blindspot mirror is loand can be adjusted separately


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


out).

Trailer Towing Position

Blindspot

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of thevehicle.

WARNING!

Driver’s Power Seat — If Eq

Some models may be equippeddriver’s seat. The power seat soutboard side of the driver’s sepower seat switches that are ument of the seat cushion and t


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside oroutside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injuredor killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourvehicle that is not equipped with seats and seatbelts. In a collision, people riding in these areas aremore likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a seat belt properly.

Adjusting The Seat Forward

The seat can be adjusted bothPush the seat switch forward move in the direction of the swhen the desired position has

Adjusting The Seat Up Or D


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Adjusting The Seat Up Or D

The height of the seats can be aupward or push downward owill move in the direction oswitch when the desired posit

Tilting The Seat Up Or Dow

The angle of the seat cushiondirections. Pull upward or pusor rear of the seat switch, the

cushion will move in the directhe switch when the desired p

Power Seat Switches

1 — Power Seat Switch2 — Power Seatback Switch

Reclining The Seatback

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward orrearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Releasethe switch when the desired position is reached.

WARNING! (C

• Do not ride with the seatbshoulder belt is no longer rIn a collision you could swhich could result in seriou


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.Moving a seat while driving could result in loss ofcontrol which could cause a collision and seriousinjury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked. Seriousinjury or death could result from a poorly adjustedseat belt.

(Continued)

CAUTI

Do not place any article uimpede its ability to move asthe seat controls. Seat travelmovement is stopped by an path.

Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped

Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas-senger seat. The power seat switch is located on theoutboard side of the seat. The switch is used to controlthe movement of the seat and seat cushion.

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.

Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat willmove in the direction of the switch. Release the switchwhen the desired position has been reached.

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seatsmay be also be equipped with power lumbar. The powerlumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the

power seat. Push the switch forward to increase thelumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decreasethe lumbar support.

Lumbar Contr

Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the front and rear seats may beequipped with heaters located in the seat cushions.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

Front Heated Seats

There are two heated seat switthe radio that allow the driverthe seats independently. The located near the bottom cente(below the climate controls) o


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skinbecause of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-tion or other physical condition must exercise carewhen using the seat heater. It may cause burnseven at low temperatures, especially if used forlong periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback thatinsulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting

in a seat that has been overheated could causeserious burns due to the increased surface tempera-ture of the seat.

You can choose from HIGH, L

Red indicator lights in each swheat in use. Two indicator HIGH, one for LOW and none

Press the swlevel heatinond time to Press the swthe heating

same procedradio.

NOTE:

• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt withintwo to five minutes.

• The engine must be running for the heated seats tooperate.

Vehicle Equipped With Remo

On models that are equipped wer’s heated seat can be programremote start. Refer to “RemoEquipped” in “Things to Knowhicle” for further information.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The heated seats switch from HIGH to LOW and fromLOW to OFF automatically, based on time and tempera-ture of the seat. The heated seats can operate on HIGHheat for a maximum of 60 minutes before switching toLOW heat at that time, the number of illuminated LEDschanges from two to one, indicating the change. Once aseat has switched to the LOW heat setting it may operatefor a maximum of 45 minutes before automaticallyshutting OFF. The heated seats can shut OFF early or maynot turn on when the seat is already warm.

Rear Heated Seats

On some models, the two outwith heated seats. The heateseats are located on the rear o

There are two heated seat switches that allow the rearpassengers to operate the seats independently. You canchoose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amberindicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat inuse. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, onefor LOW and none for OFF.

of operation. Then, the heat normal HIGH-level. If the HIGthe system will automatically smaximum of 60 minutes of contime, the number of illuminateto one, indicating the change. Tturn OFF automatically after a


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Press the switch once to select HIGH-levelheating. Press the switch a second time to selectLOW-level heating. Press the switch a thirdtime to shut the heating elements OFF.

NOTE:

• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt withintwo to five minutes.

• The engine must be running for the heated seats to

operate.When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater willprovide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes

turn OFF automatically after a

Ventilated Seats — If Equip

On some models, both the drivventilated. Located in the seat draws air from the passenger cair through fine perforationskeep the driver and front paambient temperatures.

The ventilated seat switches

bank in the center stack of t

below the climate controls as well as soft-keys located inthe radio screen. The fans operate at two speeds, HIGHand LOW.

Press the switch once to choose HIGH,press it a second time to choose LOW.Pressing the switch a third time willt th til t d t OFF Wh

Vehicles Equipped With Rem

On models equipped with ventilated seat can be programremote start. Refer to “RemoEquipped” in “Things to KnVehicle” for further informatio


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


turn the ventilated seat OFF. WhenHIGH speed is selected both lights on

the switch will be illuminated. WhenLOW speed is selected one light will

be illuminated.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilatedseats to operate.

Manual Seat Adjuster — If

Both front seats are adjustablemanual seat adjustment handlcushion at the front edge of ea

WARNI

• Adjusting a seat while driMoving a seat while drivincontrol which could causeinjury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted b


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slidethe seat forward or backward. Release the bar once youhave reached the desired position. Then, using bodypressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to besure that the seat adjusters have latched.

• Seats should be adjusted bbelts and while the veh

injury or death could resulseat belt.

Manual Seat Adjuster

Dump Feature — Manual Recline Seat Only —Standard Cab

Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback toswing (dump) forward on manual recliner seats. This“dump” feature allows access to the storage bin behindthe seat.

40-20-40 Front Bench Seat

The seat is divided into threeseat portions are each 40% of tOn some models the back of easily folds down to provide acompartment.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

• Do not stand or lean in front of the seat whileactuating the handle. The seatback may swingforward and hit you causing injury.

• To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatbackand actuate the handle, then position the seatbackin the desired position.

Mega Cab® Rear Seat Feat

Reclining Rear Seats — If E

The recliner handle is locatedcushion. To adjust the seatbhandle, lean back on the seatbthe desired position, release th

Folding Rear Seat (Table M

Both the left and right rear seatand used as a table.

To fold down either rear seatb

1. Lift the handle, located nex


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,which could result in serious injury or death.

Rear Seat Recliner Handle

Table Mode

2. Fold the seatback forward. Folding Rear Seat — If Equ

Both the outboard rear seats wwhen the seatback is folded fl

WARNI

• It is dangerous to ride in


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the uprightposition. Be sure the seatback is locked in place.

goutside of a vehicle. In a co

these areas are more likelyor killed.

• Do not allow people to rvehicle that is not equippbelts.

• Be sure everyone in your using a seat belt properly.

Table Mode


• Cargo must be securely tied down before drivingyour vehicle. Improperly secured cargo can flyaround in a sudden stop or collision and strikesomeone in the vehicle, causing serious injury ordeath.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


To fold either rear seat flat:

1. Lift the handle, located on the outboard side of eitherof the rear seats.

2. Fold the seatback down and

Hand

WARNI

An improperly latched seatjury or death. Make sure thatlocked into position. If the slocked into position the seproper stability for child sea


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the uprightposition. Be sure the seat is locked in place.

p p y

Head RestraintsHead restraints are designed t by restricting head movemenimpact. Head restraints shouldof the head restraint is located

Rear Passenger Fold-Flat Seats

WARNING!

The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving avehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


or removed could cause serious injury or death in the

event of a collision.

Front Head Restraints

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the headrestraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjust-ment button, located on the base of the head restraint,and push downward on the head restraint.

Rear Head Restraints

The rear seats are equipped straints. To raise the head rest

head restraint. To lower the adjustment button, located orestraint, and push downward

Adjustment

• The head restraints should ofied technicians, for service the head restraints require rized dealer.

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT —

This feature allows the driver t


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE:

• The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and QuadCab) has only one adjustment position that is used to

aid in the routing of a tether. Refer to “OccupantRestraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting YourVehicle” for further information.

memory profiles for easy r

switch. Each memory profile settings for the driver seat, pedals (if equipped) and a sepresets. Your Remote Keylesscan also be programmed to when the UNLOCK button is

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipmitters. One RKE transmitter

position 1 and the other tranmemory position 2.

Adjustment Button

The memory seat buttons are located on the outboardside of the drivers seat cushion.

Programming The Memory

NOTE: To create a new memfollowing:

Vehicles Equipped With Keyle

1. Without pressing the brakeSTART/STOP button and


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


START/STOP button and ON/RUN position (Do not

2. Adjust all memory profile sences (seat, side mirrors, adstation presets).

3. Press and release the S (Seswitch.

4. Within five seconds, pressmemory buttons (1) or (2Information Center (EVImemory position has been

Memory Seat Buttons

Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go

1. Insert the ignition key fob, and turn the ignition switchto the ON/RUN position.

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-ences (seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals [if equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column[if i d] d di t ti t )

NOTE:

• Memory profiles can be sePARK, but the vehicle mumemory profile.

• The Recall Memory with Rfeature can be enabled throuI f ti C t (EVIC)


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


[if equipped], and radio station presets).

3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memoryswitch.

4. Within five seconds, press and release either of thememory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC) will display whichmemory position has been set.

Information Center (EVIC),

Information Center (EVIC)/Features” in “Understandinfor further information.

Linking And Unlinking TheTransmitter To Memory

Your RKE transmitters can be of two pre-programmed memoUNLOCK button on the RKE t

NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters youmust select the “Remote Linked to Memory” featurethrough the Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow-

3. Once the profile has been rthe SET (S) button on the mand release button (1) or (Profile Set” (1 or 2) will dcluster on vehicles equippe

4. Press and release the LOtransmitter within 10 secon


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p g y ping:

1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change theignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go).

2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).

NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set,refer to Programming The Memory Feature for instruc-tions on how to set a memory profile.

NOTE: Your RKE transmittermemory settings by following ing the UNLOCK button (insttransmitter in Step 4.

Memory Position Recall

NOTE: The vehicle must be inpositions. If a recall is attemptin PARK, a message will be dVehicle Information Center (EV

Driver One Memory Position Recall

• To recall the memory settings for driver one using thememory switch , press MEMORY button number 1 onthe memory switch.

• To recall the memory settings for driver one using theRKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on theRKE transmitter linked to memory position 1

• To recall the memory settingRKE transmitter, press theRKE transmitter linked to m

A recall can be cancelled MEMORY buttons during a rrecall is cancelled, the driver’sthe pedals stop moving. A dela


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.

Driver Two Memory Position Recall

• To recall the memory setting for driver two using thememory switch, press MEMORY button number 2 onthe memory switch.

before another recall can be se

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE

To open the hood, two latches

1. Pull the hood release lever wheel at the base of the ins


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hoodand push the safety latch lever to the left to release it, before raising the hood.

CAUTI

To prevent possible damage,close it. Use a firm downwardof the hood to ensure that b

Hood Release Safety Latch Location (1

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving yourvehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could openwhen the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.Failure to follow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


LIGHTSThe headlight switch is located on the left side of theinstrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head-light switch controls the operation of the headlights,parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights andfog lights (if equipped).

Your vehicle is equipped withlight (if equipped) lenses that atible to stone breakage than glscratch resistant as glass and

cleaning procedures must be f

Headlight Swit

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses andreducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. Toremove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-lowed by rinsing.

CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,

Automatic Headlights — If This system automatically turnaccording to ambient light leverotate the headlight switch to


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g psteel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the

lenses.

Headlights

To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlightswitch clockwise to the headlight position.When the headlight switch is on, the parkinglights, taillights, license plate light and instru-

ment panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the

headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off)position. When the system is on, the H

also on. This means the headli

Automatic Headl

90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFFposition. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn theheadlight switch out of the AUTO position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.

Headlights On With Wipers (Available WithAutomatic Headlights Only)

Daytime Running Lights (DThe headlights on your vehicleengine is started and the traexcept PARK. This providescondition until the ignition iilluminate at less than 50% oparking brake is applied, the (DRL) ill t OFF Al if t


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn onapproximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned onif the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. Inaddition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers areturned off, if they were turned on by this feature.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features (SETUP)” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

(DRL) will turn OFF. Also, if a t

DRL lamp on the same side of tthe duration of the turn signalsignal is no longer active, the D

Headlight Delay

To aid in your exit, your veheadlight delay that will leaapproximately 90 seconds. Th

the ignition is turned OFF whon, and then the headlight swit

delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlightswitch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.

The headlight delay time is programmable on vehiclesequipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) or a Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” or “Customer- ProgrammableF t U t® A 8 4 S tti ” i “U d

NOTE:• Automatic High Beam H

turned on or off using the U“Uconnect® Settings” in “Ument Panel” for further info

• Broken, muddy, or obstructeof vehicles in the field of vie


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Features — Uconnect® Access 8.4 Settings ” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — IfEquipped

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control systemprovides increased forward lighting at night by automat-ing high beam control through the use of a digital cameramounted on the inside rearview mirror. This cameradetects vehicle specific light and automatically switchesfrom high beams to low beams until the approachingvehicle is out of view.

of vehicles in the field of vieremain on longer (closer to tand other obstructions on lens will cause the system to

If the windshield or AutomatControl mirror is replaced, theto ensure proper performance.dealer.

To Activate1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the

EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Un-derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-mation.

2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the

To DeactivatePerform either of the followinSmartBeam™ system.

1. Select “Automatic High BeEVIC. Refer to “Electronic V(EVIC)/Customer-Programmderstanding Your Instrumen


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


gAUTO (A) position.

3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switchthe headlights to the high beam position. Refer to“Multifunction Lever” in this section for further infor-mation.

NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle isat, or above, 25 mph (40 km/h).

gmation.

2. Pull the multifunction leverheadlights from the high position.

3. Rotate the headlight switch (A) to the on position.

Parking Lights And Panel LightsTo turn on the parking lights and instrumentpanel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.

To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off) position.

Fog Lights — If Equipped

The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight

switch to the parking light or headlight position andpushing in the headlight rotary control.

The fog lights will operate onlare on or when the vehicle heAn indicator light located in tilluminate when the fog lights

Fog Light S

turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, whenthe headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or thehigh beam is selected.

Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left onafter the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound whenthe driver’s door is opened.

eight minutes. If the headlightfor eight minutes while the iglights will automatically turn

NOTE: Battery saver mode is ON.

Interior Lights

Courtesy and dome lights are


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Battery SaverTo protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load sheddingis provided for both the interior and exterior lights.

If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way upto the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interiorlights will automatically turn off.

If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycledOFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after

Courtesy and dome lights are

doors are opened, when the wheel on the bottom of the swright detent position, or if equi button is pressed on the Remtransmitter. When a door is opare on, rotating the dimmer conOFF detent, will cause all theThis is also known as the Part

the doors to stay open for ewithout discharging the vehicl

The brightness of the instrument panel as well as theambient lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmercontrol right (brighter) or left (dimmer). When the head-lights are on you can supplement the brightness of theodometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console byrotating the control to the right until you hear a click. Thisfeature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful whenheadlights are required during the day.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g q g y

Courtesy/Reading Lights

Both lights in the overhead cocompartment will illuminate door is opened, when the dimmcourtesy light position (full rigUNLOCK button is pressed on

Dimmer C

(RKE) transmitter, if equipped. These lights are alsooperated individually as reading lights by pressing onthe corresponding lens.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: The courtesy/reading the switch is pressed a second been turned off before leavinglights are left on after the igniti

automatically turn off after 15

Front Courtesy/Reading Lights

Rear Passenger Courte

Ambient LightThe overhead console is equipped with an ambient lightfeature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-ity of the floor console area.

Cargo LightThe cargo lights are turned on button.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The cargo lights will also turnseconds when a RKE transmpressed, as part of the Illumin

Ambient Light

Cargo Light

Multifunction LeverThe multifunction lever is located on the left side of thesteering column.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrowson each side of the instrument cluster flash to showproper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p p p g g

NOTE: If either light remainsthere is a very fast flash rate, chlight bulb. If an indicator failsmoved, it would suggest th

defective.

Turn Signa

Lane Change AssistTap the lever up or down once, without moving beyondthe detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flashthree times then automatically turn off.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights bypartially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-

High/Low Beam SwitchPush the multifunction levepanel to switch the headlightsmultifunction lever back towaturn the low beams back on, o


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p y p g

ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights toturn on until the lever is released.

High/Low Bea

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERSWindshield Wipers

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in themultifunction lever. Turn the end of the handle to selectthe desired wiper speed.

Windshield Wiper OperatioRotate the end of the lever upwthe intermittent settings for loRotate the end of the lever upwpast the intermittent settings fotion.

Intermittent Wiper System


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The intermittent feature of thiuse when weather conditions mwith a variable pause betwemaximum delay between cycleinto the upper end of the dela

The delay interval decreases asit enters the low continual spe be regulated from a maximu

between cycles, to a cycle eveintervals will double in duratiois 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

Windshield WashersTo use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward tothe second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and thewiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washerknob is released from this position. If the washer knob isdepressed while in the delay range, the wiper willoperate for several seconds after the washer knob is

WARNI

Sudden loss of visibility tcould lead to a collision. Yvehicles or other obstacles. Tthe windshield during freewindshield with the defrowindshield washer use.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p

released. It will then resume the intermittent intervalpreviously selected. If the washer knob is pushed whilein the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycleapproximately three times after the wash knob is re-leased.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer systemin cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets orexceeds the temperature range of your climate. This

rating information can be found on most washer fluidcontainers.

Mist Feature

When a single wipe to clear ofa passing vehicle is needed,located on the end of the multthe first detent and release. Ttime and automatically shut o

NOTE: The mist feature doe

pump; therefore, no washer flwindshield. The wash functionspray the windshield with wa

Rain Sensing Wipers — If EquippedThis feature senses moisture on the windshield andautomatically activates the wipers for the driver. Thefeature is especially useful for road splash or oversprayfrom the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotatethe end of the multifunction lever to one of five settingsto activate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the

NOTE:• The Rain Sensing feature w

wiper switch is in the low o

• The Rain Sensing feature mwhen ice, or dried salt wateshield.

• Use of Rain-X® or products


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the

multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the leastsensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi-tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires lesswiper sensitivity. Setting 4 and 5 can be used if the driverdesires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in theOFF position when not using the system.

p

may reduce Rain Sensing pe• A customer programmable

Vehicle Information CenterSensing feature to be turneVehicle Information Center(Customer-Programmable Fing Your Instrument Panel”

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for thewiper blades and arms, and will not operate under thefollowing conditions:

• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition isfirst turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will notoperate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speedis greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).

Remote Start Mode Inhibit with Remote Starting system,not operational when the vehmode. Once the operator is in the ignition switch in the RUwiper operation can resume, ino other inhibit conditions (me



8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p g

• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When theignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will notoperate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speedis greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever ismoved out of the NEUTRAL position.


This feature allows you to upward or downward. The tsteering column, below the mu

Pull the lever toward the steesteering column. With one hawheel, move the steering columRelease the lever to lock the s

place.

WARNING! (Cthe driver to lose control ofollow this warning may redeath.

HEATED STEERING WHEE

The steering wheel contains a hh d i ld


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-

ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause

(Continued)

warm your hands in cold weawheel has only one temperatursteering wheel has been turnapproximately 30 to 80 minushutting off. The heated steerinor may not turn on when the warm.

Tilt Steering Lever

The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch bank below the climate controls. There are also soft-keysin the radio screen that will activate the heated steeringwheel.

Press the switch to turn on the heatedsteering wheel. The light on the switchwill illuminate to indicate the steeringwheel heater is on. Pressing the switch

Vehicles Equipped With Rem

On models that are equipped wsteering wheel can be programremote start. Refer to “RemoEquipped” in “Things to Knowhicle” for further information.

WARNI


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


a second time will turn off the heatedsteering wheel and light indicator.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heatedsteering wheel to operate.

• Persons who are unable tbecause of advanced age, cspinal cord injury, medicattion, or other physical cocare when using the steericause burns even at low teused for long periods.

WARNING! (Continued)• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steeringwheel covers of any type and material. This maycause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow agreater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt andseat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or awayfrom the driver to provide improved position with thesteering wheel.

The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the steering column.

• The pedals can be adjusted

• The pedals cannot be adjusREVERSE or when the Electem is on. The following mes

vehicles equipped with the Etion System (EVIC) if the p

Adjustable Ped

adjusted when the system is locked out (“AdjustablePedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad- justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.

NOTE:

• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows fullpedal travel.

• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find

CAUTI

Do not place any article undor impede its ability to moveto the pedal controls. Pedal ited if movement is stopped adjustable pedal’s path.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the best possible seat/pedal position.• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you

can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitteror the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panelto return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmedpositions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under-standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation.

WARNIDo not adjust the pedals whiYou could lose control and hadjust the pedals while the v

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONT

When engaged, the Electronicaccelerator operations at spee(40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on theright side of the steering wheel.

NOTE: In order to ensure prtronic Speed Control System hdown if multiple Speed Controthe same time. If this occurs, thSystem can be reactivated bSpeed Control ON/OFF buttonvehicle set speed.

To Activate


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Push the ON/OFF button. Thethe instrument cluster will illumoff, push the ON/OFF button Indicator Light will turn offturned off when not in use.

Electronic Speed Control Switches

1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -

WARNING!Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system onwhen not in use is dangerous. You could accidentallyset the system or cause it to go faster than you want.You could lose control and have an accident. Alwaysleave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake peda button, or normal brake prevehicle will deactivate Electronerasing the set speed memor button or turning the ignition speed memory.

To Resume Speed


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehiclehas reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) buttonand release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle willoperate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speedand on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.

p

To resume a previously set button and release. Resume cabove 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

When the Electronic Speed Ccrease speed by pushing the REis continually pressed, the se

increase until the button is respeed will be established.

Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph(1.0 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.0 km/h).

To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control isset, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continuallyheld in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue todecrease until the button is released. Release the buttonwhen the desired speed is reached, and the new set speedwill be established

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you wpedal is released, the vehicle w

Using Electronic Speed Con

The transmission may downshvehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


will be established.

Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph(1.0 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.0 km/h).

NOTE: Tap results of 1 mph or 1 km/h depends onselection of US or METRIC units in the EVIC displaysettings menu, or the RADIO settings menu (dependenton vehicle configuration).

speed up and down hills. Amoderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speedit may be preferable to drive Control.

WARNING!Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where thesystem cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and youcould lose control and have an accident. Do not useElectronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roadsthat are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

ParkSense® will retain the lasdisabled) from the last ignitionchanged to the ON/RUN posi

ParkSense® can be active onlyREVERSE. If ParkSense® is eposition, the system will remaspeed is increased to approximabove. The system will become


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST —IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visualand audible indications of the distance between the rearfascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® SystemUsage Precautions for limitations of this system andrecommendations.

speed is decreased to speeds6 mph (9 km/h).

ParkSense® Sensors

The four ParkSense® sensors, bumper, monitor the area bewithin the sensors’ field of vieobstacles from approximately(200 cm) from the rear fascia/

direction, depending on the lotion of the obstacle.

ParkSense® Warning Display

The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Pro-grammable Features section of the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC) or from the Uconnect® Sys-tem (if available). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” or Uconnect® Settings” (if available) in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

ParkSense® Display

When the vehicle is in REVERwill turn ON indicating the sy

The system will indicate a detea single arc in the left and/or rthe object’s distance and locati

If an object is detected in the lefthe display will show a single s


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


available) in Understanding Your Instrument Panel forfurther information.

The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within theElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It providesvisual warnings to indicate the distance between the rearfascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” inUnderstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-

mation.

p y gright rear region and the systethe vehicle moves closer to thshow the single arc moving clotone will change from a single 1fast, to continuous.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Single 1/2 Second Tone Slow To


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Fast Tone Continuou

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an o

WARNING ALERTS

Rear Distance(in/cm)

Greater than79 in (200 cm)

79-45 in(200-115 cm)

45-31 in(115-80 cm)

31-18 i(80-45 c

Audible AlertChime

None Single 1/2Second Tone

Slow Fast

Arc None 4th Solid 3rd 2nd


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Arc None 4th Solid 3rdSolid

2ndFlashin

Radio VolumeReduced

No Yes Yes Yes

NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®

ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with theParkSense® switch.

When the ParkSense switch is pressed to dis-able the system, the instrument cluster willdisplay the “PARKSENSE OFF” message forapproximately five seconds. Refer to “Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-

The ParkSense® switch LE

ParkSense® is disabled or dswitch LED will be OFF when

If the ParkSense switch is prdisabled or requires service, twill blink momentarily, and th

Service The ParkSense® RSystem


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and thesystem is disabled, the EVIC will display the“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle isin REVERSE.

NOTE: The ParkSense® system will automatically dis-able when the system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake

Module. The EVIC will display “PARKSENSE OFF”message for as long as the vehicle is in reverse.

During vehicle start up, when Assist System has detected instrument cluster will actuatignition cycle, and it will dUNAVAILABLE WIPE REAPARKSENSE UNAVAILABLmessage. Refer to “Electronic V(EVIC)” in “Understanding Yo

further information. When th

REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condi-

tion, the EVIC will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UN-AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for as longas the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,ParkSense® will not operate.

If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORSappears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) make sure the outer surface and the underside of

Cleaning The ParkSense®

Clean the ParkSense® sensors and a soft cloth. Do not use rouscratch or poke the sensors. Oage the sensors.

ParkSense® System Usage

NOTE:


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


( )the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice,mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the igni-tion. If the message continues to appear, see an autho-rized dealer.

If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED

appears in the EVIC, see your authorized dealer.

• Ensure that the rear bumperdirt and debris to keep the ating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, aaffect the performance of Pa

• When you turn ParkSense® will display PARKSENSE

you turn ParkSense® off, it it on again, even if you cycl

• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE

position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrumentcluster will display PARKSENSE OFF message for aslong as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense® , when on, will reduce the volume of theradio when it is sounding a tone.

• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking carenot to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not

obstacle as a sensor

PARKSENSE UNAVAILABmessage to be displayed in

• On vehicles equipped witshould be disabled when thor open position and the vlowered tailgate could provan obstacle is behind the ve


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.Failure to do so can result in the system not workingproperly. The ParkSense® system might not detect anobstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could providea false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/ bumper.

• Obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,must not be placed within 18 in (45 cm) from the rear

fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to doso can result in the system misinterpreting a close

CAUTI

• ParkSense® is only a parkirecognize every obstacle, inParking curbs might be temdetected at all. Obstacles the sensors will not be declose proximity.

CAUTION! (Continued)• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in timewhen an obstacle is detected. It is recommendedthat the driver looks over his/her shoulder whenusing ParkSense®.

WARNING!

WARNING! (C• Before using ParkSense®

mended that the ball moubly is disconnected fromvehicle is not used for towresult in injury or damagebecause the hitch ball wilobstacle than the rear fasci


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Drivers must be careful when backing up evenwhen using ParkSense®. Always check carefullybehind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sureto check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.You are responsible for safety and must continue topay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do socan result in serious injury or death.

(Continued)

sounds the continuous tcould detect the ball mounbly, depending on its size indication that an obstacle

PARKSENSE® FRONT AND IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense® Park Assist sy

audible indications of the dand/or front fascia and a detec

up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.

Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limi-tations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled ordisabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition ischanged to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is inREVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of

ParkSense® Sensors

The four ParkSense® sensors, bumper, monitor the area bewithin the sensors’ field of vieobstacles from approximately(200 cm) from the rear fascia/direction, depending on the lotion of the obstacle.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


these shift lever positions, the system will remain activeuntil the vehicle speed is increased to approximately7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warning willappear in the EVIC indicating the vehicle is aboveParkSense® operating speed. The system will becomeactive again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speedsless than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

The six ParkSense® sensors, lo bumper, monitor the area in fwithin the sensors’ field of vieobstacles from approximately(120 cm) from the front fascia/direction, depending on the lotion of the obstacle.

ParkSense® Warning Display

The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -Programmable Features section of the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC) or from the Uconnect® Sys-tem (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Pro-grammable Features)” or Uconnect® Settings” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

ParkSense® Display

The warning display will turn status when the vehicle is invehicle is in DRIVE and an ob

The system will indicate a detea single arc in the left and/or rthe obstacle’s distance and loca

If an obstacle is detected in t


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


formation.

The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within theElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It providesvisual warnings to indicate the distance between the rearfascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the de-tected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC)/Settings” in Understanding Your Instru-ment Panel” for further information.

region, the display will showand/or right rear region and tone. As the vehicle moves cdisplay will show the single vehicle and the tone will changtone to slow, to fast, to continu

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and soun

following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obsta

WARNING ALERTS

Rear Distance(in/cm)

Greater than 79in (200 cm)

79-45 in(200-115 cm)

45-31 in(115-80 cm)

31-18 in(80-45 cm

Front Distance(in/cm)

Greater than 47in (120 cm)

47-39 in(120-100 cm)

39-25 in(100-65 cm)

25-12 in(65-30 cm

Audible Alert None Single 1/2 Slow (for rear Fast


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


(Chime) Second Tone(for rear only)

only)

Arcs None 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flash

Radio VolumeReduced

No Yes Yes Yes

NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Front Park Assist Audible Alerts

ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audiblealert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when anobstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.

Adjustable Chime Volume Settings

Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selectedfrom the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if equipped.

Enabling And Disabling Fro

ParkSense®

Front ParkSense® can be enabFront ParkSense® switch.

Rear ParkSense® can be enabRear ParkSense® switch.

When the Front or Rpressed to disable th

l ll d l


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


If Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume settingswill not be accessible from the EVIC.

The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, andHIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.

ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration statethrough ignition cycles.

cluster will displaymessage for approxi

to “Electronic Vehicle Inform“Understanding Your Instruinformation.

When the shift lever is moved or Rear system is disabled, tFRONT PARKSENSE OFF or

message for five seconds, follo

OFF in the corresponding side. This car graphic will be

displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

NOTE: Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense® system,will interrupt the five second messages, and the EVICwill display the car graphic with the corresponding arcsand OFF message.

The Front or Rear ParkSense® switch LED will be ONwhen Front or Rear ParkSense® is disabled or requires

i Th F R P kS ® i h LED ill

Service The ParkSense® P

During vehicle start up, whenhas detected a faulted conditiwill actuate a single chime, oncwill display the PARKSENSREAR SENSORS, PARKSENFRONT SENSORS, or the

ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED When the shift lever is moved

h d d f l d di i


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


service. The Front or Rear ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the Front or Rear system is enabled. If theFront or Rear ParkSense® switch is pressed, and thesystem requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense®switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LEDwill be ON.

has detected a faulted conditioPARKSENSE UNAVAILABLEPARKSENSE UNAVAILABLEor PARKSENSE UNAVAILABpop up message for five secondgraphic will be displayed witther the front or rear sensor locthe fault is detected. The system

arc alerts for the side that is fu

arc alerts will interrupt the PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-

ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS, or PARKSENSE UN-AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED messages if an objectis detected within the five second pop-up duration. Thecar graphic will remain displayed for as long as thevehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS

If the PARKSENSE UNAV

QUIRED message appears inrized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense®

Clean the ParkSense® sensors and a soft cloth. Do not use rouscratch or poke the sensors. Oage the sensors.

P kS ® S t U


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORSor PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-SORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC) make sure the outer surface and theunderside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/ bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or otherobstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the messagecontinues to appear see an authorized dealer.

ParkSense® System Usage

NOTE:

• Ensure that the front and reaice, mud, dirt and debris system operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, aaffect the performance of Pa

• When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense® off, the

instrument cluster will display “FRONT PARKSENSEOFF” or “REAR PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,once you turn Front or Rear ParkSense® off, it remainsoff until you turn it on again, even if you cycle theignition key.

• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSEposition and Front or Rear ParkSense® is turned off,the instrument cluster will display FRONT

PARKSENSE OFF REAR PARKSENSE OFF

Failure to do so can result i

properly. The ParkSense® sobstacle behind or in front ocould provide a false indic behind or in front of the fas

• Use the ParkSense® switchsystem off if obstacles suchhitches, etc. are placed withrear fascia/bumper. Failure

t i i t ti


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


PARKSENSE OFF or REAR PARKSENSE OFF mes-sage for five seconds, followed by a car graphic withOFF in the corresponding side. This car graphic will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of theradio when it is sounding a tone.

• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care

not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.

system misinterpreting a cproblem, causing the “PARSERVICE REQUIRED” messinstrument cluster.

• On vehicles equipped witshould be disabled when thor open position. A lowerefalse indication that an obst

CAUTION!• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to

recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or notdetected at all. Obstacles located above or belowthe sensors will not be detected when they are inclose proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

P kS ® i d t b bl t t i ti

WARNI• Drivers must be careful

when using ParkSense®. behind your vehicle, look to check for pedestrians, obstructions, and blind spYou are responsible for safpay attention to your surro

lt i i i j


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in timewhen an obstacle is detected. It is recommendedthat the driver looks over his/her shoulder whenusing ParkSense®.

can result in serious injury


• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-bly is disconnected from the vehicle when thevehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so canresult in injury or damage to vehicles or obstaclesbecause the hitch ball will be much closer to theobstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeakersounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors

ld d t t th b ll t d hit h b ll

PARKVIEW® REAR BACK

IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equippedBack Up Camera that allows rear surroundings of your velever is put into REVERSE. Thin the rearview mirror disUconnect® screen — if equipnote to “check entire surround

screen After five seconds this


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a falseindication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

screen. After five seconds this

The ParkView® camera is lotailgate handle.

When the vehicle is shifted outdelay turned OFF), the rear cathe navigation or audio screen

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera

delay turned ON), The rear camera image will be dis-played for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of RE-VERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or theignition is switched to the OFF position.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on theimage to illustrate the width of the vehicle and itsprojected backup path based on the steering wheel

position The active guide lines will show separate zones

The following table shows the

each zone:

Zones

Red

Yellow

Green


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


position. The active guide lines will show separate zonesthat will help indicate the distance to the rear of thevehicle.

WARNI

Drivers must be careful wheusing the ParkView® Rear Bcheck carefully behind yourcheck for pedestrians, animstructions, or blind spots bef

responsible for the safety of


must continue to pay attention while backing up.Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should onlybe used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera isunable to view every obstacle or object in yourdrive path

Turning ParkView® On Or O

5.0

1. Press the “Settings” button

2. Press the “Safety & Assistan

3. Press the check box soft Backup Camera” to enable/

Turning ParkView® On Or O

8 4A/8 4AN


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


drive path.• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be

driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able tostop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-mended that the driver look frequently over his/hershoulder when using ParkView®.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds

up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

8.4A/8.4AN1. Press the “Settings” soft-ke

2. Press the “Safety & Driving

3. Press the check box soft Backup Camera” to enable/

Turning ParkView® Camera Delay On Or Off —

With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN

1. Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the Uconnect® display.

2. Press the “Settings” soft-key.

3. Press the “Parkview Backup Camera Delay ” soft-keyto turn the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay systemON or OFF.

NOTE A h k k ill i h l i b

OVERHEAD CONSOLE — I

The overhead console is locatethe review mirror. The overhfollowing features:

• Courtesy/Reading Lights

• Power Sunroof Switch — If

• Power Sliding Rear Window

•

Universal Garage Door Ope


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: A check mark will appear in the selection box toindicate the system is turned ON.

Universal Garage Door Ope

(RKE) transmitter, if equippe

operated individually as readthe corresponding lens.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Courtesy/Reading Lights

Both lights in the overhead console and rear passengercompartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when adoor is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the

courtesy light position (full right position), or when theUNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry

Overhead Console

Front Courtesy/Re

GARAGE DOOR OPENER —

HomeLink® replaces up to thrthat operate devices such as gaized gates, lighting or homHomeLink® unit is powered battery.

The HomeLink® buttons that aconsole designate the three di

nels


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on untilthe switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interiorlights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they willautomatically turn off after 15 minutes.

nels.

Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light

Before You Begin Program

Ensure your vehicle is parke before you begin programmin

For efficient programming andthe radio-frequency signal it is battery be placed in the handevice that is being programsystem.

Erase all channels before you


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-rity Alarm is active.

Erase all channels before youerase the channels place the position and press and hold th buttons (I and III) for up to 2Vehicle Information Center (EVING CHANNELS”. Release thdisplays “CHANNELS CLEAR

HomeLink® Buttons

NOTE:

• Erasing all channels should only be performed whenprogramming HomeLink® for the first time. Do noterase channels when programming additional buttons.

• If you have any problems, or require assistance, pleasecall toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atwww.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were manu-


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


For programming garage door openers that were manu-factured after 1995. These garage door openers can beidentified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button locatedwhere the hanging antenna is attached to the garage dooropener. It is NOT the button that is normally used toopen and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. 1. Turn the ignition switch to

Training The Garag

1 — Door Opener2 — Training Button

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8

cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish toprogram.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® button you want to program and the hand-held trans-mitter button.

4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC displaychanges from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN-

NEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.

5. At the garage door opene

locate the “LEARN” or “TRAusually be found where theattached to the garage doFirmly press and release thING” button. On some garathere may be a light that bliopener/device is in the LEA

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in

step after the LEARN button h


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NEL # TRAINED , then release both buttons.NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some casesfor the channel to train.

• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat fromStep 2.

step after the LEARN button h

6. Return to the vehicle andHomeLink® button twice (hseconds each time). The EVNEL # TRANSMIT”. If the gactivates, programming is c

NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-

vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) tocomplete the training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOTerase the channels.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

Programming A Non-Rollin

For programming Garage Doo before 1995.

1. Turn the ignition switch to

2. Place the hand-held transmcm) away from the HomeLprogram.

3. Simultaneously press and hbutton you want to program


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


follow these steps:1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button untilthe EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do notrelease the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining

steps.

button you want to programmitter button.

4. Continue to hold buttonschanges from “CHANNEL #NEL # TRAINED”, then rel

NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some casesfor the channel to train.

• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat fromStep 2.

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button.The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT”. If the garage door opener/device activates, program-

ming is complete.

Reprogramming A Single H

To reprogram a channel that hafollow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON

2. Press and hold the desired the indicator light begins tonot release the button.

3. Without releasing the buttoming A Non-Rolling Code


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g pTo program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOTerase the channels.

ming A Non Rolling Coderemaining steps.

Canadian/Gate Operator Pr

For programming transmittersthat require the transmitter sseveral seconds of transmissio

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-

nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to thisCanadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed totime-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cyclingprocess to prevent possible overheating of the garagedoor or gate motor.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

4. Continue to hold buttons

changes from “CHANNEL #NEL # TRAINED”, then rel

NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 secondfor the channel to train.

• If the EVIC displays “DID NStep 2.

5. Press and hold the program


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g / p

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button youwish to program.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® button while you press and release (“cycle”), yourhand-held transmitter every two seconds.

5. Press and hold the programThe EVIC will display “CHthe device is plugged in andcomplete.

If you unplugged the garageprogramming, plug it back in

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button untilthe EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do notrelease the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and

Using HomeLink®

To operate, press and reHomeLink® button. Activatioprogrammed device (i.e., garagtor, security system, entry dooing, etc.,). The hand-held tranalso be used at any time.

Security

It is advised to erase all channin your vehicle


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


/ p g g pfollow all remaining steps.

in your vehicle.

To erase the channels press aHomeLink® buttons (I and IIElectronic Vehicle Information “CLEARING CHANNELS”. Rthe EVIC displays “CHANNE

The HomeLink® Universal Trathe Vehicle Security Alarm is a

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,here are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-ter.

• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Openerto complete the training for a Rolling Code.

• Did you unplug the device for programming and

remember to plug it back in?

WARNI

• Your motorized door or gwhile you are programmiceiver. Do not program thpets or other objects are ingate. Only use this transceopener that has a “stop required by Federal safety

most garage door openeafter 1982. Do not use a gar


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p g

If you have any problems, or require assistance, pleasecall toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet atwww.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

g g pafter 1982. Do not use a garthese safety features. Call or, on the Internet at wsafety information or assis

• Vehicle exhaust contains cgerous gas. Do not run yowhile programming the tcan cause serious injury o

General Information

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and IndustryCanada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may bereceived including interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

NOTE:

• The transmitter has been teFCC and IC rules. Changespressly approved by the parance could void the user’sdevice.

• The term IC before the certif ber only signifies that Industfications were met.

O S OO Q


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


POWER SUNROOF — IF EQ

The power sunroof switch isconsole between the courtesy/

WARNI

• Never leave children unatdo not leave the key fob innot leave the ignition of aKeyless Enter-N-Go™ inmode. Occupants, particudren, can become entrappewhile operating the poweentrapment may result in

• In a collision, there is a gre


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


, gfrom a vehicle with an opalso be seriously injured oyour seat belt properly angers are also properly secu

• Do not allow small childreNever allow your fingers, object, to project through

Injury may result.

Power Sunroof Switch

Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode

To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearwardto full open. Any release of the switch will stop themovement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in apartially opened condition until the switch is pushed andheld rearward again.

Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the

forward position. Any release of the switch will stop themovement and the sunroof will remain in a partially

position. The sunroof will ope

cally. This is called “ExpressOpen operation, any movemwill stop the sunroof.

Closing Sunroof — Expres

Press the switch forward andsecond and the sunroof will cloposition. The sunroof will closcally. This is called “Express

Close operation, any moveme


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


movement and the sunroof will remain in a partiallyclosed condition until the switch is pushed and heldforward again.

Opening Sunroof — Express

Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any

the sunroof.

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obsthe sunroof during Express Cstruction in the path of the sunroof will automatically ret

tion if this occurs. Next, presrelease to Express Close.

NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result

in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will bea Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.Press and hold close switch to fully close sunroof.

Venting Sunroof — Express

Press and release the Vent button within one half secondand the sunroof will open to the vent position. This iscalled “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any

movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be descripressure on the ears or a heliears. Your vehicle may exhibiwindows down, or the sunrooopen or partially open positionrence and can be minimized. Ifthe rear windows open, open ttogether to minimize the buffet

with the sunroof open, adjusminimize the buffeting or open


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Sunshade Operation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, thesunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof isopen.

minimize the buffeting or open

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a nonabrasive cleanethe glass panel.

Ignition Off Operation

For Vehicles Not Equipped W

Information Center (EVIC)

The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45

seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCKposition. Opening either front door will cancel thisfeature.

For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC

The power sunroof switch will remain active for up toapproximately ten minutes after the ignition switch isturned to the LOCK position. Opening either front doorwill cancel this feature.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

power. The battery symbol in

connected to the battery, andtimes.

NOTE: To ensure proper opand element must be used.

CAUTI

• Do not exceed the maximumAmps) at 12 Volts. If the 1rating is exceeded the fus


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can providepower for in-cab accessories designed for use with thestandard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outletshave a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC”,together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol.

A key symbol indicates that the key must be in theON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide

gwill need to be replaced.

• Power outlets are designonly. Do not insert any otoutlets as this will damagefuse. Improper use of thedamage not covered by yoWarranty.

The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following

locations:• Lower left and lower right of the center stack when

equipped with a bench seat


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


•

Center console when equipped with bucket seats.

• Inside the upper lid of the ccompartment — if equipped

Power Outlets — Center Stack

Power Outlet — C


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Rear of the center console storage compartment —Quad Cab® or Crew Cab.

The key symbol indicates thpower when the key is in thetions.

Power Outlet — Upper Lid Power Outlet — Rea

All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be

removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use toprotect the battery against discharge.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Only devices designed for use in this type of outletshould be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving thevehicle

CAUTI

• Many accessories that capower from the vehicle’s buse (i.e., cellular phoneplugged in long enough, tdischarge sufficiently to deprevent the engine from st

• Accessories that draw higvacuum cleaners, lights, ebattery even more quickly.

l d i h


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


vehicle.• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

tently and with greater cau• After the use of high pow

long periods of the vehicleaccessories still plugged idriven a sufficient lengthgenerator to recharge the v

CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER —IF EQUIPPED

A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can beused to hold the ash receiver.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Optional Floo

1 — Cigar Lighter2 — Ash Receiver

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on thecenter stack of the instrument panel, to the right of theradio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronicsand other low power devices requiring power up to 150Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta-tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as willmost power tools.

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload

protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,the power inverter will automatically shut down Once


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the power inverter will automatically shut down. Oncethe electrical device has been removed from the outlet theinverter should automatically reset. To turn on the power outlet, s

The outlet automatically turnunplugged.

NOTE: Due to built-in overloinverter will shut down if the

Power Invert

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.• Do not touch with wet hands.• Close the lid when not in use.• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

CUPHOLDERS

Front Seat Cupholders — (40–20–40 Seats)

Front Instrument Panel CupMounted Shifter

For vehicles equipped with bcupholders located in the floo


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p ( )

The cupholders are located on the backside of the centerportion of the front seat (20). Fold down the centersection of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders.

Cuphold

Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab®

Quad Cab® vehicles may be equipped with a rearcupholder that consists of two cup wells for rear passen-ger convenience.

Rear Cupholder — Crew Ca

Crew Cab vehicles are equipplocated in the center armrest.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Crew Cab vehicles may be eqholder that consists of two cuconvenience.

Rear Cup Wells

Crew Cab Rear Arm


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


STORAGE

Glove Box Storage

The glove box is located on the passenger side of theinstrument panel and features both an upper and lower

storage area.

To open the upper glove box prelease. The glove box door w

Rear Cup Wells Glove B

1 — Upper Glove Box2 — Lower Glove Box


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


To open the lower glove box, pull on the handle to releasethe latch and lower the door.

Upper Glove Box Lower Glo

Door Storage

Front Door Storage — If EquippedStorage areas and bottle holders (drivers side only) arelocated in the door trim panels.

Rear Door Storage — Crew

Storage compartments are locapassenger door trim panels.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Front Door Storage

Rear Door S

Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped

The center storage compartment is located between thedriver and passenger seats. The storage compartmentprovides an armrest and contains both and upper andlower storage area.

WARNI

• This armrest is not a seatarmrest could be seriouslyoperation, or a collision. Oing position when the arm

• In a collision, the latch mayof the items stored exceedThese items could be throoccupants of the vehicle. I

exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Pull on the upper handle on traise the cover. The upper storpower outlet that can be useddevices, refer to “Electrical Pinformation.

Center Storage Compartment


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle toopen the lower storage bin.

WARNI

Do not operate this vehicle ment lid in the open positionplayers, and other handh

Upper Storage Compartment Lower Stora


should be stowed while driving. Use of these deviceswhile driving can cause an accident due to distrac-tion, resulting in death or injury.

Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped

In-floor storage bins are located in front of the secondrow seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage bins have removable liners that can be easily removed for

cleaning.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


To open in-floor storage bin, lifthe latch and open the lid.

NOTE: The front seat may havfully open the lid.

In-Floor Storage B


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Seatback Storage

Located in the back of both the driver and passengerfront seats are pockets that can be used for storage.

Storage (Regular Cab)

The storage bin is located behinthe length of the cab.

Opened Storage Bin Drivers Side Seat


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Storage and Seats (Crew Cab)

The Crew Cab models provide additional storage underthe rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage com-partment.

To open the storage compartments, lift upward on thehandle of the latch and open the lid.

CAUTI

Always lift the storage comthe handle. Failure to lift the can result in damage to the l

Storage Bin Crew Cab S

Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular CabModels)

Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery baghandles are built into the back panel of the cab, behindthe rear seat.

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window DefrosterThe rear window defrothe climate control pane

on the rear window defrostemirrors (if equipped). An indilluminate when the rear winrear window defroster automproximately 10 minutes. For an

operation, press the button a sNOTE: To prevent excessive b


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: To prevent excessive bwindow defroster only when t

Grocery Bag Hooks

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage tothe heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rearwindow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners onthe interior surface of the window. Use a soft clothand a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to theheating elements. Labels can be peeled off aftersoaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasivewindow cleaners on the interior surface of the

Power Sliding Rear Window

The switch for the power slidion the overhead console.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


window.• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

Push the switch to the right tswitch to the left to close the g

Rear Window

Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped

A locking device in the center of the window helps toprevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze thelock to release the window.

FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED

Quad Cab® and Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seatmay be equipped with a folding load floor.

WARNING!Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on

Unfolding the Load Floor

1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the load floor. While driving or in an accident youmay experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floormay move around with force and strike occupants,resulting in serious or fatal injury.

2. Grasp the knob on the load fthe load floor unfolds into p

Unfolding The

Positioning the Load Floor fothe Seat

1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(

2. Unsnap the securing snap loload floor.

3. Lift the load floor up to accfloor.

WARNI

Do not drive with the load fLoad Floor In Open Position


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.When stopping fast or in ancould move to the down pinjury.

Load Floor In Open Position

Load Floor Securing Straps Pick Up Box


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in thesecured down position before you operate the vehicle.

PICKUP BOX

The pickup box has many features designed for utility

and convenience.

Load Floor Securing Straps Pick Up Box

1 — Upper Load Floor Indents2 — Bulk Head Dividers3 — Cleats

NOTE: If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack orHeadache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you must

use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets that are availablefrom your authorized dealer.

You can carry wide building materials (sheets of ply-wood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumberacross the box in the indentations provided above thewheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form thefloor.

WARNING!

Th i k b i i t d d f l d i

WARNING! (C

• Care should always be exevehicle with unrestrainedmay need to be reduced.roads may cause shifting othat may result in vehicle dmaterials are to be frequention of a support is recomstrain the cargo and transf

box floor.• If you wish to carry more

material suspended abov


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• The pickup box is intended for load carrying pur-poses only, not for passengers, who should sit inseats and use seat belts.

(Continued)

material suspended abovports must be installed to tload to the pickup box flooresult. The use of propeloading up to the rated pay

• Unrestrained cargo may baccident causing serious o

There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel

housings. Place wooden boards across the box from sideto side to create separate load compartments in thepickup box.

There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs(450 kg) total.

RAMBOX® — IF EQUIPPED

The RamBox® system is an inage and cargo management sfeatures:

• Integrated box side storage

• Cargo extender/divider

• Bed rail tie-down system

RamBox® Integrated Box S

Cargo storage bins are located obox. The cargo storage bins pro


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


box. The cargo storage bins proilluminated storage for up toseries vehicles or 300 lbs (136 kvehicles of evenly distributed

CAUTI

Failure to follow the followdamage to the vehicle:

• Assure that all cargo insproperly secured.

• Do not exceed cargo weigh1500 series vehicles or 300 3500 series vehicles per bi

To open a storage bin with the and release the button locatedlid will open upward to allowRamBox® Cargo Storage Bins


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


lid will open upward to allow fully open.

NOTE: RamBox® will not opepressed if the RamBox® is loc

RamBox® Cargo Storage Bins

RamBox® Pushbutton And Lock RamBox® Lig


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The interior of the RamBox® will automatically illumi-nate when the lid is opened. In addition to the automaticillumination switch, there is a manual on/off switchlocated at the rear of each storage bin. Pushing the switchonce will turn off the bin lights, pushing the switch againwill turn the lights back on.

CAUTI

Leaving the lid open for excould cause the vehicle batteis required to stay open for e

RamBox® Pushbutton And Lock RamBox® Lig

CAUTION! (Continued)

it is recommended that the bin lights be turned offmanually using the on/off switch.

Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allowwater to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on theedge. To install push plug downward into drain hole.

NOTE: Provisions are provided in the bins for cargodividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in addi-

tion to other RamBox® accessories) are available fromMOPAR®.

L ki A d U l ki R B ®

the storage bin, insert the keypushbutton and turn clockwis

wise to unlock. Always retur(vertical) position before rempushbutton.

CAUTI

• Ensure cargo bin lids are cmoving or driving vehicle

• Loads applied to the top ominimized to prevent dlatching/hinging mechanis


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Locking And Unlocking RamBox®

Press and release the LOCK or UNLOCK button on theRKE transmitter to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgateand the RamBox® (if equipped). Refer to “Remote Key-less Entry” for further details.The RamBox® storage binscan be locked using the vehicle key. To lock and unlock

• Damage to the RamBox®heavy/sharp objects placedvehicle motion. In order todamage, secure all cargo toprotect inside surfaces ofobjects with appropriate p

RamBox® Safety Warning

Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personalinjury or damage to your vehicle:

WARNING!

• Always close the storage bin covers when yourvehicle is unattended.

• Do not allow children to have access to the storagebins. Once in the storage bin, young children may

not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.

• In an accident serious injury could result if the

RamBox® Storage Bin CoveLever — If Equipped

As a security measure, a StoraRelease is built into the storagenism.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• In an accident, serious injury could result if thestorage bin covers are not properly latched.

• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin coversopen.

• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latchedwhile the vehicle is in motion.

•

Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.

Storage Bin Cover Emerg

NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked insidethe storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from

inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark leverattached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.

Bed Extender — If Equipped

The bed extender has three functional positions:

• Storage Position

• Divider Position

• Extender Position

Storage Position

The storage position for the bedthe truck bed which maximizenot in use.

To install the bed extender iperform the following:

1. Make sure the center handvehicle key and rotate the crelease the extender side ga


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Center Handle And Lock Storage Po


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. With the side gates open, position the extender fullyforward in the bed against the front panel.

3. Rotate the side gates closeends to be positioned in frloops.

1 — Center Handle Lock2 — Handle

Cargo Tie Down Loop Side Gates


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the sidegates in the closed position.

5. Lock the center handle usinthe panel into place and ass

Divider Position

The divider position is intended for managing your cargoand assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panelswhich allow for various positions to assist in managingyour cargo.

To install the bed extender into a divider position per-form the following:

1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the

vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically torelease the extender side gates.

Center Handle


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. With the side gates open, poutboard ends align with sides of the bed.

1 — Center Handle Lock2 — Handle

Aligning Gate To Slots Side Gates


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard endsare secured into the intended slots of the bed.

4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the sidegates in the closed position.

5. Lock the center handle to seand assist against theft.

Extender Position

The extender position allows you to load the bed of thetruck beyond the tail gate. The bed extender will add anadditional 15 in (38 cm) in the back of the truck whenadditional cargo room is needed. The extender positionutilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on bothsides of the truck bed near the tailgate.

Extender P


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


To install the bed extender inperform the following:

1. Lower the tailgate.

2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate thecenter handle vertically in order to release the ex-

tender side gates.

3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin andhandle.

4. Rotate the handles to the hointo place.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Extender Installation

Locking

WARNING!

To reduce the risk of potential injury or propertydamage:

• Cargo must be secured.• Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle.• Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs.• Extender should not be used as cargo tie down.• When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs

(68 kg) load on the tailgate.•

The bed extender is not intended for off road use.• When not in use, the extender/divider should be in

stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed.

Bed Rail Tie-Down System

CAUTI

The maximum load per c250 lbs (113 kg) and the angleshould not exceed 45 degredamage to the cleat or cleat r

There are two adjustable cleathat can be used to assist in se


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• When in use all handles are to be in the lockedposition.

E h l t t b l t d d ti ht d d i f

out on the cleat and slide it desired location. Make sure

detent and tighten the nut.

Adjustable Cleats


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargoproperly secure.

To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nutcounterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull

1 — Utility Rail Detent2 — Cleat Retainer Nut3 — Utility Rail Cleat

To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the endcap by pushing up on the locking tab, located on the

bottom of the end cap. Slide the cleat off the end of therail.

SLIDE-IN CAMPERS

Camper Applications

Certain truck models are not rcampers. To determine if your refer to the “Consumer Informing” document available fromFor safety reasons, follow all itant document.

NOTE: When a cap or pickup

vehicle, an alternate Center H(CHMSL) must be provided.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Utility Rail End Cap

EASY-OFF TAILGATE

To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,

the tailgate can be removed.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera orRKE the electrical connector must be disconnected priorto removing the tailgate.

Disconnecting the Rear Camera or RemoteKeyless Entry — If Equipped

1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or RKEconnector bracket located on the rear sill.

2 Remove the connector brac

Connector B


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. Remove the connector bracing inward in the locking ta

3 Disconnect the chassis wiring harness ensuring the

5. Connect the tailgate plug (pto the tailgate wiring har

terminals do not corrode.6. Tape the tailgate harness

forward-facing surface of tvent damaging the connecting or reinstalling the tailga

Removing The Tailgate

1. Disconnect the wiring harne

or power locks (if equippedthe Rear Camera — If Equi

2 Unlatch the tailgate and rem

Locking Tab


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring theconnector bracket does not fall into the sill.

4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in theglove box) to the chassis wiring harness and insert the bracket back into the sill.

2. Unlatch the tailgate and remreleasing the lock tang from

NOTE: Make sure tailgate is ssupport cables.

3 Raise the tailgate to a 45 degree angle

6. Remove the tailgate from th

NOTE: Do not carry the tapickup box.

WARNI

To avoid inhaling carbon mothe exhaust system on vehicor Slide-In Campers” shouoverhanging camper compa

leaks.

Locking Tailgate

h l k l d

Locking Tang


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. Raise the tailgate to a 45 degree angle.

4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right sidepivot clears the hanger bracket.

5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left sidepivot.

The lock is located next to tailgate can be locked using thethe truck with the key-fob keyless entry.

TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER-IF EQUIPPED

Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri-Fold TonneauCover which consists of different features:

• Easy Tri-Fold cover

• Tonneau fore aft locator

• Crosscar inside bed locator

• Front and rear clamps

• Stowage strap

• Locking Capability

Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Re

To remove the Tonneau Cover

1. Lower the tailgate.

2. Pull down on the clamp on sides.

3. Pick up on the cover and fopanel.

4. Be sure both clamps are pu

5. Pick up on the cover and fpanel.

6 O i h hi d l


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Locking Capability

NOTE: The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and securedat the front of the box without removing completely.

6. Once in the third panel poclamp on both sides.

7. Be sure to clip both straps tostays together.

8. With two people remove th

Clamped Position

NOTE If l i i d d l i di t l

Semi Clamped


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.

NOTE: Be sure the Tonneau

Released Position Stowage


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: Be sure the Tonneaucompletely before removing.

Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation And Cleaning

Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed and

push the Cover forward against the front of the truck bed. The Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed on thevehicle. Disengage the stowage straps and unfold theTonneau Cover then attach the rear clamps to the truck bed flange to secure the Tonneau Cover to the vehicle.

The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in theclamped position by placing a lock through the lockinghole.

NOTE: Be sure the Tonneau

Locking


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


driving after installation.

For proper cleaning of the TonWhitewall &Vinyl Top CleanerVinyl Conditioner/Protectant.

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT

CONTENTS

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .273

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . . .274

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .275

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION

CENTER (EVIC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288

▫ EVIC Amber Telltales. .

▫ EVIC White Telltales . .

▫ EVIC Green Telltales . .

▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Ite

▫ Personal Settings (CustomFeatures) . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Screen Setup Driver Sele

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .290

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

▫ EVIC Red Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

▫ Screen Setup Driver Sele

Uconnect® SETTINGS. . .

▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . .

Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .335

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —

IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336

▫ CD Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .337

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .338

CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

▫ Manual Climate ControlsTouch-Screen — If Equip

▫ General Overview . . . .

▫ Summer Operation . . .

▫ Winter Operation. . . . .

▫ Vacation/Storage . . . .

▫ Window Fogging and Fr

▫ Outside Air Intake . . . .

▫ Operating Tips Chart .

272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


▫ Manual Climate Controls WithoutTouch-Screen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Headlight Switch 7 — 115v Power Inverter Outlet 13 — Gear Selector/Tran

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Power Outlet 14 — Ignition Switch3 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank 15 — Hood Release4 — Hazard Switch 10 — Instrument Panel Drawer 16 — Parking Brake Rele5 — Upper Glove Compartment 11 — Climate Controls6 — Lower Glove Compartment 12 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

1. Tachometer

The tachometer indicates engine speed in RevolutionsPer Minute (RPM x 1000).

CAUTION!

Do not operate the engine with the tachometerpointer at high RPM for extended periods. Engineoperation over 3200 RPM (Redline) can result in

significant damage that will not be covered underwarranty.

2. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Lig

This light monitors t

(ABS). The light willswitch is turned to thmay stay on for as lo

If the ABS light remains on orindicates that the anti-lock pornot functioning and that servthe conventional brake systemnormally if the BRAKE warnin

If the ABS light is on, the brakeas soon as possible to restore brakes. If the ABS light doe

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


gignition switch is turned to thethe light inspected by an auth

3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an

onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system which moni-tors the emissions and engine control system. If the

vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light will come onwhen the ignition is first turned on and remain on, as a

bulb check, until the engine is started. If the vehicle is notready for emissions testing the light will come on when theignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds,then blink for 5 seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is

started. If the bulb does not come on during starting, havethe condition investigated promptly.

If this light comes on and remains on while driving, itsuggests a potential engine control problem and the need

CAUTI

Prolonged driving with theLight (MIL) on could causecontrol system. It also could drivability. If the MIL is flconverter damage and powImmediate service is require

WARNI

A malfunctioning catalytic above, can reach higher tempoperating conditions. This d l l k fl


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


suggests a potential engine control problem and the needfor system service.

Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and notneed towing, see your authorized dealer for service assoon as possible.

drive slowly or park over flamas dry plants, wood, cardboain death or serious injury toothers.

4. Turn Signal Indicators

The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal

when the turn signal lever is operated.

NOTE:

• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is drivenmore than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.

• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if eitherindicator remains on and does not flash, or flashes at arapid rate.

5. Voltmeter

When the engine is running, the gauge indicatesthe electrical system voltage The pointer should

NOTE: The voltmeter may shvarious engine temperatures.

caused by the post-heat cyclheater system. The number of ccycling operation is controllemodule. Post-heat operation caand then the electrical system stabilize.

6. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors

including brake fluiapplication. If the brindicate that the par

the brake fluid level is low or t

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the electrical system voltage. The pointer shouldstay within the normal range if the battery is charged. If the pointer moves to either extreme left or right andremains there during normal driving, the electrical sys-tem should be serviced.

the brake fluid level is low, or tthe Anti-lock Brake System res

If the light remains on when the parking brake has beendisengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the

master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brakehydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with theBrake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.In this case, the light will remain on until the conditionhas been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brakeand a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulicsystem. A leak in either half of the dual brake system isindicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on

NOTE: The light may flash mcornering maneuvers, which

tions. The vehicle should havthe brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, imsary.

WARNI

Driving a vehicle with thedangerous. Part of the brake It will take longer to stop thea collision. Have the vehicle

Vehicles equipped with the AB


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


y g gwhen the brake fluid level in the master cylinder hasdropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

Vehicles equipped with the ABElectronic Brake Force Distribuan EBD failure, the Brake Waalong with the ABS Light. Immsystem is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked byturning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault isdetected. If the light does not illuminate, have the lightinspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake isapplied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-tion.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake isapplied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

7. High Beam Indicator

park lights are left on, the highremain illuminated and a chim

8. Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the ignition switRUN, this light will tseconds as a bulb check

the driver’s seat belt is unbucAfter the bulb check or when d belt remains unbuckled, the seflash or remain on continuo

Restraints” in “Things To KnVehicle” for further informatio

9. Air Bag Warning Light

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


This light shows that the high beam headlights areon. Push the multifunction control lever away

from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull thelever toward you to switch the headlights back to low

beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the headlights or

This light will turn oas a bulb check whenturned to ON/RUN.during starting, sta

driving, have the system in

dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” forfurther information.

10. Oil Pressure Gauge — If Equipped

The pointer should always indicate some oil pres-sure when the engine is running. A continuous high orlow reading under normal driving conditions may indi-cate a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate serviceshould be obtained from an authorized dealer.

11. Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles perhour and/or kilometers per hour (mph/km/h).

12 P k/H dli ht ON I di t If E i d

13. Cargo Light — If Equipped

The cargo light will

light is activated by button on the headli

14. Fuel Gauge

Shows level of fuel in tank whON/RUN position.

15. Vehicle Security Light — I

This light will flash mately 15 seconds, walarm is arming, anuntil the vehicle is d


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


12. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the parklights or headlights are turned on.

16. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehiclehas tires of a different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflation pressure for thosetires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale whenone or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

reduces fuel efficiency and tirethe vehicle’s handling and stop

Please note that the TPMS is ntire maintenance, and it is themaintain correct tire pressure, not reached the level to triggerlow tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been malfunction indicator to indicaoperating properly. The TPMS

combined with the low tire psystem detects a malfunctionapproximately one minute andilluminated. This sequence w

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Drivingon a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

illuminated. This sequence wquent vehicle start-ups as longWhen the malfunction indicattem may not be able to detect oas intended. TPMS malfunctio

of reasons, including the insta

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the originalequipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire sizeequipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-tion or sensor damage may result when using re-placement equipment that is not of the same size,

NOTE: The TPMS telltale is alsTire” message in the odometeElectronic Vehicle Informationdicating “Low Tire” for EVIC

17. Front Fog Light Indicator

This indicator will illumlights are on.

18. Electronic Vehicle Informa

The Electronic Vehicle Inform

tures a driver-interactive dispinstrument cluster. For furth“Electronic Vehicle Informatio

19 Shift L I di t


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p q ptype, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causesensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can orbalance beads if your vehicle is equipped with aTPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

19. Shift Lever Indicator

The Shift Lever Indicator is instrument cluster. It displayautomatic transmission.

NOTE: The highest available transmission gear is dis-played in the lower right corner of the Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC) whenever the ElectronicRange Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selectoron the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to “AutomaticTransmission” in “Starting And Operating” for furtherinformation.

20. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Menu

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the

instrument cluster. For further information, refer to“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.

21. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Li ht If E i d

22. TOW/HAUL

The TOW HAUL but

stack upper switch bnate when TOW HA

23. Electronic Stability Con Malfunction Indicator Light —

The “ESC ActivatioLight” in the instrumwhen the ignition

ON/RUN position. engine running. If the “ESC Adicator Light” comes on contrunning, a malfunction has b

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-trol (ESC) is off.

system. If this light remains cycles, and the vehicle has b(kilometers) at speeds greater tyour authorized dealer as sooproblem diagnosed and correc

NOTE:

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned toON/RUN.

• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESCsystem will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking soundswhen it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop

when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuverthat caused the ESC activation.

24. Temperature Gauge

Th t t h i l t t

The gauge pointer will likely iture when driving in hot weator when towing a trailer. It sexceed the upper limits of the

CAUTI

Driving with a hot enginedamage your vehicle. If the t“H” pull over and stop the vwith the air conditioner turn

drops back into the normaremains on the “H” and you turn the engine off immedirized dealer for service.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates thatthe engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You orothers could be badly burned by steam or boilingcoolant. You may want to call an authorized dealerfor service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide tolook under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining YourVehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “CoolingSystem Pressure Cap” paragraph.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INF(EVIC)

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The Electronic Vehicle Informtures a driver-interactive dispinstrument cluster.

This system allows the driver to select a variety of usefulinformation by pressing the switches mounted on thesteering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:

• Digital Speedometer

• Vehicle Info

• Fuel Economy Info

• Trip A

• Trip B

•

Stop/Start Info (If Equipped)• Trailer Tow

• Audio

The system allows the driverpressing the following buttonwheel:


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Stored Messages

• Screen Setup

• Vehicle Settings (Not Equipped with a Uconnect® 5.0

& 8.4 radio)

EVIC Steering Wh

• UP Arrow Button

Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll

upward through the main menu and sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio,Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).

• DOWN Arrow Button

Press and release the DOWN arrow button toscroll downward through the main menu andsub-menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B,Audio, Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).

• SELECT/RIGHT Arrow But

Press and release th

button to access/seleor sub-menu screenPress and hold the

button for two seconds to restures that can be reset.

• LEFT Arrow Button

Press the LEFT arromain menu from anitem.

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)Displays

The EVIC displays are located cluster and consists of eight se

1. Main Screen — The innerilluminate in grey under nornon critical warnings, red white for on demand inform

2. Audio / Phone Informationtion — Whenever there areposition within the sub-men

3. Selectable Information (CoEmpty, Trip A, Trip B, Av(distance only), Trailer Brak

4. Telltales/Indicators


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


5. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)

6. Selectable Menu Icons

7. Air Suspension Status – If Equipped

8. 4WD Status

9. Selectable Gauge 2

10. Selectable Gauge 1

The main display area will normally display the mainmenu or the screens of a selected feature of the mainmenu. The main display area also displays “pop up”messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-ing or information messages. These pop up messages fallinto several categories:

• Five Second Stored Messages

condition that activated it rereviewed from the “Messages”as there is a stored message, athe EVIC’s compass/outside temessage type are “Right Fronand “Low Tire Pressure”.

• Unstored Messages

This message type is displayecondition that activated the meof this message type are “Turn

is left on) and “Lights On” (if • Unstored Messages Until R

These messages deal primarif Thi i d

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for fiveseconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the

feature. This message type is dis in the RUN state. Examples“Remote Start Aborted - DooPedal and Push Button to Star

• Five Second Unstored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of

message takes control of the main display area for fiveseconds and then returns to the previous screen. Anexample of this message type is “Automatic High BeamsOn”.

Engine Oil Change Indicator System

Oil Change Required

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” messagewill flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate thenext scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil changei di t t i d t l b d hi h th

Unless reset, this message wiltime you turn the ignition position or cycle the ignition toequipped with Keyless Entermessage temporarily, press anton. To reset the oil changeperforming the scheduled mailowing procedure.

Vehicles Equipped With Keyl

1. Without pressing the brake

START/STOP button and ON/ RUN position (Do no

2. Fully depress the acceleratowithin 10 seconds.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


indicator system is duty cycle based, which means theengine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependentupon your personal driving style.

within 10 seconds.

3. Without pressing the brakeSTART/STOP button once tOFF/LOCK position.

Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do

not start the engine.)2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times

within 10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when youstart the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did notreset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)Messages

• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Traction Control Off

• Washer Fluid Low

• Oil Pressure Low

• Oil Change Due

• Fuel Low

• Service Antilock Brake Syste

• Service Electronic Throttle C

• Service Power Steering

• Cruise Off

• Cruise Ready

C S XXX

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Service Airbag System

• Cruise Set To XXX MPH

• Tire Pressure Screen With LXX”

• Service Tire Pressure System

• Parking Brake Engaged

• Brake Fluid Low

• Service Electronic Braking System

• Engine Temperature Hot

• Battery Voltage Low

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Lights On

• Right Turn Signal Light Out

• Left Turn Signal Light Out

T Si l O

• Key in Ignition Lights On

• Remote Start Active Key to

• Remote Start Active Push S

• Remote Start Aborted Fuel

• Remote Start Aborted Too C

• Remote Start Aborted Door

• Remote Start Aborted Hood

• Remote Start Aborted Trunk

• Remote Start Aborted Time

• Remote Start Disabled Start

S i Ai b S


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Turn Signal On

• Vehicle Not in Park

• Key in Ignition

• Service Airbag System

• Service Airbag Warning Lig

• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Door Open

• Doors Open

• Gear Not Available

• Shift Not Allowed

• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse

• Autostick Unavailable Service Required

• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.

• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake

T H t St S f l Shift t P k W it t C l

• Service Transmission

• Service Shifter

• Engage Park Brake to Preve

• Transmission Too cold Idle

• Washer Fluid Low

• Service Air Suspension Syst

• Normal Ride Height Achiev

• Aerodynamic Ride Height A

• Off Road 1 Ride Height Ach

• Off Road 2 Ride Height Ach

E t /E it Rid H i ht A h

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool

• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive

• Trailer Brake Disconnected

• Entry/Exit Ride Height Ach

• Selected Ride Height Not P

• Service Air Suspension Syst

• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height

• Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait

• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open

• Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance

• Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance

• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For jacking AndTire Change

• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height

• Stop/Start Ready – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Hood Open – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready 4WDIf Equipped

•

Stop/Start Not Ready Fuel • Stop/Start Not Ready Steep

• Stop/Start Not Ready ExtremIf Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready EnginIf Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready EnginIf Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready DriveIf Equipped


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p y p q pp

• Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Trailer Tow/Haul Selected –If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Drive

• Stop/Start Not Ready CabinIf Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Not Ready Max Cooling OrHeating – If Equipped

•

Stop/Start Not Ready Max Cooling Or HeatingSelected – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Front Defrost Selected –If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Steering Wheel Turned –If Equipped

• Stop/Start Autostop Active – If Equipped

• Stop/Start To Restart Press Clutch Or Shift To Neutral –If Equipped

• Stop/Start Req’d Fault Detected – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Cannot AutostarIf Equipped

•

Stop/Start Unavailable Serv• Stop/Start Unavailable Serv

If Equipped

• Stop/Start To Restart Shift O

• Stop/Start Off – If Equippe

• Autostop Duration – If Equ

The Reconfigurable Telltales swhite telltales area on the rigmiddle, and red telltales on th

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


EVIC Red Telltales

This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These

telltales include:• Door Ajar

This light will turn on to indicate that one ormore doors may be ajar.

• Oil Pressure Warning Light

This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If

the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shutoff the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound forfour minutes when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.

• Oil Temperature Warning L

This telltale indicates

high. If the light turthe vehicle and shutpossible.

• Charging System Light

This light shows the staing system. If the light s

driving, turn off some of thelectrical devices or increase e

the charging system light remvehicle is experiencing a prosystem. Obtain SERVICE IMMrized dealer.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

If jump starting is required,Procedures” in “What To Do I

• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problem with the

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. Thelight will come on when the ignition is firstturned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb

check. If the light does not come on during starting, havethe system checked by an authorized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come on while theengine is running. Cycle the ignition key when thevehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is

placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.If the light remains lit with the engine running, yourvehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is

• Engine Temperature Warnin

This light warns of an

tion. As temperaturesproaches H, this indicator wichime will sound after reachinoverheating will cause the tema continuous chime will occur to cool.

If the light turns on while dristop the vehicle. If the A/C sys

shift the transmission into NEhicle. If the temperature reanormal, turn the engine off service. Refer to “If Your EnginDo In Emergencies” for more

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


flashing when the engine is running, immediate service isrequired. You may experience reduced performance, anelevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle mayrequire towing.

Do In Emergencies for more

• Electric Power Steering Malfunction Warning Light

This telltale is on when the Electric Power

Steering is not operating and needs service.

• Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light

This telltale is on when the Trailer Brake has beendisconnected.

EVIC Amber Telltales

This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-

tales. These telltales include:

• Low Fuel Telltale

When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal(11 0 L) thi li ht ill t d i til

• Windshield Washer Fluid L

This telltale will turn

shield washer fluid i

• Low Coolant Level Indicato

This telltale will turncoolant level is low.

• Transmission Temperature W

This telltale indicatfluid temperature ioccur with severe usIf this telltale turns


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on untilfuel is added.

stop the vehicle. Then, shift thTRAL and run the engine at idturns off.

• Air Suspension Payload Protection Telltale — If Equipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate that themaximum payload may have been exceeded orload leveling cannot be achieved at its currentride height.

Protection Mode will automatically be selected in orderto “protect” the air suspension system, air suspensionadjustment is limited due to payload.

• Service Stop/Start System Telltale — If Equipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate that theStop/Start is Unavailable, service Stop/Startsystem.

• Loose Fuel Filler Cap

This telltale will turn

filler cap may be loo

CAUTI

Continuous driving with theture Warning Light illuminatsevere transmission damage

WARNI

If you continue operating Transmission Temperature Wnated you could cause the fl

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


nated you could cause the flcontact with hot engine or ecause a fire.

EVIC White Telltales

• Electronic Speed Control Ready

This light will turn on when the electronicspeed control is ON. For further information,refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under-standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”

• Hill Descent Control Indicator Light — If Equipped

The symbol indicates the status of the HillDecent Control (HDC) feature. The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD

Low” position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph(48 km/h). If these conditions are not met while attempt-ing to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator lamp will

EVIC Green Telltales

• Electronic Speed Control SE

This telltale will illumtronic speed control ition, refer to “Electroderstanding The Feat

EVIC Selectable Menu Item

Press and release the UP or DOWdesired Selectable Menu icon is

Digital Speedometer

Press and release t button until the Diglighted in the EVIC


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


flash on/off. SELECT/RIGHT arrdisplay between km/h and m

Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)

Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlightedin the EVIC. Press and release the SELECT/RIGHT arrow button and Coolant Temp will be

displayed. Press the LEFT or SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to scroll through the following information sub-menus:

Air Suspension – If Equipped

Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission

Only

Oil Temp

Oil Life

Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys

Press and release the UP or D

“Tire Pressure” is highlighterelease the SELECT/RIGHT arfollowing will be displayed:

A vehicle ICON is displayed weach corner of the ICON.

Tire Pressure Information SyDuty Ram Trucks)

Press and release the UP or D“Tire Pressure” is highlighterelease the SELECT/RIGHT arfollowing will be displayed:

A hi l ICON i di l d

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


MultimeterA vehicle ICON is displayed win each corner of the ICON.

If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service TirePressure System” is displayed.

Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot bereset. Press and release the LEFT arrow button to returnto the main menu.

Refer to the Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)under Starting and Operating for further information.

Fuel Economy

Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow

button until the Fuel Economy icon ishighlighted.

• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG orL/100 km with Bargraph)

Trip A

Press and release t button until the Tripthe EVIC. The Trip Athe following:

• Distance

• Average Fuel Economy

• Average Speed

• Elapsed Time

Hold the SELECT/RIGHT arrinformation.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g p

• Range To Empty (RTE)

• Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)

Trip B

Press and release Up & Down arrow buttonuntil the Trip B icon is highlighted in the EVIC.The Trip B information will display thefollowing:

• Distance

• Average Fuel Economy

• Average Speed

• Elapsed Time

Hold the SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to reset all theinformation.

Stop/Start – If Equipped

Press and release the Uuntil the Stop/Start EVIC. Press and relarrow button to disp

Trailer Tow

Press and release t button until the TrailPress the SELECT/Rthe next screen wi

trailer trip information:

• Trailer Trip

• Trailer Brake

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Audio

Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Audio display icon is high-lighted in the EVIC. Press and release theSELECT/RIGHT arrow button to display the

active source.

Stored Messages

Press and release the UP arrow button until theMessages display icon is highlighted in theEVIC. This feature shows the number of stored

warning messages. Pressing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.

Screen Setup

Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow

Screen Setup sub-menu. The Syou to change what informainstrument cluster as well as th

is displayed.

Personal Settings (CustomFeatures)

For vehicles equipped a 3.5”

Personal Settings allows the features when the transmission

Press and release the UP and sonal Settings displays in the E

Press and release the SELECTdisplay one of the following c


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup display icon ishighlighted in the EVIC. Press and release theSELECT/RIGHT arrow button to enter the

For vehicles equipped with a 7” EVIC screen and notequipped with a Uconnect® 8.4 radio.

Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recallfeatures when the transmission is in PARK.

Use the UP or DOWN button until Personal Settingsdisplays in the EVIC.

Press and release the SELECT/RIGHT arrow button toEnter Vehicle Settings

Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of thefollowing choices.

NOTE: Your vehicle may or may not be equipped withthe following settings.

Language

DOWN button while in this dthe language choices. Press thEnglish, Spanish (Español), F

German, Dutch. Then, as you will display in the selected lan

Units

Press and release the UP or DOdisplays in the EVIC and presEVIC, odometer, and navigatio be changed between English

sure. To make your selectioSELECT button the selected se

Nav–Turn By Turn – If Equi

When this feature is selectedili i d

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


When in this display you may select one of six languagesfor all display nomenclature, including the trip functionsand the navigation system (if equipped). Press the UP or

utilizes voice commands, guroute, mile by mile, turn-by-tution is reached. To make your sthe SELECT button until a ch

the feature showing the system has been activated or thecheck-mark is removed showing the system has beendeactivated.

Park Assist System — If Equipped

The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behindthe vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSEposition and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Onlyor Sound and Display. To make your selection, scroll upor down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then

press and release the SELECT button until a check-markappears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for sys-tem function and operating information.

the driver to see into the prevobjects in close proximity to tmake your selection, press

button until a check-mark apshowing the system has been ais removed showing the syste

Auto Wipers — If Equipped

When ON is selected, the sactivate the windshield wiperthe windshield. To make your s

the SELECT button until a chthe feature showing the systemcheck-mark is removed showdeactivated. When the system reverts to the standard interm


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Tilt Mirror In Reverse

When this feature is selected and the shift lever is placedin reverse gear, the side mirrors tilt downward to allow

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

When on is selected, the HSA“Electronic Brake Control Sy

Operating” for system function and operating informa-tion. To make your selection, press and release theSELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the

feature showing the system has been activated or thecheck-mark is removed showing the system has beendeactivated.

Headlamp Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose tohave the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 secondswhen exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll

up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,then press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the settinghas been selected.

Illuminated Approach

selection, scroll up or down unhighlighted, then press and reuntil a check-mark appears ne

that the setting has been select

Headlamps With Wipers

When this feature is selecteswitch is in the AUTO positionon approximately 10 seconds aon. The headlights will also turturned off if they were turned o

your selection, press and releasa check-mark appears next tosystem has been activated or thshowing the system has been

Automatic High Beams — I

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Illuminated Approach

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activateand remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doorsare unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your

Automatic High Beams I

When this feature is selected, will deactivate automatically umake your selection, press

button until a check-mark appears next to the featureshowing the system has been activated or the check-markis removed showing the system has been deactivated.

Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Un-derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation.

Flash Lamps With Lock

When this feature is selected, the front and rear turnsignals will flash when the doors are locked or unlockedwith the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected

with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the featureshowing the system has been activated or the check-markis removed showing the system has been deactivated.

(24 km/h). To make your selecSELECT button until a check-feature showing the system h

check-mark is removed showdeactivated.

Auto Unlock Doors

When this feature is selected, athe vehicle is stopped and thPARK or NEUTRAL positionopened. To make your selecti

SELECT button until a check-feature showing the system hcheck-mark is removed showdeactivated.

Horn with Remote Start


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Auto Lock Doors

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph

When this feature is selectedoccur when the RKE transmitteis pressed. To make your selec

SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to thefeature showing the system has been activated or thecheck-mark is removed showing the system has been

deactivated.Sound Horn With Remote Lock

When this feature is selected, a short horn sound willoccur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.This feature may be selected with or without the FlashLamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, pressand release the SELECT button until a check-mark ap-pears next to the feature showing the system has beenactivated or the check-mark is removed showing thesystem has been deactivated.

Remote Unlock Sequence

When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected

UNLOCK button twice to unloWhen Unlock All Doors On 1sdoors will unlock on the first p

UNLOCK button. To make yodown until the preferred settinand release the SELECT button next to the setting, showing selected.

Key Fob Linked To Memory

When this feature is selected thradio settings will return to the the RKE transmitter UNLOCKfeature is not selected then theradio settings can only return tusing the seat mounted switchpress and release the SELECT

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of theRKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1stPress is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter

press and release the SELECT appears next to the feature shoactivated or the check-mark is tem has been deactivated.

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry)

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’sdoor(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lockor unlock buttons. To make your selection, press andrelease the SELECT button until a check-mark appearsnext to the feature showing the system has been activatedor the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.

Remote Start Comfort Sys.

When this feature is selected and the remote start isactivated, the heated steering wheel and driver heatedseat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature willautomatically turn on when the remote start is activated.

a check-mark appears next tosystem has been activated or thshowing the system has been

Key-Off Power Delay

When this feature is selectswitches, radio, hands-free syvideo system (if equipped), poand power outlets will remain after the ignition switch is turfront vehicle door will cancel tselection, scroll up or down unhighlighted, then press and reuntil a check-mark appears nethat the setting has been select

Air Suspension Display Ale


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To makeyour selection, press and release the SELECT button until

p p y

When All is selected, all the Aidisplayed. When Warnings OnSuspension Warnings will be

selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting ishighlighted, then press and release the SELECT buttonuntil a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing

that the setting has been selected.Aero Ride Height Mode (1500 Only) – If Equipped

When this feature is selected the Ride Height will auto-matically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed. Tomake your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the featureshowing the system has been activated or the check-markis removed showing the system has been deactivated.

Tire/Jack Mode – If Equipped

When this feature is selected the air suspension system isdisabled to assist with changing a spare tire. To makeyour selection press and release the SELECT button until

Transport Mode – If Equipp

When this feature is selected thdisabled to assist with flat be

selection, press and release thcheck-mark appears next to system has been activated or thshowing the system has been

Wheel Alignment Mode – If

Before performing a wheel aligenabled. Refer to your auth

information.Horn with Remote Lower –

When this feature is selectedoccur when the RKE transmitt

d k

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


your selection, press and release the SELECT button untila check-mark appears next to the feature showing thesystem has been activated or the check-mark is removedshowing the system has been deactivated.

ton is pressed. To make your sthe SELECT button until a ch

the feature showing the system has been activated or thecheck-mark is removed showing the system has beendeactivated.

Lights with Remote Lower – If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the front and rear turnsignals will flash when the RKE transmitter REMOTELOWER button is pressed. This feature may be selectedwith or without the sound horn on lower feature selected.To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the featureshowing the system has been activated or the check-markis removed showing the system has been deactivated.

Trailer Select

When this feature is selected, the Trailer Type can beselected between “Trailer 1” “Trailer 2” “Trailer 3” and

the SELECT button until a checsetting, showing that the settin

Trailer Brake Type

When this feature is selected, t be changed between “Light E“Light EOH” and “Heavy EOHscroll up or down until the plighted, then press and release check-mark appears next to thsetting has been selected. ReBrake Module” in “Starting An

Trailer Name

When this feature is selectedselected from 16 names. To maor down until the preferred se


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


selected between Trailer 1 , Trailer 2 , Trailer 3 and“Trailer 4”. To make your selection, scroll up or down untilthe preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release

or down until the preferred sepress and release the SELECT appears next to the setting, sh been selected.

Calibrate Compass

Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.

Compass VarianceRefer to “Compass Display” for more information.

Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items

Odometer

• 000

• 000.0

Upper Left

• None

• Compass

Outside Temp (default setting)

• Oil Temp

• Time

•

Range To Empty (RTE)• Average MPG

• Current MPG

• Trip A

• Trip B

• Trailer Trip (distance only)

• Trailer Brake Gain

Upper Right

• None

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Outside Temp (default setting)

• Trans Temp

• Compass (default setting)

• Outside Temp

• Trans Temp

• Oil Temp

•

Time• Range To Empty (RTE)

• Average MPG

• Current MPG

• Trip A

• Trip B

• Trailer Trip (distance only)


Lower Left

N (d f l i )

• Outside Temp

• Trans Temp

•

Oil Temp• Time

• Range

• AVG MPG

• Current MPG


Lower Right

• None (default setting)

• Compass

O id T


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• None (default setting)

• Compass

• Outside Temp

• Trans Temp

• Oil Temp

• Time

•

Range• AVG MPG

• Current MPG


Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To DefaultSettings)

• Cancel• Okay

Uconnect® SETTINGS

The Uconnect® system uses ahard keys located on the cente

that allows you to access aprogrammable features.

Hard-Keys

Hard-Keys are located below the center of the instrument paScroll/Enter control knob locaClimate Controls in the center

Turn the control knob to scchange settings (i.e., 30, 60, 9control knob one or more timsetting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Your Uconnect® system may a

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


y yBack hard-keys located below

Press the Screen Off hard-key to turn off the Uconnect®screen. Press the Screen Off hard-key a second time toturn the screen on.

Press the Back hard-key to exit out of a Menu or certainoption on the Uconnect® system.

Soft-Keys

Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® display.

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 8.4Settings

Press the Apps soft-key, then press the Settings soft-keyto display the menu setting screen. In this mode theUconnect® system allows you to access programmablefeatures that may be equipped such as Display, Clock,Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,Auto On Comfort & Remote Start Engine Off Operation

Compass Settings, Audio, Bluetooth, Suspension, SriusXMmation.

NOTE: Only one touchscreentime.

When making a selection, presdesired mode. Once in the release the preferred setting unext to the setting, showing lected. Once the setting is comArrow soft-key or the Back hprevious menu or press the X settings screen. Pressing the Upon the right side of the screen wor down through the available


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation,

Display

After pressing the Display soft-key the following settingswill be available.

• Display Mode

When in this display you may select one of the autodisplay settings. To change Mode status, touch andrelease the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch thearrow back soft-key.

• Display Brightness With Headlights ON

When in this display, you may select the brightness withthe headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow backsoft-key.

• Display Brightness With He

When in this display, you maythe headlights off. Adjust the b

setting soft-keys or by selecti between the + and – soft-keys. soft-key.

• Set Language

When in this display, you languages for all display nomefunctions and the navigation sy

the Set Language soft-key anlanguage soft-key until a checklanguage, showing that settingthe back arrow soft-key to retu

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Units

When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed

between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US orMetric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,showing that setting has been selected. Touch the backarrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Voice Response Length

When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response

Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until acheck-mark appears next to the setting, showing thatsetting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyto return to the previous menu.

• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display, you masound heard when a touch sc

pressed. Touch the Touchscrecheck-mark appears next to setting has been selected. Toucto return to the previous menu

• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In

When this feature is selected, twill appear in the display as

designated turn within a progyour selection, touch the NaCluster soft-key, until a checksetting, showing that setting ha back arrow soft-key to return


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Fuel Saver Display In Cluster

The “ECO” message is located in the instrument clusterdisplay, this message can be turned on or off. To make

your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key,until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showingthat setting has been selected. Touch the back arrowsoft-key to return to the previous menu.

Clock

After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settingswill be available.

• Sync Time With GPS

When in this display, you may automatically have theradio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touchthe Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-markappears next to the setting, showing that setting has been

• Set Time Hours

When in this display, you may with GPS Time soft-key mus

your selection touch the + orhours up or down. Touch threturn to the previous menu oclose out of the settings screen

• Set Time Minutes

When in this display, you maSync with GPS Time soft-key

make your selection touch thethe minutes up or down. Toucto return to the previous menuclose out of the settings screen

• Time Format

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


appears next to the setting, showing that setting has beenselected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

When in this display, you mdisplay setting. Touch the Tim

check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,showing that setting has been selected. Touch the backarrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

Safety & Driving Assistance

After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance soft-keythe following settings will be available.

• Park Assist

The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behindthe vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE-VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph

(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Onlyor Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status,touch and release Sound Only or Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. Refer to“ParkSense® Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding TheF Of Y V hi l ” f f i d

• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse

When this feature is selected, rors will tilt downward when

position and the transmissioVERSE position. The mirrorsprevious position when the traREVERSE. To make your selectIn Reverse soft-key, until a chsetting, showing that setting ha back arrow soft-key to return

• ParkView® Backup Camera

Your vehicle may be equippedBack Up Camera that allowsimage of the rear surroundingsthe shift lever is put into REVdisplayed on the radio touchsc


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and oper-ating information.

displayed on the radio touchsccaution note to “check entire top of the screen. After five

disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rearof the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make yourselection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key,

until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating thatthe setting had been selected. Touch the back arrowsoft-key to return to the previous menu.

• ParkView® Camera Delay

When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkViewBackup Camera display to remain on while in drive forup to 10 seconds, or 8 mph. To make your selection, touchthe ParkView® Backup Camera Delay soft-key, until a

check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that thesetting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-keyto return to the previous menu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera Static Gridlines

Y hi l b i d i h h P kVi ® R

camera display whenever thREVERSE. The image will btouchscreen display along with

entire surroundings” across thfive seconds, this note will selection, touch the ParkViewGridlines soft-key, until a chesetting, indicating that the sTouch the back arrow soft-keymenu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera

Your vehicle may be equippedBack Up Camera Fixed GuidelFixed Guidelines over the Padisplay whenever the shift leThe image will be displayed

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® RearBack Up Camera Static Guidelines that allows you to seestraight grid line overlay over the ParkView Back up

display along with a caution note to “check entire sur-roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,

touch the ParkView® Backup Camera Fixed Guidelinessoft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,indicating that the setting had been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® RearBack Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to seeActive (Dynamic) Guidelines which deflect with steering

wheel angle over the ParkView Back up Camera displaywhenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The imagewill be displayed on the radio touchscreen display alongwith a caution note to “check entire surroundings” acrossthe top of the screen. After five seconds, this note willd k l h h k ®

Backup Camera Active Guidelimark appears next to setting, had been selected. Touch th

return to the previous menu.• ParkSense® Front Park Ass

Front Park Assist chime volumfrom the EVIC or Uconnect® chime volume settings incluHIGH. The factory default vol

Refer to “EVIC settings” or

“Understanding Your Instrumformation.

• ParkSense® Rear Park Assi

Rear Park Assist chime volumfrom the EVIC or Uconnect®


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


disappear. To make your selection, touch the ParkView®o t e V C o Uco ect®

chime volume settings incluHIGH. The factory default vol

Refer to “EVIC settings” or “Uconnect® Settings” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-formation.

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers

When this feature is selected, the system will automati-cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moistureon the windshield. To make your selection, touch theRain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next tosetting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.

•

Hill Start Assist — If EquippedWhen this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake ControlSystem” in “Starting And Operating” for system functionand operating information. To make your selection, touchth Hill St t A i t ft k til h k k

next to setting, showing that Touch the back arrow soft-keymenu.

• Four Corner Air Suspension

There are four air suspension mthe system in unique situatiolected to assist in changing a sis selected to assist when thetowed. Wheel Alignment Moforming a wheel alignment, dealer for information. Protec

cally be selected in order to “psystem when the payload haleveling cannot be achieved.

Lights

Aft i th Li ht ft

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears After pressing the Lights soft-will be available.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose tohave the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scrollup or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,then press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the settinghas been selected.

• Headlight Illumination On Approach

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate

and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doorsare unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired timeinterval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to theprevious menu.

• Headlights With Wipers —

When this feature is selected, ain the AUTO position, the he

proximately 10 seconds after The headlights will also turnturned off if they were turned oyour selection, touch the Heakey, until a check-mark appearthat setting has been selectesoft-key to return to the previ

• Auto Dim High Beams “Sma

When this feature is selected, will deactivate automatically umake your selection, touch thkey, until a check-mark appearthat setting has been selecte


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p gsoft-key to return to the previou

SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding TheFeatures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

• Daytime Running Lights – If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn onwhenever the engine is running. To make your selection,touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until acheck-mark appears next to setting, showing that settinghas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key toreturn to the previous menu.

• Flash Headlights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the headlights will flashwhen the doors are locked or unlocked with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may beselected with or without the sound horn on lock featureselected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Head-lights with Lock soft key until a check mark appears

next to setting, showing that Touch the back arrow soft-keymenu.

Doors & Locks

After pressing the Doors & Losettings will be available.

• Auto Lock

When this feature is selected,matically when the vehicle re(24 km/h). To make your s

Unlock On Exit soft-key, until ato setting, showing that settingthe back arrow soft-key to retu

• Auto Unlock On Exit

When this feature is selected a

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


lights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears When this feature is selected, athe vehicle is stopped and thPARK or NEUTRAL position

opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto UnlockOn Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next tosetting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the

back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.• Flash Lamps With Lock

When this feature is selected, the front and rear turnsignals will flash when the doors are locked or unlockedwith the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selectedwith or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature

showing the system has been activated or the check-markis removed showing the system has been deactivated.

• Sound Horn With Lock

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound whenthe door locks are activated To make your selection

touch the Sound Horn With Lomark appears next to setting, been selected. Touch the back a

the previous menu.• Sound Horn With Remote S

When this feature is selected, the remote start is activated.touch the Sound Horn With Recheck-mark appears next to sehas been selected. Touch thereturn to the previous menu.

• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unloc

When 1st Press Of Key Fob Undriver’s door will unlock on thKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitte1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks i


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the door locks are activated. To make your selection, 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks ithe RKE transmitter UNLOCK

passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Pressis selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first pressof the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.

NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key FobUnlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which PassiveEntry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s doorwill unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. WithPassive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro-grammed touching the handle more than once will onlyresult in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is

selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior doorlock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (oruse RKE transmitter).

• Passive Entry

This feature allows you to locdoor(s) without having to p

Entry (RKE) transmitter lock oyour selection, touch the Passcheck-mark appears next to sehas been selected. Touch thereturn to the previous menu. RGo™” in “Things To Know Bef

• Memory To FOB — If Equip

This feature provides automatienhance driver mobility whenvehicle. To make your selecLinked To FOB soft-key, until ato setting, showing that settingthe back arrow soft-key to retu

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


y

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seatlocation (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is setto ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitteris used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver MemorySeat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”for further information.

Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start

After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Startsoft-key the following settings will be available.

• Horn With Remote Start

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound whenthe remote start is activated. To make your selection,touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until acheck-mark appears next to setting, showing that settinghas been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to

• Auto-On Driver Heated/VenWheel With Vehicle Start — If

When this feature is selected th

heated steering wheel will autemperatures are below 40° Ftures are above 80° F (26.7° C) turn on. To make your selectioSeats soft-key, until a check-mashowing that setting has beenarrow soft-key to return to the

Engine Off Options

After pressing the Engine Offlowing settings will be availab

• Easy Exit Seats

When this feature is selectei ll d


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


return to the previous menu. automatically move rearward

To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showingthat setting has been selected. Touch the back arrowsoft-key to return to the previous menu.

• Engine Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power windowswitches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Openingeither front door will cancel this feature. To change the

Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch thearrow back soft-key.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to

Delay status touch the + or desired time interval. Touch treturn to the previous menu.

Compass Settings – If EquippeAfter pressing the Compass Seing settings will be available.

• Variance

Compass Variance is the diffNorth and Geographic Northdifferences the variance should

the vehicle is driven, per the set, the compass will automatdifferences, and provide theheading.

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


When this feature is selected, the driver can choose tohave the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 secondswhen exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compassmodule is located, and it can cause interference with thecompass sensor, and it may give false readings.

• Perform Compass Calibrati

Touch the Calibration soft-key compass is self-calibrating, wh

manually reset the compass. Wcompass may appear erratic aCAL until the compass is ccalibrate the compass by prescompleting one or more 360-defrom large metal or metallicindicator displayed in the EVIwill now function normally.

Audio

After pressing the Audio soft-will be available.

• Balance/Fade

Wh i thi di l


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


When in this display you maFade settings.Compass Variance Map

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid andTreble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –

setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow backsoft-key.

NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide yourfinger up or down to change the setting as well as touchdirectly on the desired setting.

• Speed Adjusted Volume

This feature increases or decreases volume relative tovehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volumetouch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.

• Surround Sound — If Equip

This feature provides simulateTo make your selection, tou

soft-key, select On or Off follow back soft-key.

• AUX Volume Match — If E

This feature provides the abilifor portable devices connectedTo make your selection, touchsoft-key, select On or Off follow

back soft-key.• Loudness — If Equipped

The Radio automatically turnsor will recall whether it was onTo make your selection, touc

l t O Off f ll d b

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


select On or Off followed bysoft-key.

Trailer Brake

• Trailer Select

When this feature is selected, the Trailer Type can be

selected between “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3” and“Trailer 4”. To make your selection, scroll up or downuntil the preferred setting is highlighted, then press andrelease the SELECT button until a check-mark appearsnext to the setting, showing that the setting has beenselected.

• Trailer Brake Type

When this feature is selected, the Trailer Brake Type can be changed between “Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”,“Light EOH” and “Heavy EOH”. To make your selection,scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high-lighted, then press and release the SELECT button until acheck-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the

• Trailer Name

When this feature is selectedselected from 16 names. To ma

or down until the preferred sepress and release the SELECT appears next to the setting, sh been selected.

Phone/Bluetooth

After pressing the Phone/Blueing settings will be available.

• Paired DevicesThis feature shows which pPhone/Bluetooth system. For to the Uconnect® User’s Manu


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


pp g gsetting has been selected. Refer to “Integrated TrailerBrake Module” in “Starting And Operating.”

Air Suspension – If Equipped

After pressing the Suspension soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

• Sound Horn with Remote Lower

When this feature is selected, a short horn sound willoccur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER but-ton is pressed. Touch the box next to your selection anda check-mark appears next to the feature showing thesystem has been activated or the check-mark is removedshowing the system has been deactivated..

•

Flash Lights with Remote Lower When this feature is selected, the front and rear turnsignals will flash when the RKE transmitter REMOTELOWER button is pressed twice. This feature may beselected with or without the sound horn on lower featureselected Touch the box next to your selection and a

system has been activated or thshowing the system has been

• Suspension Display Messag

When All is selected, all the Aidisplayed. When Warnings OnSuspension Warnings will be d

• Automatic Aero Mode

When this feature is selected tmatically be adjusted dependTouch the box next to your se

appears next to the feature shoactivated or the check-mark system has been deactivated.

• Tire Jack Mode

When this feature is selected th

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


selected. Touch the box next to your selection and acheck-mark appears next to the feature showing the disabled to assist with changi

box next to your selection and

to the feature showing the system has been activated orthe check-mark is removed showing the system has beendeactivated.

•

Transport ModeWhen this feature is selected the air suspension system isdisabled to assist with flat bed towing. Touch the boxnext to your selection and a check-mark appears next tothe feature showing the system has been activated or thecheck-mark is removed showing the system has beendeactivated.

• Wheel Alignment Mode

Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must beenabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for furtherinformation.

SiriusXM Setup

• Channel Skip

SiriusXM can be programmedchannels that are the most d

exclude undesirable channelsyour selection, touch the Channchannels you would like to skiarrow back soft-key.

• Subscription Information

New vehicle purchasers or llimited time subscription to with your radio. Following tservices, it will be necessary tothe Subscription Informationsubscribe.

Touch the Subscription Info sscription Information screen.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the followingsettings will be available.

p

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. Toreactivate your service, either call the number listed onthe screen or visit the provider online.

NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscriptionand is available for U.S. residents only.

Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED

For detailed information about your Uconnect® radiorefer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

Located inside the center console upper lid, this featureallows an iPod® or external USB device to be pluggedinto the USB port.

iPod® control supports Mini, 4and iPhone® devices. Some may not fully support the iPodvisit Apple’s website for softw

For further information, referManual.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO IF EQUIPPED

The remote sound system contrsurface of the steering wheel. R

access the switches.

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The right hand control is a rocker type switch with apushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switchwill increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of theswitch will decrease the volume.

The button located in the centewill switch modes to Radio, source.

The left hand control is a ropushbutton in the center. Thecontrol is different depending o

The following describes the lefteach mode.

Radio Operation

Pressing the top of the switch

listenable station and pressingwill SEEK down for the next li

The button located in the centwill tune to the next pre-seprogrammed in the radio pre-

Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of SteeringWheel)


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CD Player

Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the nexttrack on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once

will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one secondafter the current track begins to play.

If you press the switch up or down twice it plays thesecond track, three times, it will play the third, etc.

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following

precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching thesurface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tapeing the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as

or anti-static sprays.5. Store the disc in its case aft

6. Do not expose the disc to d

7. Do not store the disc where too high.

NOTE: If you experience difficdisc, it may be damaged (i.e., scremoved, a hair, moisture or dor have protection encoding. before considering disc player

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on inyour vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from

your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition isnot harmful to the radio. If your radio performance doesnot satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of theantenna, it is recommended that the radio volume beturned down or off during mobile phone operation whennot using Uconnect® (if equipped).

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The Climate Control System atemperature, amount, and di

throughout the vehicle. The cinstrument panel below the ra

Manual Climate Controls WiIf Equipped

The controls for the manual hesystem in this vehicle consist dials and inner push knobs. T be set to obtain desired interio


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Front Blower Control

There are focontrol to r

forced thromode you increases aclockwise fr

1 – Front Blower 4 – RECIRCULATION Control2 – Temperature Control 5 – Air Conditioning (A/C)3 – MODE Control 6 – DEFROST Mode

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, theclimate controls will not function during Remote Startoperation if the blower control is left in the OFF position.

Temperature ControlUse this control to regulate the tem-perature of the air inside the passengercompartment. Rotating the knob coun-terclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates coolertemperatures. Rotating the knob clock-wise, into the red area, indicates

warmer temperatures.

Air Conditioning Operation

Push the A/Conditionin

minate whengaged.

MAX A/C

For maximum cooling, when A/C is turned on autom

recirculated.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/Cposition. The LED will blink three times if the A/C button is pushed. If your air conditioning performanceseems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C

condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accu-mulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle waterspray from behind the radiator and through the con-denser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflowto the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

Mode Control (Air Direction)

Mode control allows you to choose

from several patterns of air distribu-tion. You can select either a primarymode, as identified by the symbols, ora blend of two of these modes. Thecloser the control is to a particularmode, the more air distribution you

i f th t d

Panel Mode

Air is directed throughment panel. These outle

airflow.Bi-Level Mode

Air is directed through

NOTE: There is a diffeany conditions other than fullthe upper and lower outletswarmer air goes to the floor o

improved comfort during sunnFloor Mode

Air is directed throughsmall amount through

dow demist outlets.

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


receive from that mode.

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost and sidewindow demist outlets. This setting works best in

cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat atthe windshield. This setting is good for maintainingcomfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Defrost Mode

Air is directed through the windshield and sidewindow demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode

with maximum blower and warm temperature settingsfor best windshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIXand DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to helpdry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use thesemodes only when necessary.

Recirculation Control

Press this button to cintake or recirculati

vehicle. A LED will iRecirculation mode. mode to temporarily block outor dust, and to cool the intestart-up in very hot or humid

NOTE:

• If the RECIRCULATION busystem is in Defrost modindicator will flash three tindicate Recirculation mode

• Continuous use of the Recirthe inside air stuffy and winExtended use of this mode i


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculationmode will cause windows to fog on the inside becauseof moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximumdefogging, select the outside air position.

• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-ing the mode control selection by pressing the A/C button.

Air Outlets

The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to controlairflow.

NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the centerinstrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rearseat passengers.

Economy Mode

If ECONOMY mode is desiredturn off the LED indicator a

Rotate the temperature controperature. Also, make sure to seFloor modes.

Stop/Start System – If Equip

While in an Autostop, the Climautomatically adjust airflow tCustomer settings will be maiengine running condition.

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Manual Climate Controls With Touch-Screen —If Equipped

Hard-Keys

The hard-keys are located below the radio touch-screen.

Soft-Keys

Soft-keys are accessible on the

Climate Controls — Hard-keys

Temperature Contro


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys AndSoft-keys)

1. A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, theindicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing thisfunction again will cause the A/C operation to switchinto manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

2. Recirculation Button

Press and release to change the current setting, theindicator illuminates when ON.

3. Front Defrost Button

Press and release to change theDefrost mode. The indicator i

ture is ON. Performing this futo switch into manual modeincrease when Defrost modedefrost mode is turned off the the previous setting.

4. Defrost Button

Press and release this button todefroster (if equipped) and the

equipped). An indicator will window defroster is on. Thautomatically turns off after 1

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CAUTION!


• Use care when washing the inside of the rearwindow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners onthe interior surface of the window. Use a soft clothand a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to theheating elements. Labels can be peeled off aftersoaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasivewindow cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

5. Modes

The airflow distribution modcomes from the instrument p

demister outlets and defrost oare as follows:

• Panel ModeAir comes from thepanel. Each of thesally adjusted to dir

vanes of the center outlets be moved up and down oairflow direction. There is below the air vanes to shuof airflow from these outle

• Bi-Level ModeAir comes from theand floor outlets. Adirected through th


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


directed through thdemister outlets.

NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets andwarmer air from the floor outlets.

• Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slightamount of air is directed through the defrostand side window demister outlets.

• Mix ModeAir comes from the floor, defrost and sidewindow demister outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIXand DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is notpressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind-shield. To improve fuel economy, utilize these modesonly when required.

6. Blower Control

Blower control is used to reforced through the climate

blower speeds available. Adjusautomatic mode to switch tspeeds can be selected using eitas follows:

Hard-key

The blower speed increases clockwise from the lowest blspeed decreases as you turn th

Soft-key

Use the small blower icon to and the large blower icon to inBlower can also be selected byarea between the icons.

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


7. Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Climate ControlON/OFF.

8. Temperature Control Down Button

Push the button for cooler temperature settings. On thetouch-screen, slide the temperature bar towards the bluearrow soft-key for cooler temperature settings.

9. Temperature Control Up Button

Push the button for warmer temperature settings. On thetouch-screen, slide the temperature bar towards the blue

arrow soft-key for cooler temperature settings.


When outside air chigh humidity, or ifyou may wish to rpressing the RECIRC

Recirculation mode should onlrecirculation LED will illuminknob when this button is selsecond time to turn off the Recallow outside air into the vehi

NOTE: In cold weather, use o

lead to excessive window fomode is not allowed in Defrostclearing operation. Recirculatmatically if these modes are se


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


General Overview

Hard-Keys

The hard-keys located below the Uconnect® screen.

Soft-Keys

Soft-keys are accessible on the

Automatic Climate Controls — Hard-keys

Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic TSoft-ke

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-keys AndSoft-keys)

1. MAX A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, theindicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performingthis function again will cause the MAX A/C operation toswitch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicatorwill turn off.

2. A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, theindicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing thisfunction again will cause the A/C operation to switchinto manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

3. Recirculation Button

Press and release to change the current setting, theindicator illuminates when ON.

4. AUTO Operation Button

Automatically controls the inteadjusting airflow distribution

this function will cause the manual mode and automatic mOperation” for more informati

5. Front Defrost Button

Press and release to change theDefrost mode. The indicator iture is ON. Performing this futo switch into manual mode

increase when Defrost modedefrost mode is turned off the the previous setting.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


6. Rear Defrost Button

Press and release this button to turn on the rear windowdefroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).

An indicator will illuminate when the rear windowdefroster is on. The rear window defroster automaticallyturns off after 10 minutes.

CAUTION!


• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners onthe interior surface of the window. Use a soft clothand a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to theheating elements. Labels can be peeled off aftersoaking with warm water.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (C

• Do not use scrapers, sharp window cleaners on the

window.• Keep all objects a safe dist

7. Passenger Temperature Con

Provides the passenger with control. Push the hard-key buture settings or on the touch-ssoft-key temperature bar towa

for warmer temperature settinNOTE: Pressing this button automatically exit Sync.

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


( )

8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button

Provides the passenger with independent temperaturecontrol. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperaturesettings or on the touch-screen, press and slide thesoft-key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-keyfor cooler temperature settings.

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode willautomatically exit Sync.

9. SYNC

Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.

The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature isenabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passengertemperature setting with the driver temperature setting.Changing the passenger temperature setting while inSync will automatically exit this feature.

10. Blower Control

Blower control is used to reforced through the climate blower speeds available. Adjusautomatic mode to switch tspeeds can be selected using eitas follows:

Hard-key

The blower speed increases clockwise from the lowest blspeed decreases as you turn th

Soft-key

Use the small blower icon to and the large blower icon to inBlower can also be selected byarea between the icons.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


11. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so aircomes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings areas follows:

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrumentpanel. Each of these outlets can be individu-

ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be movedup and down or side to side to regulate airflow

direction. There is a shut off wheel located below theair vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflowfrom these outlets.

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from theand floor outlets. A

directed through the defros

ter outlets.

NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is desditions to provide cooler air ouwarmer air from the floor out

Floor Mode

Air comes from thamount of air is dir

and side window demisterMix Mode

Air comes from thwindow demist outin cold or snowy co

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Defrost Mode

Air comes from the windshield and side win-dow demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with

maximum temperature settings for best windshield

and side window defrosting and defogging. Whenthe defrost mode is selected, the blower level maywill increase.

12. Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Climate ControlON/OFF.

13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button

Provides the driver with independent temperature con-trol. Push the hard-key button for cooler temperaturesettings or on the touch-screen, press and slide thesoft-key temperature bar towards the blue arrow soft-keyfor cooler temperature settings.

NOTE: In Sync mode, this buttadjust the passenger temperatime.

14. Driver Temperature Contro

Provides the driver with indeptrol. Push the hard-key buttonsettings or on the touch-scrsoft-key temperature bar towafor warmer temperature settin

NOTE: In Sync mode, this buttadjust the passenger temperatu

15. Temperature

Press the temperature soft-keyture of the air inside the passenthe temperature bar into the rtemperatures. Moving the temarea indicates cooler temperat


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


area indicates cooler temperat

Automatic Operation

1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button on theAutomatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like thesystem to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-senger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Oncethe desired temperature is displayed, the system willachieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it isnot necessary to change the settings. You will experi-ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the

system to function automatically.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings forcold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjuststhe temperature, mode, and blower speed to providecomfort as quickly as possible

• The temperature can be diunits by selecting the US/Mfeature. Refer to the “Uconnthis section of the manual.

To provide you with maximummode, during cold start-ups thon low until the engine warincrease in speed and transitio


When outside air chigh humidity, or if

you may wish to rpressing the RECIRC

Recirculation mode should onlrecirculation LED will illuminkeys when either button is sehard key a second time to turn LED and allow outside air int

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


comfort as quickly as possible.

NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode maylead to excessive window fogging. The recirculationfeature may be unavailable (soft-key button greyed out)if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside

of the windshield. On systems with Manual ClimateControls, the recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrostmode to improve window clearing operation. Recircula-tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is se-lected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in thismode will cause the LED in the control button to blinkand then turn off.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with ahigh-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.A solution of 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and

50% water is recommended. Rcedures” in “Maintaining Yourant selection.

Winter Operation

To ensure the best possible hemance, make sure the engine cing properly and the proper atration of coolant is used. Procedures” in “Maintaining coolant selection. Use of theduring Winter months is not

may cause window fogging.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Vacation/Storage

Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the airconditioning system at idle for about five minutes infresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensureadequate system lubrication to minimize the possibilityof compressor damage when the system is started again.

Window Fogging and Frosting

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass inmild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may froston the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear

the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increasethe front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculationmode without A/C for long periods, as fogging mayoccur.

NOTE: Automatic Temperatutomatically adjust the climate or eliminate window foggingWhen this occurs, recirculation

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, locatwindshield, is free of obstructicollected in the air intake mayodor, and if they enter the plewater drains. In Winter monthis clear of ice, slush and snow

UNDERSTANDING YOU

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Operating Tips Chart


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366

▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366

▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°FOr −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370

STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .370

▫ Automatic Mode . . . . .

▫ Possible Reasons The EngAUTO STOP . . . . . . . .

▫ To Start The Engine WhilMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ To Manually Turn Off Th

System . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ To Manually Turn On ThSystem . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ System Malfunction . . .

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .376

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .379

▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission –If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379

▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission —1500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389

▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission —2500/3500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412

▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case –If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412

▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case(Four-Position Switch) – If Equipped . . . . . . .416

▫ Electronically Shifted Tra(Five-Position Switch) –

▫ Electronically Shifted Tra(Five-Position Switch) –

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEMONLY) — IF EQUIPPED

▫ Description . . . . . . . . .

▫ Air Suspension Modes

▫ Electronic Vehicle Inform(EVIC) Display Messag

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . .

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEMMODELS ONLY) — IF EQ

▫ Description . . . . . . . . .

▫ Air Suspension Modes

360 STARTING AND OPERATING

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC) Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446

AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM (POWER WAGONMODELS ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . .447

STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM —POWER WAGON ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450

SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWERWAGON ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452

▫ Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle

Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452

▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .455

▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And OtherHigh Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456

▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459

▫ Driving Through Water

▫ Airing Down For Off-Ro

▫ Vehicle Recovery . . . . .

▫ After Driving Off-Road

LIMITED-SLIP DIFFEREN

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY S

▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . .

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . .

DRIVING THROUGH WAT

▫ Flowing/Rising Water

▫ Shallow Standing Wate

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

▫ After Driving Off-Road

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WINCH USAGE (POWER WAGON ONLY) —IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476

▫ Things To Know Before Using Your Winch. . . .476

▫ Understanding The Features Of Your Winch. . .478▫ Winch Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480

▫ Operating Your Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482

▫ Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494

POWER STEERING — 1500 Models . . . . . . . . .496

POWER STEERING — 2500/3500 Models . . . . .498

▫ Power Steering Fluid Check– 2500/3500Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499

FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4LENGINES ONLY – IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . .500

PARKING BRAKE . . . . .

BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . .

▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock B

▫ Hydraulic Brake Assist – Only – Except Power W

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CO

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System

▫ Traction Control System (

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) –

▫ Hill Descent Control (HD(Power Wagon Only) . .

▫ Electronic Stability ContrIf Equipped . . . . . . . .


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator LightAnd ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .519

▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped . . . .520

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .521▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .525

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .527

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .528

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .533

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .536

▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536

▫ Tire Types. . . . . . . . . .

▫ Run Flat Tires – If Equip

▫ Spare Tires – If Equippe

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . .

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . .

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . .

▫ Replacement Tires . . . .

SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRINFORMATION — IF EQ

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION

TIRE ROTATION RECOMM

▫ Directional Tires – If Equ

▫ Dual Rear Wheels – If Eq

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .549

▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552

▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .554

▫ Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)3500 Series Trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559

FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560

▫ 3.6L/6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560

▫ 5.7L Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .561

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562

▫ Materials Added To Fu

▫ Fuel System Cautions. .

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warni

ADDING FUEL . . . . . . .

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap M

VEHICLE LOADING . . . .

▫ Certification Label . . .

TRAILER TOWING . . . . .

▫ Common Towing Definit

▫ Trailer Hitch Type and MWeight . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Trailer Towing Weights (MWeight Ratings) . . . . . .

▫ Trailer And Tongue Weig


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590

SNOWPLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591

▫ 1500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591

▫ 2500/3500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592

RECREATIONAL TOWINGMOTORHOME, ETC.) . .

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behin

▫ Recreational Towing – TwModels . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Recreational Towing – FoModels . . . . . . . . . . . .

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust bothinside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.

The starter should not be operated for more than 15-second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between suchintervals will protect the starter from overheating.

WARNING!

Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with accessto an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicleunattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A

child or others could be seriously or fatally injured.Children should be warned not to touch the parkingbrake, brake pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave thekey fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location acces-sible to children. A child could operate power win-dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Normal Starting

Normal starting of either a obtained without pumping opedal. Turn the key fob to the S

when the engine starts. If the e10 seconds, turn the key fob to seconds, then repeat the “Norm

Automatic Transmission

Start the engine with the shift PARK position. Apply the bradriving range.

NOTE: This vehicle is equipshift interlocking system. Tpressed to shift out of PARK.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Tip Start Feature

Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch briefly to the START position and release it. The startermotor will continue to run but will automatically disen-

gage when the engine is running.

Keyless Enter-N-Go™

This feature allows the driver to oper-ate the ignition switch with the pushof a button, as long as the RemoteStart/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fobis in the passenger compartment.

Normal Starting

Using The ENGINE START

1. The transmission must be in

2. Press and hold the brake pENGINE START/STOP but

3. The system takes over anvehicle. If the vehicle failsdisengage automatically aft

4. If you wish to stop the cranthe engine starting, press th

NOTE: Normal starting of eengine is obtained without paccelerator pedal.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINESTART/STOP Button

1. Place the shift lever/shift selector in PARK, then pressand release the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.

3. If the shift lever/shift selector is not in PARK, theENGINE START/STOP button must be held for twoseconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignitionswitch position will remain in the ACC position untilthe shift lever/shift selector is in PARK and the button

is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shiftlever/shift selector is not in PARK and the ENGINESTART/STOP button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” mes-sage and the engine will remain running. Never leavea vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.

NOTE: If the ignition switch (engine not running) position PARK, the system will automminutes of inactivity and the i

OFF position.ENGINE START/STOP ButDriver’s Foot OFF The BrakNEUTRAL Position)

The ENGINE START/STOP buignition switch. It has four poand START. To change the without starting the vehicle

follow these steps.

1. Starting with the ignition sw

2. Press the ENGINE STARchange the ignition switch tdisplays “ACC”),


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second timeto change the ignition switch to the RUN position(EVIC displays “RUN”),

4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time

to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVICdisplays “OFF”).

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Pushthe accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold itthere while cranking the engine. This should clear anyexcess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

CAUTI

To prevent damage to the sengine for more than 15 seco

15 seconds before trying aga

WARNI

• Never pour fuel or other the throttle body air inlet ostart the vehicle. This coucausing serious personal in

• Do not attempt to push or tstarted. Vehicles equipped mission cannot be started tcould enter the catalytic engine has started, ignite aand vehicle.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM



• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, boostercables may be used to obtain a start from a boosterbattery or the battery in another vehicle. This typeof start can be dangerous if done improperly. Referto “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-cies” for further information.

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but nothave enough power to continue running when the igni-tion button/key is released. If this occurs, continuecranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to

the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key once the engine is running smoothly.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedalheld to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should be repeated.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled decrease as the engine warms

STOP/START SYSTEM — IFThe Stop/Start function is dereduce emissions. The system matically during a vehicle stopare met. Releasing the brakere-start the vehicle.

Automatic Mode

The Stop/Start feature is encustomer engine start. It willNOT READY until you drivespeed greater than 5 mph (8 system will go into STOP/STAconditions are met, can go intoSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mo


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following MustOccur:

1. The system must be in STOP/START READY state. ASTOP/START READY message will be displayed in

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)within the Stop/Start section. Refer to “ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understand-ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

2. The vehicle must be completely stopped.

3. The transmission Gear Selector must be in Drive andthe brake pedal depressed.

The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move tothe zero position and the stop/start telltale will illumi-nate indicating you are in an Autostop. While in an

Autostop, the Climate Controcally adjust airflow to maintainsettings will be maintained urunning condition.

Possible Reasons The EngSTOP

Prior to engine shut down, thsafety and comfort conditions In following situations the eng

• Driver’s seat belt is not buc

• Driver’s door is not closed

• Outside temperature is less tthan 104°F (40°C)

• Battery temperature too wa

• The vehicle is on a steep gr

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-able cabin temperature has not been achieved

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blowerspeed

• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature

• Battery discharged

• The transmission is not in DRIVE

• Hood is open

• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode

Other factors which can inhibit AutoStop include: fuellevel, accelerator pedal input, engine temp too high andsteering angle.

It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven severaltimes without the STOP/START system going into aSTOP/START READY state under more extreme condi-tions of the items listed above.

To Start The Engine While I

While in DRIVE the engine wpedal is released or the throttltransmission will automatical

restart. During this transitionvehicle to avoid undesired veh

Conditions that will cause thecally while in Autostop mode

The Engine Will Start Autom

• The transmission selector REVERSE or NEUTRAL

• To maintain cabin temperatu

• HVAC is set to full defrost

• Autostop time exceeds 5 mi

• Battery voltage drops too lo


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedalapplications)

• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed

•

4WD system is put into 4LO mode• The emissions system requires it

• A STOP/START system error occurs

Conditions that force an automatic shift to PARK whilein Autostop mode:

The Engine Will Not Start Automatically and the Trans-mission will be placed in PARK if:

• The driver door is open and brake pedal released

• The driver door is open and the driver seat belt isunbuckled

• The engine hood has been o

• A STOP/START system erro

The engine may then be restamission shift selector out of PAsome cases, only by a KEY STAInformation Center (EVIC) wilPARK message, or a STOP/QUIRED message, to indicateRefer to “Electronic Vehicle Inin “Understanding Your Instrinformation.

To Manually Turn Off The S1. Press the STOP/START O

switch bank). The light on t

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furtherinformation.

3. At the next vehicle stop (afSTART system) the engine w

4. If the STOP/START system engine can only be started a

ignition switch.

5. The STOP/START system wON condition every time back on.

STOP/START OFF Switch


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


To Manually Turn On The Stop Start System

1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on theswitch bank).

2. The light on the switch will turn off.System Malfunction

If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, thesystem will not shut down the engine. A SERVICESTOP/START SYSTEM message will appear in the Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec-tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The system will need to be checked by your authorizeddealer.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER —

The engine block heater warmquicker starts in cold weathestandard 110-115 Volt AC

grounded, three-wire extensio

1500 Models

The engine block heater cord isthe passenger side of the vehiclassembly. It is located betweradiator, but underneath the b

2500/3500 Models

The engine block heater cord i by the right front tow hook.

It includes a removable cap thstrap. It also has a c-clip that is

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


in use for the winter months. During winter months,remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself onthe c-clip.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one

hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heatercord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Voltelectrical cord could cause electrocution.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIO

CAUTI

Damage to the transmission

ing precautions are not obse• Shift into PARK only after

a complete stop.• Shift into or out of REVER

has come to a complete stidle speed.

• Do not shift between PATRAL, or DRIVE when th

speed.• Before shifting into any ge

is firmly pressing the brak

NOTE: You must press and hshifting out of PARK.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRALif the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, thevehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gear whenthe engine is idling normally and your foot isfirmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• Unintended movement othose in or near the vehicyou should never exit a veh

running. Before exiting a vparking brake, shift the trturn the engine OFF, and rethe ignition is in the OFFsion is locked in PARKagainst unwanted moveme

• When leaving the vehicle,fob and lock your vehicle.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM



• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children tobe in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedalor the transmission shifter.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (orin a location accessible to children), and do notleave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped withKeyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN

position. A child could operate power windows,other controls, or move the vehicle.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with lock which requires the tran before the ignition switch can

(key removal) position. The kefrom the ignition when the iposition, and the transmissionever the ignition switch is in t

NOTE: If a malfunction occurkey fob in the ignition switch tfeature is inoperable. The enstopped but the key fob cann

obtain service.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission ShiftInterlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARKunless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission

out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to theON/RUN position (engine running, for vehicles witheight-speed transmission) and the brake pedal must bepressed.

Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission – IfEquipped

Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuelefficient eight-speed transmission. The electronic shiftercontrol is located on the instrument panel. The transmis-sion gear range (PRND) is displayed both above theshifter control and in the Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC). To select a gear range, simply rotate theshifter control. You must press the brake pedal to shift thetransmission out of PARK (see Brake/Transmission Shift

Interlock System). You must alshift from NEUTRAL into DRIvehicle is stopped or moving amultiple gear ranges at oncesimply rotate the shifter controSelect the DRIVE range for no

The electronically-controlled precise shift schedule. The traself-calibrating; therefore, thevehicle may be somewhat acondition, and precision shiftshundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARaccelerator pedal is released aBe sure to keep your foot oshifting between these gears.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The transmission shifter control has only PARK, RE-VERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual down-shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select(ERS) switches (described later in this section). Pressingthe GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the steering wheel)while in the DRIVE position will select the highestavailable transmission gear, and will display that gear inthe instrument cluster as 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

Gear RangesDO NOT race the engine wheNEUTRAL into another gear r

NOTE: After selecting any geaallow the selected gear to enThis is especially important w

Electronic Transm


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


PARK

This range supplements the parking brake by locking thetransmission. The engine can be started in this range.Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in

motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving thevehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift thetransmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake beforeshifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-

tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhillgrade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that thetransfer case is in a drive position.

WARNI

• Never use the PARK positiparking brake. Always apfully when parked to guarment and possible injury o

• Your vehicle could move aif it is not in PARK. Make in PARK before leaving th

• It is dangerous to shift outif the engine speed is higyour foot is not firmly presvehicle could accelerate q

verse. You could lose contrsomeone or something. Onthe engine is idling normfirmly pressing the brake

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM



• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injurethose in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply theparking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. Whenthe ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicleagainst unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the keyfob and lock your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• Never leave children alonaccess to an unlocked vehicbe in a vehicle unattend

number of reasons. A chseriously or fatally injurewarned not to touch the paor the transmission shiftefob in or near the vehicle (oto children), and do not lvehicle equipped with Kethe ACC or ON/RUN posit

ate power windows, othevehicle.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM



• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (orin a location accessible to children), and do notleave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUNposition. A child could operate power windows,other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, youmust start the engine, and also press the brakepedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever couldresult.

CAUTI

• DO NOT race the enginPARK or NEUTRAL into ancan damage the drivetrain

• Before moving the shift lmust start the engine, anpedal. Otherwise, damageresult.

The following indicator shouldhave engaged the transmission

• With brake pedal released,gear position display and vPARK position.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


REVERSE

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift intoREVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a completestop.

NEUTRAL

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolongedperiods with the engine running. The engine may bestarted in this range. Apply the parking brake and shiftthe transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off theignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafepractices that limit your response to changing trafficor road conditions. You might lose control of thevehicle and have a collision.

CAUTI

Towing the vehicle, coastingreason with the transmissionsevere transmission damageTowing” in “Starting And OpDisabled Vehicle” in “Whatfor further information.

DRIVE

This range should be used fodriving. It provides the smooshifts, and the best fuel ecoautomatically upshifts througDRIVE position provides optitics under all normal operatin


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such aswhen operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, orwhile towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) switches (refer to Electronic Range Select(ERS) Operation in this section) to select a lower gearrange. Under these conditions, using a lower gear rangewill improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depend-ing on engine and transmission temperature as well asvehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once thetransmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

Transmission Limp Home M

Transmission function is moabnormal conditions. If a condresult in transmission damage,

Mode is activated. In this mooperate only in certain gearsVehicle performance may be sengine may stall. In some sitmay not re-engage if the erestarted. The Malfunction Indilluminated. A message in thinform the driver of the moreindicate what actions may be n

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


In the event of a momentary problem, the transmissioncan be reset to regain all forward gears by performing thefollowing steps:

NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message

indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en-gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desiredlocation (preferably, at your authorized dealer).

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. On

vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, press and holdthe ignition switch until the engine turns OFF.

4. Wait approximately 30 seco

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear rlonger detected, the transmi

operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmissiomend that you visit your aearliest possible convenience. Ydiagnostic equipment to deterrecur.

If the transmission cannot be

service is required.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation –Eight-Speed Transmission

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) switches allow thedriver to limit the highest available gear when the

transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you shift thetransmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will notshift above third gear (except to prevent engine over-speed), but will shift down into second and first gearsnormally.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at anyvehicle speed. When the shifter control is in the DRIVEposition, the transmission will operate automatically,

shifting between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR-switch (on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode,display the current gear in the instrument cluster, andmaintain that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERSmode, tapping the GEAR- or GEAR+ switch will changethe top available gear.

To exit ERS mode, simply prswitch until “D” is once againment cluster.

1 — ERS (-) Switch 2

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on aslippery surface. The drive wheels could lose theirgrip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision orpersonal injury.

When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying aheavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reducethe potential for transmission overheating or failure due

to excessive shifting. The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Linstrument cluster to indicate th

been activated. Pressing the swnormal operation. Normal operat engine start-up. If TOW/Hswitch must be pressed each tim

TOW/HAUL


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 1500Models Only

The transmission gear position display (located in theinstrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.

The shift lever is mounted either on the right side of thesteering column (if equipped) or on the console (if equipped). You must press the brake pedal to move theshift lever out of PARK (refer to “Brake/TransmissionShift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, movethe shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVEposition. Pull the shift lever toward you when shiftinginto REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK(column shift only).

The electronically-controlled transmission provides aprecise shift schedule. The transmission electronics areself-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a newvehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normalcondition, and precision shifts will develop within a fewhundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARaccelerator pedal is released aBe sure to keep your foot oshifting between these gears.

The transmission shift lever hNEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift shifts can be made using the(ERS) shift control (refer to “EleOperation” in this section). switches (column shift) or moleft or right (-/+) (console shposition will select the highegear, and will display that geaas 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK orNEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to

allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK

This range supplements the parking brake by locking thetransmission. The engine can be started in this range.Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is inmotion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the

vehicle in this range.When parking on a level surface, you may shift thetransmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, applyshifting the transmission to PAthe transmission locking mechcult to move the shift lever ouprecaution, turn the front wh

downhill grade and away frograde.

WARNI

• Never use the PARK positiparking brake. Always apfully when parked to guar

ment and possible injury o


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM



• Your vehicle could move and injure you and othersif it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying tomove the shift lever out of PARK with the brake

pedal released. Make sure the transmission is inPARK before leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRALif the engine speed is higher than idle speed. Ifyour foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, thevehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hitsomeone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and your foot isfirmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• Unintended movement othose in and near the vehiyou should never exit a veh

running. Before exiting a vparking brake, shift the trturn the engine OFF, and rethe ignition is in the OFFsion is locked in PARKagainst unwanted moveme

• When leaving the vehicle,fob and lock your vehicle.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM



• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children tobe in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could beseriously or fatally injured. Children should bewarned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedalor the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in ornear the vehicle (or in a location accessible tochildren), and do not leave the ignition (of a vehicleequipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACCor ON/RUN position. A child could operate power

windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTI

• Before moving the shift lmust turn the ignition swtion to the ON/RUN posi

brake pedal. Otherwise, dcould result.

• DO NOT race the enginPARK or NEUTRAL into ancan damage the drivetrain

The following indicators shouyou have engaged the transmi

tion:• When shifting into PARK, p

shift lever toward you ancounterclockwise until it stshifter, firmly move the shifand to the left until it stops


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seatedin the PARK gate.

• Look at the transmission gear position display andverify that it indicates the PARK position.

• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift leverwill not move out of PARK.

REVERSE

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift intoReverse only after the vehicle has come to a completestop.

NEUTRAL

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolongedperiods with the engine running. The engine may bestarted in this range. Apply the parking brake and shiftthe transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNI

Do not coast in NEUTRALignition to coast down a practices that limit your resp

or road conditions. You mivehicle and have a collision

CAUTI

Towing the vehicle, coastingreason with the transmissionsevere transmission damage

Towing” in “Starting And OpDisabled Vehicle” in “Whatfor further information.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


DRIVE

This range should be used for most city and highwaydriving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission

automatically upshifts through underdrive first and sec-ond gears, direct third gear and overdrive fourth andfifth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv-ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

To access all six available gears, you must use theElectronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, described below.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such aswhen operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, orwhile towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range

Select (ERS) shift control (reSelect (ERS) Operation)” in thigear range. Under these condrange will improve performanclife by reducing excessive shif

If the transmission temperatuing limits, the powertrain cotransmission shift schedule atorque converter clutch engaprevent transmission damage

If the transmission becomes exof overheating, the “Transmiss

Light” may illuminate and thedifferently until the transmissi


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loadedvehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steepgrade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. Inthese conditions, torque converter slip can impose asignificant additional heat load on the cooling system.

Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possiblegear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce thisexcess heat generation.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmissiontemperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to

achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both thetorque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear areinhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).

During extremely cold tempe below), operation may briefldirect gears only. Normal opertransmission temperature has

Transmission Limp Home MTransmission function is moabnormal conditions. If a condresult in transmission damage,Mode is activated. In this modein direct gear regardless of wlected. PARK, REVERSE, and Noperate. The Malfunction Indi

illuminated. Limp Home Moddriven to an authorized dealeraging the transmission.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM




2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.


6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is nolonger detected, the transmission will return to normal

operation.NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-mend that you visit your authorized dealer at yourearliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer hasdiagnostic equipment to determine if the problem couldrecur.

If the transmission cannot beservice is required.

Electronic Range Select (ERSix-Speed Transmission

The Electronic Range Select (ERdriver to limit the highest avalever is in the DRIVE positionthe transmission into 3 (third gnot shift above third gear, but wand first gears normally.

Use of ERS (or TOW/HAULadditional underdrive gear w

during through-gear acceleratcan improve vehicle performawhen towing a trailer on certgears 1 though 3 are underdrivdrive. ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrivenormal fourth and fifth gears.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at anyvehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVEposition, the transmission will operate automatically,shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-)switch (column shift) or tapping the shift lever to the left

(-) (console shift) will activate ERS mode, display thecurrent gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain thatgear as the top available gear. For example, if you are inDRIVE and are in third (direct) gear, when you tap theshift lever/switch one time in the (-) direction, thedisplay will show 4 (ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tapdown (-) will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 (theadded underdrive gear). Once in ERS mode, tapping ERS

(-) or (+) will change the top available gear.

Column Shi

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever tothe right (+) (console shift) or press the ERS (+) switch(column shift) until “D” is once again displayed in theinstrument cluster.

WARNI

Do not downshift for additioslippery surface. The drive grip and the vehicle could sk

personal injury.

NOTE: To select the proper gedeceleration (engine braking), shift lever to the left (-) (conswitch down (column shift). Tto the range from which the vdown.Console Shift Lever


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CAUTION!

When using ERS for engine braking while descend-ing steep grades, be careful not to overspeed theengine. Apply the brakes as needed to prevent en-

gine overspeed.

Overdrive Operation

The automatic transmission includes an electronicallycontrolled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The trans-mission will automatically shift into Overdrive if thefollowing conditions are present:

• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,

• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-perature,

• the engine coolant (antifreequate temperature,

• vehicle speed is sufficiently

• the TOW/HAUL switch ha

When To Use TOW/HAUL M

When driving in hilly areas, toheavy load, etc., and frequentcurs, press the TOW/HAUL HAUL mode. This will improvthe potential for transmission to excessive shifting. When omode, transmission upshifts amission will automatically doing) when the throttle is clos braking maneuvers.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in theinstrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time restoresnormal operation. Normal operation is always the defaultat engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, theswitch must be pressed each time the engine is started.

WARNI

Do not use the “TOW/HAULin icy or slippery conditionbraking can cause the rear w

vehicle to swing around wvehicle control, which may bly resulting in personal inj

Torque Converter Clutch

A feature designed to improvincluded in the automatic tranA clutch within the torque con

cally at calibrated speeds. Thidifferent feeling or response dthe upper gears. When the vehsome accelerations, the clutch

TOW/HAUL Switch


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE:

• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and thetransmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear,until the transmission fluid and engine coolant arewarm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving].Because top gear is disabled, and the engine speed ishigher when the torque converter clutch is not en-gaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shiftingproperly when cold. This is normal. Using the Elec-tronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, when thetransmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstratethat the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.

• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, thefirst few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to thefluid partially draining from the torque converter intothe transmission. This condition is normal and will not

cause damage to the transverter will refill within fiveengine.

Six-Speed Automatic TransModels Only

The transmission gear positioinstrument cluster) indicates thThe shift lever is mounted on thcolumn. You must press the bralever out of PARK (refer to “BInterlock System” in this sectiolever from PARK or NEUTRA

Pull the shift lever toward yoVERSE or PARK, or when shif

The electronically-controlled precise shift schedule. The traself-calibrating; therefore, the

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normalcondition, and precision shifts will develop within a fewhundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when theaccelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal whenshifting between these gears.

The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual down-shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)Operation” in this section). Pressing the ERS (-/+)switches (on the shift lever) while in the DRIVE positionwill select the highest available transmission gear, andwill display that gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4,3, 2, 1.

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine wheNEUTRAL into another gear r

NOTE: After selecting any gea

allow the selected gear to enThis is especially important w

PARK

This range supplements the patransmission. The engine canNever attempt to use PARKmotion. Apply the parking

vehicle in this range.When parking on a level sutransmission into PARK first, a brake.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake beforeshifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load onthe transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an addedprecaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a

downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphillgrade.

On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfercase is in a drive position.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brakefully when parked to guard against vehicle move-ment and possible injury or damage.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• Your vehicle could move aif it is not completely in PAmove the shift lever out o

pedal released. Make surPARK before leaving the v• It is dangerous to shift out

if the engine speed is higyour foot is not firmly presvehicle could accelerate qverse. You could lose contrsomeone or something. Onthe engine is idling normfirmly pressing the brake

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM



• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injurethose in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply theparking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. Whenthe ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicleagainst unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the keyfob and lock your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• Never leave children alonaccess to an unlocked vehicbe in a vehicle unattend

number of reasons. A chseriously or fatally injurewarned not to touch the paor the shift lever. Do not near the vehicle (or in achildren), and do not leaveequipped with Keyless Enor ON/RUN position. A chwindows, other controls, o


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CAUTION!

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, youmust turn the ignition switch from the OFF posi-tion to the ON/RUN position, and also press the

brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift levercould result.

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting fromPARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as thiscan damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure thatyou have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-tion:

• When shifting into PARK, pull the shift lever towardyou and move it all the way counterclockwise until itstops.

• Release the shift lever and min the PARK gate.

• Look at the transmission gverify that it indicates the P

• With brake pedal released, will not move out of PARK

REVERSE

This range is for moving the veREVERSE only after the vehicstop.

NEUTRAL

Use this range when the vehicleperiods with the engine runnstarted in this range. Apply ththe transmission into PARK if y

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off theignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafepractices that limit your response to changing traffic

or road conditions. You might lose control of thevehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any otherreason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can causesevere transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing ADisabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”for further information.

DRIVE

This range should be used fodriving. It provides the smooshifts, and the best fuel ecoautomatically upshifts throughand third gears, direct fourth gsixth gears. The DRIVE positioing characteristics under all no

When frequent transmission when operating the vehicle untions, in hilly terrain, traveling while towing heavy trailers),

Select (ERS) shift control (reSelect (ERS) Operation” in thigear range. Under these condrange will improve performanclife by reducing excessive shif


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-ing limits, the powertrain controller will modify thetransmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done toprevent transmission damage due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in dangerof overheating, the “Transmission Temperature WarningLight” may illuminate and the transmission may operatedifferently until the transmission cools down.

NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loadedvehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steepgrade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In

these conditions, torque converter slip can impose asignificant additional heat load on the cooling system.Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possiblegear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce thisexcess heat generation.

During cold temperatures, tra be modified depending on temperature as well as vehiclproves warm up time of the enachieve maximum efficiency.

torque converter clutch and tinhibited until the transmission“Note” under “Torque ConvertDuring extremely cold tempe below), operation may briefldirect gears only. Normal opertransmission temperature has

Transmission Limp Home M

Transmission function is moabnormal conditions. If a condresult in transmission damage,Mode is activated. In this modein fourth gear regardless of

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continueto operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may beilluminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to bedriven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-aging the transmission.



2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.


6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is nolonger detected, the transmission will return to normaloperation.

NOTE: Even if the transmissiomend that you visit your aearliest possible convenience. Ydiagnostic equipment to deterrecur.

If the transmission cannot beservice is required.

Electronic Range Select (ER

The Electronic Range Select (ERdriver to limit the highest avalever is in the DRIVE positionthe transmission into 3 (third g

not shift above third gear, but wand first gears normally.

You can switch between DRIVvehicle speed. When the shiposition, the transmission w


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-)switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear inthe instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the topavailable gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping ERS (-) or (+)will change the top available gear.

To exit ERS mode, simply prswitch until “D” is once againment cluster.

WARNI

Do not downshift for additioslippery surface. The drive grip and the vehicle could skpersonal injury.

NOTE: To select the proper gedeceleration (engine braking), ERS (-) switch down. The tran

range from which the vehicle

Column Shift Lever

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CAUTION!

When using ERS for engine braking while descend-ing steep grades, be careful not to overspeed theengine. Apply the brakes as needed to prevent en-

gine overspeed.

Overdrive Operation

The automatic transmission includes an electronicallycontrolled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The trans-mission will automatically shift into Overdrive if thefollowing conditions are present:

• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,

• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-perature,

• the engine coolant has reachture,

• vehicle speed is sufficiently

• the TOW/HAUL switch ha

When To Use TOW/HAUL M

When driving in hilly areas, toheavy load, etc., and frequentcurs, press the TOW/HAUL HAUL mode. This will improvthe potential for transmission to excessive shifting. When omode, transmission upshifts a

mission will automatically doing) during steady braking ma


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in theinstrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has

been activated. Pressing the switch a second time restoresnormal operation. Normal operation is always the defaultat engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, theswitch must be pressed each time the engine is started.

WARNI

Do not use the “TOW/HAULin icy or slippery conditionbraking can cause the rear w

vehicle to swing around wvehicle control, which may bly resulting in personal inj

Torque Converter Clutch

A feature designed to improvincluded in the automatic tranA clutch within the torque con

cally at calibrated speeds. Thidifferent feeling or response dthe upper gears. When the vehsome accelerations, the clutch

TOW/HAUL Switch

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE:

• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and thetransmission will not shift to sixth gear, until the trans-mission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because sixth gear is

disabled, and engine speed is higher when the torqueconverter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if thetransmission is not shifting properly when cold. This isnormal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shiftcontrol, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, willdemonstrate that the transmission is able to shift intoand out of Overdrive.

• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the

first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmis-sion into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluidpartially draining from the torque converter into thetransmission. This condition is normal and will notcause damage to the transmission. The torque converterwill refill within five seconds after starting the engine.

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPER

Four-wheel drive trucks aremanually shifted transfer case transfer case. Refer to the opertransfer case, located in this se

tion.

Manually Shifted Transfer C

The transfer case provides fou

• Two-wheel drive high range

• Four-wheel drive high rang

• Neutral (N)

• Four-wheel drive low range

This transfer case is intendeposition for normal street andas dry, hard surfaced roads.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4Lpositions can be used to lock the front and rear drive-shafts together and force the front and rear wheels torotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simplymoving the shift lever to the desired positions. The 4H

and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery roadsurfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry,hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear anddamage to the driveline components.

The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in theinstrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle isin four-wheel drive and that the front and rear drive-shafts are locked together. This light will illuminate when

the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4Lposition. There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRALpositions.

When operating your vehicle approximately three times thatat a given road speed. Take cengine and do not exceed 25 m

Proper operation of four-whe

on tires of equal size, type anwheel. Any difference will advcan cause damage to the drive

NOTE: Do not attempt to mafront or rear wheels are spindriveshaft speeds must be eqplace. Shifting while only thespinning can cause damage to

Because four-wheel drive prothere is a tendency to exceed sspeeds. Do not go faster than r

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may beexperienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tirepressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold tempera-tures.

WARNING!You or others could be injured or killed if you leavethe vehicle unattended with the transfer case in theNEUTRAL position without first fully engaging theparking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL positiondisengages both the front and rear driveshafts fromthe powertrain and will allow the vehicle to moveregardless of the transmission position. The parking

brake should always be applied when the driver isnot in the vehicle.

For additional information on ttransfer case mode position, se

2H

Rear-Wheel Drive High Range

street and highway driving on4H

Four-Wheel Drive High Ranfront and rear driveshafts togerear wheels to rotate at thetraction for loose, slippery roa

N

Neutral - This range disengdriveshafts from the powertrtowing behind another vehicTowing” in “Starting and Opmation.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


4L

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range locks the frontand rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rearwheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional tractionand maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road

surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

CAUTION!

Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating thevehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware dam-age can result.

Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer Case

2H To 4H

Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with thevehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With thevehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/

disengage faster if you momentor pedal after completing thforce when shifting the transfe

2H Or 4H To 4L

With the vehicle rolling at 2 to the transmission into NEUTRcoasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5case lever firmly to the desiredtransfer case NEUTRAL.

NOTE:

• Pausing in transfer caseequipped with an automatic

shutting the engine OFF tcompleting the shift. If dtransmission into NEUTRAturn the engine OFF. Make

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehiclecompletely stopped, however difficulty may occur dueto the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.Several attempts may be required for clutch teethalignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred

method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4Lwith the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to5 km/h).

• Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while thetransmission is in gear.

Transfer Case Position Indicator Light

The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in theinstrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the frontaxle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.

Electronically Shifted Trans(Four-Position Switch) – If

This is an electronic shift transfthe 4WD Control Switch (Tranlocated on the instrument pan

Transfer Case Switch


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


This electronically shifted transfer case provides fourmode positions:

• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)

• Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)

• Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)

• Neutral (NEUTRAL)

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to bedriven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normalstreet and highway conditions on dry, hard surfacedroads.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case

4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used tomaximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the frontand rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is

accomplished by rotating the 4desired position. Refer to “Shsection for specific shifting instand 4WD LOW positions are droad surfaces only. Driving in

LOW positions on dry hard sincreased tire wear and damagnents.

NOTE: The transfer case NEU by pressing the recessed buttohand corner of the 4WD ControNEUTRAL position is to be usonly. Refer to “Recreational T

Operating” for further informa

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicatethe current and desired transfer case selection. When youselect a different transfer case position, the indicator

lights will do the following:

If All Shift Conditions Are Met:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.

2. The selected position indicator light will flash until thetransfer case completes the shift.

3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the

selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

If One Or More Shift Condit

1. The indicator light for the cuON.

2. The newly selected position

tinue to flash.3. The transfer case will not s

NOTE: Before retrying a selecthe necessary requirements focase position have been met. Tthe control knob back to the cseconds, and retry selection. ments, refer to the Shifting Prcase, located in this section.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronicshift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains onafter engine start up or illuminates during driving, itmeans that the four-wheel drive system is not function-ing properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Always engage the parking brake when poweringdown the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” isilluminated. Not engaging the parking brake mayallow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personalinjury.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only thefront or rear wheels are spinning, as this can causedamage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the enginespeed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or

4WD LOCK positions at a givnot to overspeed the engine a(40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheon tires of equal size, type an

wheel. Any difference in tire sidrivetrain.


WARNI

You or others could be injurthe vehicle unattended withNEUTRAL position withoutparking brake. The transfer

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM



disengages both the front and rear driveshafts fromthe powertrain and will allow the vehicle to moveregardless of the transmission position. The parkingbrake should always be applied when the driver isnot in the vehicle.

For additional information on the appropriate use of eachtransfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normalstreet and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.

4WD LOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock Range - This range maximizestorque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rearwheels to rotate at the same speed. This range providesadditional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

4WD LOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range speed four-wheel drive. It maxdriveshaft, forcing the front anthe same speed. This range pr

and maximum pulling powersurfaces only. Do not exceed 2

N

Neutral - This range disengagdriveshafts from the powertrtowing behind another vehicTowing” in “Starting and Opmation.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Shifting Procedure

NOTE:

• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer caseposition have not been met, the transfer case will not

shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-tion will remain ON and the newly selected positionindicator light will continue to flash until all the require-ments for the selected position have been met. To retry ashift: return the control knob back to the original posi-tion, make certain all shift requirements have been met,wait five seconds and try the shift again.

• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case

position have been met, the current position indicatorlight will turn OFF, the selected position indicator lightwill flash until the transfer case completes the shift.When the shift is complete, the position indicator lightfor the selected position will stop flashing and remainON.

2WD To 4WD LOCK

Rotate the 4WD control switcShifts between 2WD and 4WDthe vehicle stopped or in momotion, the transfer case will e

you momentarily release the acing the control switch. If thignition switch must be in thengine either running or off. pleted if the ignition switch is

NOTE: The four-wheel drive s between 2WD/4WD LOCK wheels are spinning (no tract

selected position indicator lighnal position indicator light wilreduce speed and stop spinninthe shift.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW

NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW somegear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is notdetrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can useeither of the following procedures:

Preferred Procedure

1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. While still rolling, rotate switch to the desired positi

4. After the desired position iflashing), shift the transmis

Alternate Procedure1. Bring the vehicle to a comp

2. With the ignition switch inengine running, shift the tra

3. Rotate the transfer case conposition.

4. After the desired position i

flashing), shift the transmis


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE:

• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or AlternateProcedure are not satisfied prior to attempting theshift, then the desired position indicator light will flashcontinuously while the original position indicator light

is ON, until all requirements have been met.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for ashift to take place and for the position indicator lightsto be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ONposition, the shift will not take place and no positionindicator lights will be on or flashing.

Electronically Shifted Trans(Five-Position Switch) – If E


Transfer Case Switch

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


This electronically shifted transfer case provides fivemode positions:


• Four-wheel drive automatic range (4WD AUTO)


• Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)


This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to bedriven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) or four-wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street andhighway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving

the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.

For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO modecan be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, butthe vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel

drive will be automatically esenses a loss of traction. Becgaged, this mode will result inthe 2WD mode.

When additional traction is r

4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW maximize torque to the front dand rear wheels to rotate ataccomplished by rotating the 4desired position. Refer to “Shcific shifting instructions. ThLOW positions are designedsurfaces only. Driving in the 4W

positions on dry hard surfaccreased tire wear and damagenents.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lowerleft hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfercase NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreationaltowing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Startingand Operating” for further information.

Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD,4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrumentcluster and indicate the current and desired transfer caseselection. When you select a different transfer case posi-tion, the indicator lights will do the following:

If All Shift Conditions Are Met:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.

2. The selected position indicator light will flash until thetransfer case completes the shift.

3. When the shift is complete, selected position will stop f

If One Or More Shift Condit

1. The indicator light for the cuON.

2. The newly selected positiontinue to flash.

3. The transfer case will not s

NOTE: Before retrying a selecthe necessary requirements focase position have been met. T

the control knob back to the cseconds, and retry selection. ments, refer to the Shifting Prcase, located in this section.

The “SVC 4WD Warning Lighshift four-wheel drive system

STAR

STARTING AND OPERATING

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


after engine start up or illuminates during driving, itmeans that the four-wheel drive system is not function-ing properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Always engage the parking brake when poweringdown the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” isilluminated. Not engaging the parking brake mayallow the vehicle to roll which may cause personalinjury or death.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only thefront or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause

damage to driveline components.When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the enginespeed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD

AUTO or 4WD LOCK positioTake care not to overspeed the25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheon tires of equal size, type an

wheel. Any difference in tire sidrivetrain.


WARNI

You or others could be injurthe vehicle unattended withNEUTRAL position withoutparking brake. The transfer


STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM



disengages both the front and rear driveshafts fromthe powertrain and will allow the vehicle to moveregardless of the transmission position. The parkingbrake should always be applied when the driver is

not in the vehicle.

For additional information on the appropriate use of eachtransfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear-Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normalstreet and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.

4WD AUTOFour-Wheel Drive Auto Range - This range sends powerto the rear wheels. The four–wheel drive system will beautomatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.

4WD LOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock Rangtorque to the front driveshaft,wheels to rotate at the same sfor loose, slippery road surface

4WD LOWFour-Wheel Drive Low Range speed four-wheel drive. It maxdriveshaft , forcing the front anthe same speed. This range prand maximum pulling powersurfaces only. Do not exceed 2

N

Neutral - This range disengagdriveshafts from the powertrtowing behind another vehicTowing” in “Starting and Opmation.

STAR


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Shifting Procedure

NOTE:

• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer caseposition have not been met, the transfer case will notshift. The position indicator light for the previousposition will remain ON and the newly selected posi-tion indicator light will continue to flash until all therequirements for the selected position have been met.To retry a shift: return the control knob back to theoriginal position, make certain all shift requirementshave been met, wait five seconds and try the shiftagain.

• If all the requirements to sposition have been met, the light will turn OFF, the selecwill flash until the transferWhen the shift is complete, tfor the selected position wilON.

Electronically Shifted Trans(Five-Position Switch) – If E



STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


This electronically shifted transfer case provides five

mode positions:


• Four-wheel drive automatic range (4WD AUTO)


• Four-wheel drive low range


This electronically shifted trandriven in the two–wheel drivwheel drive position (4WD AUhighway conditions on dry harthe vehicle in 2WD will ha benefits as the front axle is no

For variable driving conditioncan be used. In this mode, thethe vehicle’s power is sent to thdrive will be automatically esenses a loss of traction. Becgaged, this mode will result inthe 2WD mode.

When additional traction is r4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW maximize torque to the front d

Transfer Case Switch (Five–Position)

STAR


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This isaccomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to thedesired position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for spe-cific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WDLOW positions are designed for loose, slippery roadsurfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOWpositions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in-creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo-nents.

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by depressing the recessed button (with a ballpoint penor similar object) located in the center of the 4WD ControlSwitch. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be

used for recreational towing only. Refer to “RecreationalTowing” in “Starting and Operating” for further infor-mation.

Transfer Case Position Indica

The Transfer Case Position 4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are cluster and indicate the currenselection. When you select a d

tion, the indicator lights will dIf All Shift Conditions Are M

1. The current position indica

2. The selected position indicatransfer case completes the

3. When the shift is complete, selected position will stop f


STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remainON.

2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-tinue to flash.

3. The transfer case will not shift.

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that allthe necessary requirements for selecting a new transfercase position have been met. To retry the selection, turnthe control knob back to the current position, wait fiveseconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-ments, refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer

case, located in this section.

The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronicshift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains onafter engine start up or illuminates during driving, it

means that the four-wheel driing properly and that service i

WARNI

Always engage the parking

down the vehicle if the “SVCilluminated. Not engaging allow the vehicle to roll whinjury or death.

NOTE: Do not attempt to mafront or rear wheels are spidamage to driveline componen

When operating your vehicle speed is approximately three tiAUTO or 4WD LOCK positioTake care not to overspeed the25 mph (40 km/h).

STAR


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles dependson tires of equal size, type and circumference on eachwheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to thedrivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,

there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stoppingspeeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leavethe vehicle unattended with the transfer case in theNEUTRAL position without first fully engaging theparking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position

disengages both the front and rear driveshafts fromthe powertrain and will allow the vehicle to moveregardless of the transmission position. The parkingbrake should always be applied when the driver isnot in the vehicle.

For additional information on ttransfer case mode position, se

2WD

Rear-Wheel Drive High Rangestreet and highway driving on

4WD AUTO

Four-Wheel Drive Auto Rangeto the rear wheels. The four–wautomatically engaged when ttraction. Additional traction fo

4WD LOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock Rangtorque to the front driveshaft,wheels to rotate at the same sfor loose, slippery road surface


STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


4WD LOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides lowspeed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the frontdriveshaft , forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate atthe same speed. This range provides additional traction

and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery roadsurfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

N

Neutral - This range disengages both the front and reardriveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flattowing behind another vehicle. Refer to “RecreationalTowing” in “Starting and Operating” for further infor-mation.

Shifting Procedure

NOTE:

• If any of the requirements toposition have not been metshift. The position indicatposition will remain ON antion indicator light will conrequirements for the selecte

• If all the requirements to sposition have been met, the light will turn OFF, the selecwill flash until the transferWhen the shift is complete, tfor the selected position wilON.

STAR


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2WD To 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK

Press the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch toshift the transfer case. Shifts between 2WD and 4WDAUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehiclestopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the

transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momen-tarily release the accelerator pedal after turning thecontrol switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignitionswitch must be in the ON position with the engine eitherrunning or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if theignition switch is in the ACC position.

2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD

NOTE: When shifting into orgear noise may be heard. This detrimental to the vehicle or o

Shifting can be performed wi

3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or complethe following procedures:

Preferred Procedure

1. With the engine running,3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

2. Shift the transmission into N

3 S G O G

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. While still rolling, press the desired position on thetransfer case control switch.

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (notflashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

Alternate Procedure

1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.

2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and theengine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. Press the desired position on the transfer case controlswitch.

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not

flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

NOTE:

• If Steps 1 or 2 of either thProcedure are not satisfied por if they no longer are battempt is in process, the d

light will flash continuouslyindicator light is ON, until amet.

• The ignition switch must beshift to take place and for thto be operable. If the ignitioposition, then the shift wiposition indicator lights wi


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (1500 MODELSONLY) — IF EQUIPPED

Description

The air suspension system provides full time load level-ing capability along with the benefit of being able to

adjust vehicle height by the push of a button.

1 — Up Button

2 — Down Button

3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicalectable)

Air Suspensio

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customerselectable)

5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)

6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)

NOTE: The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Modewhen the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph(100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph(106 km/h).

• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standardposition of the suspension and is meant for normaldriving.

• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately 1in (26 mm) – This position should be the primaryposition for all off-road driving until Off Road 2 (OR2)is needed. A smoother and more comfortable ride willresult. To enter OR1, press the “Up” button once from

the NRH position while th35 mph (56 km/h). When ivehicle speed remains betwe50 mph (80 km/h) for greatevehicle speed exceeds 50 mwill be automatically lowe

may not be available due tomessage will be displayed w“Electronic Vehicle Inform“Understanding Your Instrinformation.

• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises t2 in (51 mm) – This position use only where maximumquired. To enter OR2, presfrom the NRH position or owhile vehicle speed is belowin OR2, if the vehicle speed ethe vehicle height will be a


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


OR1. Off-Road 2 may not be available due to vehiclepayload, an EVIC message will be displayed when thisoccurs. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”for further information.

•

If the vehicle is in OFFROAD1 or OFFROAD2 setting, be aware of your surroundings, you may not have theclearance required for certain areas and vehicle dam-age may occur.

• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately .6 in(15 mm) – 1500 Models Only – This position providesimproved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. Thevehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the

vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h)and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds orif the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). Thevehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if thevehicle speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and

35 mph (56 km/h) for greatevehicle speed falls below 30

NOTE: Aero Mode may be settings in the Electronic Ve(EVIC) or in the Uconnect

Equipped). Refer to “Electronicter (EVIC)” in “Understandinor “Uconnect® Access SettingsInstrument Panel” for further

• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers thin (51 mm) – This position lopassenger entry and exit as wthe vehicle for easier loadin

To enter Entry/Exit Mode, once from the NRH while t33 mph (53 km/h). Once the15 mph (24 km/h) the vehlower. If the vehicle speed

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph(40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will be cancelled. Toreturn to Normal Height Mode, press the “Up” buttononce while in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode may not be

available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC messagewill be displayed when this occurs. Refer to ElectronicVehicle Information Center (EVIC) in UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel for further information.

NOTE: Entry/Exit mode may be achieved using yourkey fob for easier entry/loading. Refer to “AWord AboutYour Keys” in “Things To Know Before Starting YourVehicle” for further information.

• When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of yoursurroundings, you may not have the clearance re-quired for certain areas and vehicle damage mayoccur.

The system requires that theposition or the engine runnichanges. When lowering themust be closed. If a door is opevehicle is lowering the changuntil the open door(s) is closed

This system uses a lifting andkeeps the headlights from inccoming traffic. When raising tvehicle will move up first alowering the vehicle, the frontthen the rear.

After the engine is turned off,

air suspension system operatessystem is correcting the positioa proper appearance.

To assist with changing a spasystem has a feature which allo


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


to be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your InstrumentPanel” for further information.

NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio allenabling/disabling of air suspension features must be

done through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect® AccessSettings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

WARNING!

The air suspension system uses a high pressurevolume of air to operate the system. To avoid per-sonal injury or damage to the system, see your

authorized dealer for service.

Air Suspension Modes

The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protectthe system in unique situations:

Tire/Jack Mode

To assist with changing a spasystem has a feature which alloto be disabled. Refer to “ElectCenter (EVIC)” in “Underst

Panel” for further informationNOTE: This mode is intended running.

Transport Mode

To assist with flat bed towing, has a feature which will put thheight and disable the autom

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Inin “Understanding Your Instrinformation.

NOTE: This mode is intended running.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Wheel Alignment Mode

Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must beenabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with enginerunning.

Protection Mode

In order to “protect” the air suspension system, thevehicle will enter Protection Mode when load levelingcannot be achieved. Some driving may be required toclear the protection mode telltale in the EVIC. Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-tion.

NOTE: If equipped with aenabling/disabling of air susdone through the radio. RefSettings” in “Understanding Yfurther information.

Electronic Vehicle InformatDisplay Messages

When the appropriate conditappear in the EVIC display. RInformation Center (EVIC)” Instrument Panel” for further

An audible chime will be heardhas been detected.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Operation

The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to showthe current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicatorlamps will show a position which the system is workingto achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are

flashing, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the posi-tion the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing, the lowest solid indica-tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.

Pressing the “UP” button once will move the suspensionone position higher from the current position, assumingall conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position,engine running, speed below threshold, etc). The “UP”

button can be pressed multiple times, each press willraise the requested level by one position up to a maxi-mum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).

Pressing the “DOWN” buttonpension one position lower frsuming all conditions are mposition, engine running, dothreshold, etc). The “DOWNmultiple times, each press will

by one position down to a minor the lowest position allowedtions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)

Automatic height changes wispeed and the current vehicle hand EVIC messages will operachanges and user requested ch

•

Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicato be illuminated when the ve

• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicatoilluminated when the vehic

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Normal Ride Height (NRH)/Aero Mode – Indicatorlamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle isin this position.

• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illumi-nated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. Entry/

Exit mode can be requested up to 33 mph (53 km/h).If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will flash and indicatorlamp 3 will remain solid until Entry/Exit Mode isachieved at which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off.

• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving thevehicle.

• Tire/Jack Mode – indicatoilluminated. Tire/Jack Modevehicle.

• Wheel Alignment Mode – in be illuminated. Wheel Align

driving the vehicle.AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEMONLY) — IF EQUIPPED

Description

The air suspension system is asystem. The main purpose of the truck’s rear ride height lev


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard

position of the suspension and is meant for normaldriving.

Trailer Mode (Lowers the vehimm) – This position will lowerconnect and level the trailer. Thcontinuously until trailer heig

The system requires that theposition or the engine runnichanges.

After the engine is turned off, air suspension system operatessystem is correcting the positioa proper appearance.

To assist with changing a spasystem has a feature which allo

to be disabled. Refer to “ElectCenter (EVIC)” in “UnderstPanel” for further information

Rear Leveling Ride Height Switch

f d h h d ll b d bl d h d

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio allenabling/disabling of air suspension features must bedone through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect® AccessSettings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

WARNING!

The air suspension system uses a high pressurevolume of air to operate the system. To avoid per-sonal injury or damage to the system, see yourauthorized dealer for service.

Air Suspension Modes

The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protectthe system in unique situations:

Tire/Jack Mode

To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspensionsystem has a feature which allows the automatic leveling

to be disabled. This mode is engine running. Refer to “ElecCenter (EVIC)” in “UnderstPanel” for further information

NOTE: This mode is intended

running.Transport Mode

To assist with flat bed towing, has a feature which will put tRide Height (NRH) and disleveling system. This mode isengine running. Refer to “ElecCenter (EVIC)” in “Underst

Panel” for further information

NOTE: This mode is intended running.

Wh l Ali M d NOTE If i d i h


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Wheel Alignment Mode

Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must beenabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forfurther information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with enginerunning.

Protection Mode

In order to “protect” the air suspension system, thevehicle will enter Protection Mode when load levelingcannot be achieved. Some driving may be required toclear the protection mode telltale in the EVIC. Refer to“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-tion.

NOTE: If equipped with aenabling/disabling of air susdone through the radio. RefSettings” in “Understanding Yfurther information.

Electronic Vehicle InformatDisplay Messages

When the appropriate conditappear in the EVIC display. RInformation Center (EVIC)” Instrument Panel” for further

An audible chime will be heardhas been detected.

Operation

Pushing the Trailer Mode buttRide Height (NRH) will lower

NOTE Th LED ill ti l bli k til hi l AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM (P

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until vehicletrailer level that been achieved.

Pushing the Trailer Mode again will raise the vehicle toNormal Ride Height (NRH).

NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until Normal

Ride Height (NRH) has been achieved.

• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving thevehicle.

• Tire/Jack Mode – The LED will be illuminated. Tire/ Jack Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.

• Wheel Alignment Mode – The LED will be illumi-

nated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by drivingthe vehicle.

AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM (PMODELS ONLY) — IF EQUI

This vehicle is equipped with eand rear differentials. These dimechanically lock together thwheels to spin at an equal ratemaintain its momentum and pstuck. The locking front and rea be engaged during low-speedtions where one wheel is likelythe ground. It is not recommewith the differentials locked reduced ability to turn and sp

iti th l i l k


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CAUTION!

• Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfacedroads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reducedand damage to the drivetrain may occur when theaxles are locked on hard surfaced roads.

• Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle isstuck and the tires are spinning. You can damagedrivetrain components. Lock the rear axle beforeattempting situations or navigating terrain, whichcould possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.

The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch.

The switch has three positions, AXLE UNLOCK, REAR

LOCK, and FRONT/REAR LOCK. Under normal driv-ing conditions, the switch should be left in the AXLEUNLOCK position. In the AXLE UNLOCK position, thefront and rear axles are unlocked. In the REAR LOCK

position, the rear axle is lockLOCK position, the front and

NOTE: Even when the axles aposition, the limited slip differprovides torque biasing capatraction environments.

During the command to lock twill flash until the axle is lockehas been successfully executedsolid.

To lock the rear axle, place th“Four Wheel Drive Operationing” for further information. M

position to REAR LOCK while(5 km/h). The RR indicator lighrear axle is locked.

NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may be NOTE: The rear axle must be l

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may benecessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicatorlight is flashing after placing the switch in the REARLOCK or FRONT/REAR LOCK position, drive the ve-hicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the lockingaction.

WARNING!

Do not use the locked axle position for normaldriving. A locked front axle is intended for off-roaddriving only. Locking the front axle during on-roaddriving will reduce the steering ability. This couldcause a collision and you may be seriously injured.

To lock the front axle; move the axle locker switch toFRONT/REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph(5 km/h). The indicator light will be solid when the frontaxle is locked.

NOTE: The rear axle must be lwill lock.

To unlock the front axle; movREAR LOCK. The FRONT/REwill go out when the axle is u

NOTE: The axle lockers couldside to side loads on the axturning the steering wheel fromhand turn or driving in REVEmay be required to release the taxles.

To unlock the rear axle; moveAXLE UNLOCK. The REAR LO

out when the rear axle is unlo

STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM POWER


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWERWAGON ONLY

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnectingstabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater frontsuspension travel in off-road situations.

Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has anincreased ride height of approximately 1.9 in (48.3 mm)in the front and 1.5 in (38.1 mm) in the rear. A majoradvantage to increasing ride height is the positive effectit has on approach/departure and break over angles.

This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar switch located on the instrument panel.

The switch has two positions; Osystem is normally in the On-Rsolid green light. The stabilizer/the On-Road mode during norm

1 — On Road2 — Off Road

To disconnect the stabilizer/sw

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive onhard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph(29 km/h), you may lose control of the vehicle, whichcould result in serious injury or death. The front

stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is nec-essary for maintaining control of the vehicle. Thesystem monitors vehicle speed and will attempt toreconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph(29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing off roadlight and solid on road light. Once vehicle speed isreduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the system willattempt to return to the Off-Road mode.

To disconnect the stabilizer/swor 4LO as shown in “Four Whpress the right hand Off Road sto obtain the Off-Road positlight will flash until the stabfully disconnected.

NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bdue to left and right suspensiocondition is due to driving surloading. In order for the disconnect/reconnect, the righmust be aligned. This alignmvehicle be driven onto level grto side.

To return to the On-Road moRoad stabilizer/sway bar butt

agency to determine the de


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to On-Roadmode, vehicle stability is greatly reduced. Do notattempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss

of control of the vehicle, which could result inserious injury or death. Contact your local servicecenter for assistance.

SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGONONLY

Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics

Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities.These off-road capabilities will allow you to explorethose wilderness trails where few travel, providing asource of exciting and satisfying recreation. Before youventure out, you should contact your local governmental

agency to determine the de(ORV) trails or recreation areaslightly and only use establisrecreational areas. The NationaLand Management or local Dsources are a wealth of infor

maps with marked trails.Skid Plates And Underbody

Steel skid plates protect the mof the truck including the fuesteering damper. In addition,with boxed cross members andtional protection allows the severe off-road situations thatpassable by a normal truck.

Ramp Travel Index (RTI)

The ramp travel index is the dican drive your vehicle with o

ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground ThisCAUTI

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground. Thisdistance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of thevehicle and multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehiclehas an RTI of 655, which means you can articulate onefront wheel 32 inches in the air while the other threewheels remain in contact with the ground.

Water Fording Characteristics

Water fording characteristic is the vehicle’s ability tocross a body of still water, where the powertrain anddrivetrain are safe from water ingestion. This vehicle hashigh water fording characteristics with the ability to crossa pool of water, without stopping, 24 inches deep at amaximum speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of water 30 inches deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph(8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle of 1.3degrees.

CAUTI

The door sill height is 25 incinto the interior of the vehic

Simultaneous Brake And Th

Many off-road driving conditious use of the brake and throWhen climbing rocks, logs, using light brake pressure withvehicle from jerking or lurchiused when you need to stop asteep incline.

The Basics Of Off-Road Dri

You will encounter many typroad. You should be familiar before proceeding. There areconditions: hard packed dirt,

mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect onWARNI


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect onyour vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Control-ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-roaddriving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheeland maintain a good driving posture. Avoid suddenaccelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no

road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Thereforeyou will need to use your own good judgment on what issafe and what isn’t. When on a trail you should always belooking ahead for surface obstacles and changes interrain. The key is to plan your future driving route whileremembering what you are currently driving over.

CAUTION!

Never park your vehicle over dry grass or othercombustible materials. The heat from your vehicleexhaust system could cause a fire.

WARNI

Always wear your seat belcargo. Unsecured cargo can boff-road situation.

When To Use Low RangeWhen driving off-road, shift additional traction or to improvslippery or difficult terrain. Durange will allow the engine to range. This will allow you todown hills, with improved couse 4L (Low Range) in rain, ice

heavy loads rolling, improve (High Range) traction will not

Driving In Snow, Mud And SandCAUTI

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g S o , ud d Sa d

There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving insnow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive tosteering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore youshould accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distancesand avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a

slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain thevehicle’s momentum.

• Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control andtraction at slower speeds, shift the transmission to alow gear and shift the transfer case to 4L (Low Range)if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessaryto maintain headway. Over-revving the engine canspin the wheels and traction will be lost. If you start toslow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no morethan a ¼ turn quickly back and forth, while stillapplying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momentum.

CAUTI

On icy or slippery roads, doengine RPMs or vehicle speeing may cause skidding and

•

Mud – Deep mud createsaround the tires and is veryYou should use 4L (Low enough to maintain your moIf you start to slow to a stopwheel no more than a ¼ tufor additional traction. Muthreat of vehicle damage annormally full of debris fromstuck. As a good practice bhole, get out and determine any hidden obstacles and ifrecovered if stuck.

• Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through withCAUTI


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


y gfull tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in atrail maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do notstop. The key to driving in soft sand using the appro-priate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoidingabrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s mo-

mentum. If you are going to be driving on large softsandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to aminimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tiresurface area. Reduced tire pressure will drasticallyimprove your traction and handling, while driving onthe soft sand, but you must return the tires to normalair pressure before driving on pavement or other hardsurfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires backup prior to reducing the pressure.

CAUTI

Reduced tire pressures may total loss of air pressure. Tounseating, while at a reducedspeed and avoid sharp turns

Crossing Obstacles (Rocks

While driving off road, you witerrain. These varying types of tof obstacles. Before proceedingdetermine the correct approachrecover the vehicle if something grip on the steering wheel, brinstop and then inch the vehicle fowith the object. Apply the throlight brake pressure and ease tobject.

WARNING!will lift your undercarriage ove

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering systemloading which could cause you to loose control ofyour vehicle.

Using A SpotterThere are many times where it is hard to see the obstacleor determine the correct path. Determining the correctpath can be extremely difficult when you are confrontingmany obstacles. In these cases have someone guide youover, through, or around the obstacle. Have the personstand a safe distance in front of you where they can seethe obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and

guide you through.Crossing Large Rocks

When approaching large rocks, choose a path whichensures you drive over the largest with your tires. This

y gthe tire is tougher and thickerdesigned to take the abuse. Alwevery effort to cross the large r

CAUTI

• Never attempt to straddenough to strike your axle

• Never attempt to drive ovenough to contact the doo

Crossing A Ravine, Gully, D

When crossing a ravine, gully,rut, the angled approach is the

vehicle’s mobility. Approach degree angle and let each tireindependently. You need to ularge obstacles with steep sideany large obstacle with steep

enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you getCAUTI


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g p y gcaught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removeddirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.You should now be able to drive out following the trenchyou just created at a 45-degree angle.

WARNING!

There is an increased risk of rollover when crossingan obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.

Crossing Logs

To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log. Whileclimbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator toavoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then easethe vehicle off the log using your brakes.

CAUTI

Do not attempt to cross a logthan the running ground cleabecome high centered.

Getting High CenteredIf you get hung up or high centethe vehicle and try to determinup on, where it is contacting the

best direction to recover the veyou are in contact with, jack therocks under the tires so the wewhen you let the vehicle down.

vehicle or winching the vehicle

CAUTION!vehicle if something goes w

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CAUTION!

Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objectsincreases the risk of underbody damage.

Hill Climbing

Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steepto climb and should not be attempted. You should alwaysfeel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. Youshould always climb hills straight up and down. Neverattempt to climb a hill on an angle.

• Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a hill

consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is toosteep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill sidetrail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on topand the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches orother obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the

good and you feel confidentinto a lower gear, shift the tand proceed with caution. and 4L (Low Range) for ver

• Driving Up Hill – Once yo

ability to proceed and haveate gear, line your vehicle usible run. Accelerate with anapply more power as you stforward into a steep grade, tcould cause you to lose contto bounce, ease off the throtttires back on the ground. As

the hill ease off the throttlethe top. If the wheels start tocrest of a hill, ease off the headway by turning the stea ¼ turn quickly back and

fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide ability to proceed then mak


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


enough traction to complete the climb. If you do notmake it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistancealong with the vehicle brakes.

WARNING!Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turnaround on a steep grade. Driving across an inclineincreases the risk of a roll over, which may result insevere injury or death.

• Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hillyou need to determine if it is too steep for a safe

descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade toosteep to maintain a slow controlled descent? Are thereobstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if thevehicle descends too fast? If you feel confident in your

Range) with the transmissiselect first gear on automaticeed with caution. Allow endescent and apply your brakallow the tires to lock.

WARNI

Do not descend a steep grvehicle brakes in conjunctioDescending a grade too fastcontrol and be seriously inju

• Driving Across An Incline

driving across an incline. If vehicle’s abilities. Driving more weight on the down hthe possibilities of a down hsure the surface has good tra

soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angleh d l h l d

WARNI

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


heading slightly up or down.

WARNING!

Driving across an incline increases the risk of arollover , which may result in severe injury.

• If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stallor begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill,allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediatelyapply the brake. Restart the engine and shift intoREVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing thecompression braking of the engine and transmission tohelp regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to

control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoidlocking or skidding the tires.

WARNI

If the engine stalls or you lmake it to the top of a steattempt to turn around. Totipping and rolling the vehi

severe injury. Always back chill in REVERSE. Never baTRAL using only the vehidiagonally across a hill, alwdown.

Driving Through Water

Extreme care should be taken cWater crossings should be avo be attempted when necessarmanner. You should only drivdesignated and approved. You

avoid damage to the environment. You should knowhi l ’ bili i d b bl i if

CAUTI


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


your vehicle’s abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut avehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingestedwater into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls do notattempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested water

first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. You wantto use first gear in 4L (Low Range) and proceed veryslowly with a constant slow speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h]maximum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving;do not try to accelerate through the crossing. Aftercrossing any water higher than the bottom of the axledifferentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluidsfor signs of water ingestion.

CAUTI

Water ingestion into the axlecase, engine or vehicle interitoo fast or through too deep opermanent damage to eng

vehicle components and yoeffective once wet and/or mu

• Before You Cross Any Tyapproach any type of wateryou can cross it safely and reout and walk through the stick. You need to be sure ofcurrent and bottom conditio

muddy waters, check for hidyou will not be intruding onrecover the vehicle if nece

crossing is the water depth, current and bottom con-diti O ft b tt th hi l ill i k i

CAUTI

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


ditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in,effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Besure to consider this when determining the depth andthe ability to safely cross.

• Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other

Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or otherstanding water areas normally contain murky ormuddy waters. These water types normally containhidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine anaccurate water depth, approach angle, and bottomcondition. Murky or muddy water holes are whereyou want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. Thismakes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery.

If you are able to determine you can safely cross, thanproceed using the low and slow method.

Muddy waters can reduce thtiveness by depositing debri

• Crossing Ditches, Streams,

Flowing Water – Flowingdangerous. Never attemptstream or river even in shawater can easily push ysweeping it out of control. Ea high current can still washyour tires putting you and There is still a high risk of pdamage with slower water

than the vehicle’s runningshould never attempt to crodeeper than the vehicle’s ruEven the slowest current can

downstream out of control if the water is deep enought h th l f f th hi l ’ b d

Airing Down For Off-Road


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


to push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body.Before you proceed determine the speed of the current,the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom conditionand if there are any obstacles, then cross at an angleheading slightly upstream using the low and slow

technique.

WARNING!

Never drive through fast moving deep water. It canpush your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out ofcontrol. This could put you and your passengers atrisk of injury or drowning.

Running lower tire pressure oride comfort and vehicle tractpressure allows the tire to bulsurface area for better flotatioform to the ground contour. D

vehicles require different tire prock and heavier vehicles requsofter surfaces such as sand andneed to experiment to determsituation. It is easier and fastereplace it so, start high and low ber you must return the tire before driving on road or at hi

you have a way to return the tirair pressure.

CAUTION!vehicle? Is there an anchor poalone or do you have another

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire dam-age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of airpressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while ata reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and

avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Vehicle Recovery

If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situationwhere you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehiclerecovery should always be given consideration beforeattempting a questionable obstacle. You should never gooff-road driving without the ability to recover your

vehicle from a situation. Having another vehicle withyou usually works best for most situations. The firstthing to do is assess the situation. Why are you stuck?Are you hung up on something? Would it be easier to goforward or to go backward? Can you still move the

alone or do you have anotherhigh risk of vehicle damage duAnswering these questions wi best method of recovery. If youslightly and the only issue is

cycling your vehicle would be tample room, an additional vehvehicle impingement on the sutow strap to the vehicle tow easy. If the vehicle is severelywhere great care needs to be tthen nothing can do the job betseverely hung up on somethvehicle up and stack somethallow the vehicle to roll off thfurther damage. This should bany recovery method.

CAUTION!shift. If after a few rock cyclstop and try another metho


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without firstclearing the object, may result in additional under-body damage.

• Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your ve-hicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonlyused methods. This simply involves shifting yourvehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE, while applyingthrottle after each shift. During this process, for addi-tional traction, try turning your steering wheel quickly back and forth no more than a ¼ turn. If you are stuckin mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires duringthis process to clean the debris from the tread and

improve the traction. You want to create a rockingmotion with the vehicle. This helps build vehiclemomentum, which hopefully gets you out. Rememberto ease off and on the accelerator before and after the

stop and try another methorock cycling will only causyour vehicle and the enviro

CAUTI

Damage can occur when spexcessive high speed. Do nthan an indicated 30 mph (4

• Using The Tow Hooks Withare a quick and easy way to minor situations if you haveis not stuck. The tow ho

designed to take the abusivvehicle recovery. Do not usevehicle component as an attstraps requires coordinationGood communication and li

a safe recovery. First connect the tow strap to thecorrect attachment points on both vehicles There

brakes, once signaled by tquence is important to avo

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


correct attachment points on both vehicles. Thereshould be a least 20 to 30 feet between the vehicles toallow for a safe recovery. If necessary join two towstraps together using a 1 ½ inch hard wood dowel.This will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is

safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks. Nexthave the tow vehicle backup, leaving two to three feetworth of slack in the strap. Then the tow vehicle, usinglight throttle, should accelerate tightening the strapproviding the pulling force needed to free the vehicle.The vehicle being recovered should assist in the recov-ery, at the time of the snap, by slowly spinning the tiresin the same direction as the pulling vehicle. After thevehicle becomes free, the driver of the previously stuck

vehicle should signal they are free and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles. The driver of the pull-ing vehicle should let off the throttle without using the

quence is important to avovehicle hit the pulling vehic

WARNI

Never use tow straps with

straps with a clevis pin. Thcould become projectiles ifcould cause severe injury. Neor three feet of slack in the stgreatly increases the risk of age. Always keep everyone aa strapping or winching situ

•

Winching (Refer To “WinchInformation) – Winching isthe following situations: thavailable, a high controlled fthe vehicle, there is a high

vehicle damage, or where nothing else seems to work.A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a great

the strung out cable helpground if it breaks Next pl


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a greatdeal of control. It allows you to walk the vehicle out of the situation in a slow controlled manner. This controlworks well for avoiding further vehicle damage. Onceyou decide it is time to use the winch look for a good

anchor point. It needs to be strong enough to holdmore than the vehicle’s weight and provide a directionof pull as straight as possible. Use block and tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull or increase thewinch’s pulling force. If the anchor point is a tree usea strap around its base and hook the cable to the strap.If it is another vehicle, then place that vehicle in PARKand block the front tires. If you cannot find an anchorpoint within reach try using your spare tire by burying

it. Once you have determined an anchor point hook upthe cable, ensuring there are a least five wraps of cableleft on the drum, and place a floor mat or somethingelse over the strung out cable. Placing something over

ground if it breaks. Next, pland apply a very light throttin. Be careful not to allow recover the vehicle. Do not the drum. If it starts to bunch

can re-spool the cable afterwcable as a tow strap and awinching.

WARNI

Winch cables are under high can become a projectile if thor straddle the winch cable.

the winch cable. Never stanwhile winching. Failure to fcan result in serious or fatal

After Driving Off-Road

Off d i hi l h

• Check for accumulations othings could be a fire hazard

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle thandoes most on-road driving. After going off-road, it isalways a good idea to check for damage. That way youcan get any problems taken care of right away and haveyour vehicle ready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, andexhaust system for damage.

• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean asrequired.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly onthe chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-

pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to thevalues specified in the Service Manual.

things could be a fire hazardto fuel lines, brake hosespropeller shafts.

• After extended operation similar dirty conditions, ha

rotors, wheels, brake liningsand cleaned as soon as poss

WARNI

Abrasive material in any parexcessive wear or unpredictnot have full braking powprevent a collision. If you havehicle in dirty conditions, gand cleaned as necessary.

• If you experience unusual vibration after driving inmud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for

will supply maximum tractionone rear wheel on an excessiv


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels forimpacted material. Impacted material can cause awheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it willcorrect the situation.

LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL

The limited-slip differential provides additional tractionon snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly whenthere is a difference between the traction characteristicsof the surface under the right and left rear wheels. Duringnormal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit per-forms similarly to a conventional differential. On slip-pery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the bettertraction.

The limited-slip differential is especially helpful duringslippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on aslippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator

one rear wheel on an excessivmomentary application of thnecessary to gain maximum tr

WARNI

On vehicles equipped with anever run the engine with ground since the vehicle mawheel remaining on the gcontrol of the vehicle.

Care should be taken to avoid s both rear wheels are on a sli

cause both rear wheels to spinslide sideways on the crowneturn.

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

A l ti

Traction

Wh d i i t l h

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pullerratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurswhen there is a difference in the surface traction underthe rear (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rearwheels. You could lose control of the vehicle andpossibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and

carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).

When driving on wet or slushywedge of water to build up bsurface. This is known as hydpartial or complete loss of vehability. To reduce this possibil

tions should be observed:1. Slow down during rainstor

slushy.

2. Slow down if the road has s

3. Replace tires when tread wevisible.

4. Keep tires properly inflated5. Maintain sufficient distance

the vehicle in front of yousudden stop.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is ca


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensuresafety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Do not drive on or across a road or path where wateris flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-ing water can wear away the road or path’s surfaceand cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carryyour vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this

warning may result in injuries that are serious orfatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

Although your vehicle is cashallow standing water, consiand Warning before doing so.

CAUTI

• Always check the depthbefore driving through istanding water that is deethe tire rims mounted on t

• Determine the condition that is under water and if tthe way before driving thro

• Do not exceed 5 mph (

through standing water. Teffects.


h h d d

WARNI

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Driving through standing water may cause damageto your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Alwaysinspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after

driving through standing water. Do not continue tooperate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-nated, as this may result in further damage. Suchdamage is not covered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine cancause it to lock up and stall out, and cause seriousinternal damage to the engine. Such damage is not

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

• Driving through standingcle’s traction capabilities.(8 km/h) when driving thr

• Driving through standing

cle’s braking capabilities, wdistances. Therefore, aftering water, drive slowly abrake pedal several times

• Getting water inside youcause it to lock up and sstranded.

• Failure to follow these winjuries that are serious o

sengers, and others around

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep

After Driving Off-Road

Off-road operation puts more s


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Care should be taken when attempting to climb steephills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If naturalobstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and

cautiously.If you must back down a hill, back straight down usingREVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago-nally across the hill.

When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain,shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the acceleratorslowly to avoid spinning the wheels.

Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.

Off-road operation puts more sdoes most on-road driving. Aalways a good idea to check fcan get any problems taken cayour vehicle ready when you

• Completely inspect the unCheck tires, body structure,exhaust system for damage

• Inspect the radiator for murequired.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly onthe chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-

WARNI

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to thevalues specified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. Thesethings could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage

to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, andpropeller shafts.

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, orsimilar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brakerotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspectedand cleaned as soon as possible.

Abrasive material in any parexcessive wear or unpredictnot have full braking powprevent a collision. If you havehicle in dirty conditions, gand cleaned as necessary.

• If you experience unusual mud, slush or similar conditimpacted material. Impactwheel imbalance and freeicorrect the situation.

WINCH USAGE (POWER WAGON ONLY) —IF EQUIPPED

Tensioning The Wire Rope

The winch rope must be prop


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Things To Know Before Using Your Winch

General Winch Information

Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery

winch. This winch uses the electrical power from thevehicle charging system to power a motor that windswire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduc-tion. By nature, a winch is capable of generating veryhigh forces and should be used with care. Do not operatethe winch without reading and understanding the com-plete winch owner’s manual.

The winch rope must be propFollow the instructions below

1. Un-spool the wire rope leavthe winch drum.

2. Attach the hook to a suitabl

CAUTI

Be certain the anchor will quired to tension the wire ro

3. Apply at least 500 lbs (227 while winding the rope. Alw

rope does not pile up on onneatly wound onto the dru

CAUTION!Winch Motor Thermal Prote

Your winch is equipped with a

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in thedirection indicated on the drum rotation decal on thewinch.

Low Voltage Interrupt

Your winch is equipped with a device that will interruptwinch function if the vehicle charging system voltagedrops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or outfor 30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt istripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for afew minutes to allow the vehicle charging system torecover before continuing to winch.

Your winch is equipped with ain the motor. If the winch is duration, the device may intprotect the winch motor. Durinpower-out but will not power-

to cool for a few minutes beforwinch will resume normal func

Understanding The Features Of Your Winch


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Winch Components

1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehiclecharging system and features a thermal protection

it h th t t ti ll t t f ti i th

6. Clutch Lever: The clutch levto be disconnected from the

i t b ll d f

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


switch that automatically stops motor function in thepower-in direction if the motor gets too hot.

2. Remote Socket: The remote socket allows the remotecontrol to be attached to the control pack to allow the

winch to function.3. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch drum

allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch andtransmits force to the wire rope. The winch isequipped with an integral brake that will stop rotationof the winch drum if the winch motor is stopped.

4. 3-Stage Planetary Gear Set:Provides balance between

speed and pulling power.5. Wire Rope: The wire rope allows the winch to be

connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force.

wire rope to be pulled from

7. Remote Control: The reminterface between the winchThe remote control provide

winch in, out, and stop thwinch, the toggle switch is pwinch in and up to power will stop if the switch is leposition.

CAUTI

If not installed, the hook stra

hook.

Fairlead: The fairlead acts as and minimizes damage to the

Winch Accessories

The following accessories are necessary to attach the winch

Snapro


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g yto anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe winching.

Gloves: Wire rope, throughuse, will develop barbs

which can slice skin. It is ex-tremely important to wearprotective gloves while oper-ating the winch or handlingthe wire rope. Avoid loose fit-ting clothes or anything thatcould become entangled in

the wire rope and other moving parts.

snaincrpowpul

damProis Pul

Clevis/D-Shackles: TheD-Shackle is a safe means of connecting the looped ends of

Trecallqua

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


connecting the looped ends of cables, straps and snatch blocks. The shackle’s pin isthreaded to allow easyremoval.

quaopefor varobje

ing

Operating Your Winch

WARNING!

WARNING! (C

• Always stand clear of wire


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

Failure to observe any of these warnings regardingproper winch usage may result in severe injury.

• Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook

when spooling wire rope in or out.• Never use as a hoist.• Never use to move persons.• Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity.• Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling

the wire rope.• Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or

under load.•

Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is underload, wire rope is in tension, or wire rope drum ismoving.

(Continued)

Always stand clear of wireothers away during winch

• Always keep hands and clrope, hook and fairlead opand when spooling.

• Never wrap wire rope backa choker chain, wire choprotector on the anchor.

• Never attach a recovery strincrease the length of a pu

• Never attempt to tow a vestrap attached directly to t

• Never use bungee straps t

and potentially dangerousstretched.


• Always disconnect the remote control when not in

3. Use the right equipment fo

4. Always wear leather gloves

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


yuse.

• Never winch when there are less than five wraps ofwire rope around the winch drum.

• Always pass remote control through a window to

avoid pinching lead in door, then using remoteinside a vehicle.

• Never leave the remote control plugged into thewinch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.

General Information

Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some keypoints to remember when using your winch are:

1. Always take your time to assess the situation and planyour pull carefully.

2. Always take your time when using a winch.

rope to slip through your hrope.

5. Only the operator should hremote control.

6. Think safety at all times.

Vehicle Recovery Using The

CAUTI

• Always Know Your Winchread and understand the in

Operations Guide, and BaTechniques, in order to undthe winching operation.


• Always inspect winch installation and wire rope

1. Inspect the winch, winch mdamage. Do not use the winrope shows excessive wear


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


y p pcondition before operating the winch. Frayed,kinked or damaged wire rope must be replacedimmediately. Loose or damaged winch installationmust be corrected immediately.

• Always be sure any element which can interferewith safe winching operations is removed prior toinitiating winching.

• Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum,wire rope and rigging.

• Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed wires, or looseconnections. Replace if damaged.

• Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar

through the rollers. Watch and listen to Winch forproper snugness.

rope shows excessive wear

2. Put on gloves.

3. Disengage the clutch to alwinch drum, rotate the cludisengage. Freespooling con

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Freethe winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook

strap to the hook (if not attached).

5. Pull the wire to the anchor prope to reach your anchor

certain amount of tension ontwisted and over-wrapped wwire rope damage. To prevehook strap while you work

Free Spool Hook St


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have establishedyour anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector orchoker-chain around the object.

CAUTI

Always be certain the anchstand the load.

Tree Trunk P

NOTE: How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchoris critical to winching operations. An anchor must bestrong enough to hold while winching. Natural anchors

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


s o g e o g o o e c g N c o sinclude trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as low aspossible. If no natural anchors are available when recov-ering another vehicle, your vehicle becomes the anchorpoint. In this case, be sure to put the transmission in

NEUTRAL, apply the hand brake and block its wheels toprevent your vehicle from moving. Ideally, you’ll wantan anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in thedirection the vehicle will move. This allows the wire ropeto wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum. Ananchor point as far away as possible will provide thewinch with its greatest pulling power.

7. Attach the Clevis/D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector.Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chainand through the hook loop, being careful not to overtighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).

8. Lock the clutch. Lock the wclutch lever on the winch to

NOTE: Always ensure the cdisengaged.

Clevis/D-Sh

9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box,located behind the front bumper. Be careful not to letthe remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If

10. Put wire rope under tensiotrol switch, slowly wind thremains. Once the wire ro


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


gyou choose to control the winch from inside yourvehicle, always pass the remote through a window toavoid pinching the cord in the door. Always discon-nect the remote control when not in use.

well clear of it and never s

11. Check your anchor. Makesecured and free of debris bwinching procedure.

12. Check wire rope. The wire rope should be neatlywound around the spooling drum. Improper wind-ing can cause damage to the wire rope.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g g p

In certain situations you may blanket or similar object ove blanket can absorb energy shPlace it on the wire rope midwthe anchor point. Do this beunder tension. Do not approachtension is applied. Do not allofairlead. If it is necessary to moslack the tension on the wire r

13. Establish no people zones: Make your intentionsclear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinitysurrounding the winching operation is completely


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g g p p yaware of your intentions before you pull. Declarewhere the spectators should not stand - neverbehind or in front of the vehicle and never near thewire rope or snatch block. Your situation may have

other no people zones.

No People

14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engineon and light tension already on the wire rope, beginwinching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the wire

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


rope is winding evenly and tightly around the spool-ing drum. For additional assistance, the winchedvehicle can be slowly driven while being pulled bythe winch. Continue pulling until the vehicle is on

stable ground. If you are able to drive the vehicle, thewinching operation is complete.

NOTE:

• Avoid overheating the wi

winching, stop at reasonabwinch motor to cool down.

Using The Rem

• What to look for under load: The wire rope mustalways spool onto the drum as indicated by the drumrotation decal on the winch. As you power-in, make

15. Secure vehicle. Once recovplete, be sure to secure thethe transmission to PARK.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on thedrum. This prevents the outer wire wraps from draw-ing into the inner wraps, binding and damaging thewire rope. Avoid shock loads by using the control

switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack. Shockloads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wirerope ratings. During side pulls the wire rope tends tostack up at one end of the drum. This stack can becomelarge enough to cause serious damage to the winch. So,line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stopwinching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods ormounting plate. To fix an uneven stack, spool out that

section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite endof the drum, which will free up space for continuedwinching.

rope.

16. Disconnect the wire rope,anchor.

17. Rewind the wire rope. Therope should walk the rothrough the hand, control

NOTE: How to spool under mote control lead so it cannoArrange the wire rope so it wi

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers

inside the hook area as you are powering-in.

spooled. Be sure any wire ropdrum is wound tightly and evstraighten the layer if necessunder light tension and spoo

onto the winch drum in even tighten and straighten the layerprocess until the winch hook ifull length of the remote contthe hook between your thumbthe hook strap. Hold the hookand forefinger to keep tension wire rope towards the fairlead

remaining wire rope. By puswitch.

18. Store the hook on the moshook.

Rigging Techniques

Various winching situations wother winching techniques. Th


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the remotecontrol cord from the control box and store in a cleanand dry place. Winching operations are now com-

plete. Put the cap on the solenoid plug-in.NOTE: Always store the remote control in a protected,clean, dry area.

g qlittle distance to achieve maxline rigging, simply increasingtaining a straight-line pulling sassess what technique is correcsafety at all times.

How To Change The Pulling Direction block, secured to a point direcwill enable you to change youstill allowing the wire rope to b

t th li d

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


All winching operations should have a straight line fromthe winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes thewire rope collecting on one side of the drum affectingpulling efficiency and damaging wire rope. A snatch

onto the spooling drum.

Increasing Pulling Power

In some cases, you may fin

pulling power. The use of snchanical advantage and thapower.

Change Pulling Directions

Double Line wire rope to free the winch hoovehicle’s frame/tow hook and a snatch block. Disengage th

t h bl k ll t h


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Because pulling power decreases with the number of

layers of wire rope on the winch drum, you can use asnatch block to double line out more wire rope. Thisdecreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum,and increases pulling power. Start by feeding out enough

snatch block, pull out enough point. Do not attach the hook tto the anchor point with a treechain. Attach the clevis/shackl

two ends of the strap/chain, tighten (tighten and back-off 1

POWER STEERING — 1500

The electric power steering syvehicle response and increasein tight spaces. The system willight efforts while parking and

the electric steering system prevents it from providing assability to steer the vehicle man

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced or no power steer-i i t ld f t i k t lf d

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infderstanding Your Instrument Ption.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


ing assist could pose a safety risk to yourself andothers. Service should be obtained as soon as pos-sible.

If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicleneeds to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely thevehicle has lost power steering assistance.

If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER-ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on theEVIC screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneu-vers may have occurred which caused an over tempera-ture condition in the power steering system. Once driv-

ing conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idlefor a few moments until the icon and message turn off.

If the Steering icon is displPOWER STEERING – ASSIST Othe EVIC screen, they indicattaken to the dealer for servVehicle Information (EVIC)” Instrument Panel” for further

NOTE:

• Even if the power steerinoperational, it is still possUnder these conditions thincrease in steering effort, es

during parking maneuvers.

• If the condition persists, see service.

POWER STEERING — 2500/3500 Models

The standard power steering system will give you goodvehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability

• Upon initial start-up in colding pump may make noise fThis is due to the cold, thsystem This noise should be


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanicalsteering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will

still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steeringeffort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and duringparking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheeltravel are considered normal and do not indicate that

there is a problem with the power steering system.

system. This noise should bedoes not in any way damag

WARNI

Continued operation with assist could pose a safety risService should be obtained

CAUTI

Prolonged operation of the stof the steering wheel travel w

fluid temperature and it shpossible. Damage to the pooccur.

Power Steering Fluid Check– 2500/3500 Models

Checking the power steering fluid level at a definedservice interval is not required. The fluid should only be

WARNI

Fluid level should be checkewith the engine off to prev

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises areapparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-rized dealer.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your power steeringsystem as the chemicals can damage your powersteering components. Such damage is not covered bythe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

with the engine off to prevparts and to ensure accuratenot overfill. Use only manufpower steering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restolevel. With a clean cloth, wipesurfaces. Refer to “Fluids, LParts” in “Maintaining Your Vetion.

FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINESONLY – IF EQUIPPED

This feature offers improved fuel economy by shuttingff f f h h l d d l h l d


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light loadand cruise conditions. The system is automatic with nodriver inputs or additional driving skills required.

NOTE: This system may take some time to return to fullfunctionality after a battery disconnect.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave thetransmission in PARK.

The foot operated parking brake is located below the

lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply thepark brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. Torelease the parking brake, pull the parking brake releasehandle.

When the parking brake is aswitch ON, the “Brake Warnin

cluster will illuminate.

Parking Brak

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will

WARNI

• Never use the PARK positiparking brake Always ap

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will soundto alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.

• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the frontwheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and awayfrom the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwisethe load on the transmission locking mechanism may

make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. Theparking brake should always be applied whenever thedriver is not in the vehicle.

parking brake. Always apfully when parked to guarment and possible injury o

• Never leave children alon

access to an unlocked vehichildren in a vehicle is danreasons. A child or otherfatally injured.

• Do not leave the key fob iin a location accessible tleave a vehicle equipped win the ACC or ON/RUN

operate power windows, the vehicle.


• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengagedbefore driving; failure to do so can lead to brake

BRAKE SYSTEM

If power assist is lost for arepeated brake applications wb k ill till f ti H


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


gfailure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or

injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission inPARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to rolland cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains on withthe parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by

an authorized dealer immediately.

brakes will still function. Howesubstantial increase in braking

If either the front or rear hydr

braking capability, the remaintion with some loss of overall bwill be evident by increased petion, greater pedal force requactivation of the “Brake WarnWarning Light” (if equipped)

Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System

WARNING!

The system’s pump motor ruprovide regulated hydraulic pmakes a low humming noise normal.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System containssophisticated electronic equipment. It may be sus-ceptible to interference caused by improperly in-stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment.This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lockbraking capability. Installation of such equipmentshould be performed by qualified professionals.

The Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is de-signed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle controlunder adverse braking conditions. The system operateswith a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure

to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding onslippery surfaces.

normal.

The ABS conducts a low-spee(16 km/h). If you have your while this test is occurring, y

movement. The movement canand snow. This is normal.

When you are in a severe brause of the ABS, you will experthe vehicle comes to a completthe system reverting to the bnormal.

Engagement of the ABS mapulsing sensation. You may aThese occurrences are normsystem is functioning.

ABS Warning Light

The ABS includes an amber warning light. When the lightis illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The systemreverts to standard non anti lock brakes

WARNING! (C

• The ABS cannot prevent coresulting from excessive sp


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


reverts to standard, non-anti-lock brakes.

WARNING!

• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminishtheir effectiveness and may lead to a collision.Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Justpress firmly on your brake pedal when you need toslow down or stop.

• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot preventthe natural laws of physics from acting on thevehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering

efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition ofthe vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

(Continued)

another vehicle too closely• The capabilities of an ABS

never be exploited in a

manner which could jeopathe safety of others.

Hydraulic Brake Assist – 25Except Power Wagon

The brake system power assis boost unit which shares fluidsystem. You may experience noises from the hydro-boost syconditions.

NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will behigher than normal until the power steering fluid reachesoperating temperature.

hydraulic brake pressure to phelp avoid skidding on slipper

NOTE: ABS improves steerinduring hard braking maneuve

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake Sys-

tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake AssistSystem (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), HillStart Assist (HSA), Hill Decent Control (HDC), ElectronicStability Control (ESC) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).All of the systems work together to enhance vehiclestability and control in various driving conditions, andare commonly referred to as ESC.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The ABS aids the driver in maintaining vehicle controlunder adverse braking conditions. The system controls

during hard braking maneuve

WARNI

• ABS cannot prevent the nfrom acting on the vehibraking or steering efficienby the condition of the vehthe traction afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent coresulting from excessive spanother vehicle too closely

•

The capabilities of an ABSnever be exploited in a manner which could jeopathe safety of others.

Traction Control System (TCS) – If Equipped

The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brakepressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine

Brake Assist System (BAS

The BAS is designed to optimcapability during emergency BAS detects an emergency bra


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s), and enginepower is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration andstability. A feature of the TCS functions similarly to alimited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin

across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle isspinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more enginetorque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are inthe “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)” in this section of this manual. This brakepressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping

to non-slipping wheels to provide optimal forward trac-tion.

BAS detects an emergency brathe rate and amount of braapplies optimum pressure toapplies optimum pressure to

braking conditions. This can tances. The BAS complement brakes very quickly results in treceive the benefit of BAS, yo braking pressure during the sreduce brake pedal pressure udesired.

Once the brake pedal is release

WARNING!

• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase

Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If E

The HSA system is designedlaunching a vehicle on an inclilevel of brake pressure the d

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g ,braking efficiency beyond that afforded by thecondition of the vehicle brakes and tires or thetraction afforded.

• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including thoseresulting from excessive speed in turns, followinganother vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle mustnever be exploited in a reckless or dangerousmanner which could jeopardize the user’s safety orthe safety of others.

level of brake pressure the dduration once the driver takepedal. If the driver does not apshort duration, the system w

and the vehicle will roll down trelease brake pressure in prothrottle applied.

During operation, HSA will asystem and a clicking noise mathe brake pedal during operapedal movement. The clickingnormal and both will stop wh

HSA Activation Criteria

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA toactivate:

h l b d

WARNI

There may be situations on m7%), with a loaded vehicle o


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Vehicle must be stopped

• Vehicle must be on an approximate 7% or greaterincline

• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

where the system will not acmay occur, which could cauother vehicle or object. Alwa

is responsible for braking th

The system will only work if thvehicle and vehicle gear maintended direction is forward uin DRIVE and the activation cactivate.

The system will work in REVE

and will not activate if the vTRAL.

Towing And Hauling With HSA

The HSA system does not know if your vehicle is loadedor towing a trailer unless the TOW/HAUL switch, lo-cated on the center stack, is selected. When activated, the

WARNI

• If you use a trailer braktrailer, your trailer brake

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


cated on the center stack, is selected. When activated, the“TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in theinstrument cluster. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in“Starting and Operating” for further information. In

order to accommodate the extra weight entailed undertowing and hauling conditions and to increase drivercomfort while launching on a hill, the system recognizeswhen the TOW/HAUL switch is activated and compen-sates by releasing brake pressure at a slower rate whilethrottle is applied in order to prevent the vehicle fromrolling down the hill.

deactivated with the brakebrake pedal is released, thbrake pressure to hold the

hill and this could cause avehicle or object behind rolling down the incline wtion, manually activate thmore vehicle brake pressubrake pedal. Always remsponsible for braking the


• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicleon a hill without putting the transmission in PARKor using the parking brake it will roll down the

3. With the engine running anthe steering wheel 180° coun

4. Press the “ESC Off” switseconds. The “ESC Off Indic


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


or using the parking brake, it will roll down theincline and could collide with another vehicle,object or person, and cause serious or fatal injury.Always remember to use the parking brake whileparking on a hill and that the driver is responsiblefor braking the vehicle.

HSA Off

Non-EVIC Equipped Vehicles

If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow thisprocedure:

1. Start with the engine OFF, and the vehicle in PARKwith the wheels straight.

2. Start the engine.

seconds. The ESC Off Indicand disappear four times.

5. Rotate the steering wheel 3

wise from center).6. Cycle ignition switch OFF t

7. If the sequence was compleIndicator Light” will blinkHSA is off.

Steps 1 through 7 must be comto turn off HSA. Repeat steps

HSA functionality.

EVIC Equipped Vehicles

HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVICequipped vehicle. If you wish to turn off the HSA feature,refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/

3. Active (feature is enabledvehicle speed).

Enabling HDC

HDC is enabled by pressing

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer Programmable Features” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” for further information.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped (PowerWagon Only)

HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed whiledescending hills, during various driving situations. HDCcontrols vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.

HDC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation

conditions are not met, or driver is actively overridingwith brake or throttle application).

HDC is enabled by pressing following conditions must als

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Ra

• Vehicle speed is below 5mp

• Parking brake is released.

• Driver door is closed.

Activating HDC

Once HDC is enabled it will driven down a grade of suffi

than approximately 8%). Th

selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using +/-gear shifter. The following summarizes the HDC setspeeds:

Gear Approximate HDC Set

NOTE: During HDC the +/- for HDC target speed selectiomission into ERS but will notthe transmission unless in Drivth t i i ill hift


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Gear Approximate HDC SetSpeed

1st 0.8 mph (1.3 km/h)

2nd 2 mph (3.2 km/h)3rd 3 mph (4.8 km/h)

4th 4 mph (6.4 km/h)

5th 5 mph (8 km/h)

6th 6 mph (9.6 km/h)

D 6 mph (9.6 km/h)

R 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

N 1 mph (3.2 km/h)P Not Applicable

the transmission will shift appselected set speed and correspo

Driver Override:

The driver may override HDC brake application at any timethe transmission will be in ERSand the vehicle will shift from being displayed.

Deactivating HDC

HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake

Disabling HDC

HDC will deactivate and befollowing conditions occur:

• The driver presses the HDC

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brakeapplication.

• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph but remains below

40 mph.

• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni-tude (less than approximately 8%), is on level ground,or is on an uphill grade.

• Vehicle is shifted to park.

• The driver presses the HDC

• The driveline is shifted out

•

The parking brake is applie• Driver door opens.

• The vehicle is driven greatethan 70 seconds.

• The vehicle is drive greaterimmediately).

Feedback to the driver:

The instrument cluster has a HDC icon and a HDCswitch which has an LED which offers feedback to thedriver about the state HDC is in.

WARNI

HDC is only intended to assling vehicle speed when desc

t i tt ti t th


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate andremain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.

This is the normal operating condition for HDC.• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several

seconds then extinguish when the driver presses theHDC switch but enable conditions are not met.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for severalseconds then extinguish when HDC deactivates due toexcess speed.

•

The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDCdeactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing willstop and HDC will activate again once the brakes havecooled sufficiently.

must remain attentive to theis responsible for maintaini

Electronic Stability Contro

The ESC system enhances direity of the vehicle under varioucorrects for oversteering or un by applying the brake of the ain counteracting the oversteerEngine power may also be remaintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehiclpath intended by the driver anpath of the vehicle. When the a

the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer orundersteer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than

this mode. This mode shouldriving situations. ESC shouldOff” or “ESC Off” for specific

WARNI

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.All Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-WheelDrive Vehicles In 2WD, 4WD AUTO, Or 4WDLOCK Modes Can Choose The Following ESCOperating Modes:

ESC On

This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2WD/4WD

AUTO/4WD LOCK modes and in 2WD vehicles. When-ever the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOW or Neutral, back to4WD LOCK or 4WD AUTO, the ESC system will be in

WARNI

Electronic Stability Control (natural laws of physics from

can it increase the traction affconditions. ESC cannot prevthose resulting from excessivon very slippery surfaces, orcannot prevent accidents resucontrol due to inappropriate ditions. Only a safe, attentivprevent accidents. The capabi

vehicle must never be exploigerous manner which coulsafety or the safety of others.

ESC Partial Off

This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESCOff” switch. When in Partial Off mode, the TCS portionof ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described in

NOTE: To improve the vehiclwith snow chains or starting gravel, it may be desirable to smode by pressing the “ESC Oftion requiring ESC to be swit


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated. All other stabilityfeatures of ESC function normally. This mode is intended

to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravelconditions and more wheel spin than TCS would nor-mally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC onagain, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch. This willrestore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.

tion requiring ESC to be switmode is overcome, turn ESC pressing the “ESC Off” switch

the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!

• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionalityof ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-scribed in the TCS section) has been disabled and

All Four-Wheel Drive Vehic4WD LOCK Modes Can AlsFollowing ESC Operating MESC Operating Mode in 4W

F ll Off

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled andthe “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power

reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and theenhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-tem is reduced.

• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when theESC system is in the Partial Off mode.

Full Off

This mode is intended for off-rity features could inhibit vehictrail conditions. This mode isholding the “ESC Off” switch vehicle is stopped and the engseconds, the “ESC Off Indicaand the “ESC Off” message wiPress and release the trip odominstrument cluster to clear this

NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and theaudible chime will sound when the shift lever is placedinto the PARK position from any other position and thenmoved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if the message was previously cleared.

“ESC Off” is the only operatiLOW. Whenever the vehicle ithe transfer case (if equipped) ior NEUTRAL, to 4WD LOW, this mode.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the message was previously cleared.

In this mode, ESC and TCS except for the “limited slip”feature described in the TCS section are turned off until

the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At40 mph (64 km/h) the system returns to “Partial Off”mode, described above. When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph (56 km/h) the ESC system shuts off. ESCis off at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interferewith off-road driving but ESC function returns to providethe stability feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).The “ESC Off Indicator Light” will always be illuminated

when ESC is off. To turn ESC on again, momentarilypress the “ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal“ESC On” mode of operation.

this mode.

WARNI

In the ESC Full Off mode, tion and stability features athe enhanced vehicle stabiunavailable. In an emergencESC system will not engagestability. “ESC Off” modehighway or off-road use onl

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light AndESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorLight” in the instrument cluster will come on

h th i iti it h i t d t th ON

The “ESC Activation/Malfuncated in the instrument clusterthe tires lose traction and the EThe “ESC Activation/Malfuncflashes when TCS is active.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


when the ignition switch is turned to the ONposition. It should go out with the engine

running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, amalfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If thislight remains on after several ignition cycles, and thevehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) atspeeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problemdiagnosed and corrected.

flashes when TCS is active. Malfunction Indicator Light” celeration, ease up on the accethrottle as possible. Be sure driving to the prevailing road

NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

The TSC system uses sensors ian excessively swaying trailerpriate actions to attempt to stmay reduce engine power an


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC systemwill be ON even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking soundswhen it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stopwhen ESC becomes inactive following the maneuverthat caused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates theElectronic Stability Control (ESC) is partiallyoff or full off.

may reduce engine power anappropriate wheel(s) to counteTSC will become active automa

swaying trailer is recognizedquired to activate. Note that Tfrom swaying. Always use cauand follow the trailer tongue wRefer to “Trailer Towing” in “Sfurther information. When TSCActivation/Malfunction Indicengine power may be reduc

brakes being applied to indivistop the trailer from swaying.ESC system is in the “Partial O

TSC is only active in the default “ESC On” mode. TSCcan be disabled by pressing the “ESC Off” switch andentering “ESC Partial Off” mode. It is not active in the“ESC Partial Off” or “ESC Off” modes. Refer to the ESCportion of this section for an explanation of the different

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATIO

Tire Markings

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p pESC operating modes.

WARNING!If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicledown, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust thetrailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety StandardsCode (TIN)

4

2 — Size Designation 5

3 — Service Description 6 T

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-tion Example: P215/65R15 95H

tires is the same as for P-Mletters “LT” that are moldeding the size designation. Exa

• Temporary spare tires are sprary emergency use only


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European-Metric tire sizing is based on Europeandesign standards. Tires designed to this standard havethe tire size molded into the sidewall beginning withthe section width. The letter P is absent from this tiresize designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

rary emergency use only. compact spare tires have theinto the sidewall preceding

ample: T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing standards and it begins withinto the sidewall. Example:

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Size Designation:

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g o g....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standardsLT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards

T or S = Temporary spare tire31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

— Ratio of section height to section width of tire10.5 = Section width in inches (in)R = Construction code

— R means radial construction

— D means diagonal or bias construction15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95 = Load Index— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can ca

H = Speed Symbol


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


H = Speed Symbol— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carryits load index under certain operating conditions

— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, roposted speed limits)

Load Identification:

....blank.... = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a StandExtra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tireLight Load (LL) = Light load tireC, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to cMaximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,however, the date code may only be on one side. Tireswith white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including thedate code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outbotires as mounted on the vehiclethe outboard side, then you wside of the tire.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Departmesafety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


— 03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

— 01 means the year 2001— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one numyear in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural mem behind the front door.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the vehicle has not been driven for at lea

than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a thrpressure is measured in units of PSI (poukPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the mcold tire inflation pressure for this tire. Tpressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-sure

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended colas shown on the tire placard.

Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to thvehicle’s loading capacity, the original eqthe recommended cold tire inflation press

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire And Loading Information Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed onthe driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’sid d


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


side door.

B-Pillar Location for Tire AnPlacar

Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you importathe:

1) number of people that can

2) total weight your vehicle c

3) tire size designed for your

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3) tire size designed for your

4) cold tire inflation pressuresspare tires.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceedthe load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. Youwill not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if youadhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

To determine the maximum lovehicle, locate the statement “occupants and cargo should XXX kg” on the Tire and LoadThe combined weight of occuptrailer tongue weight (if applic


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


inflation pressures specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section

of this manual.NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rearaxles must not be exceeded. For further information onGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

trailer tongue weight (if applicthe weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Corre1. Locate the statement “The c

pants and cargo should nXXX kg” on your vehicle’s

2. Determine the combined wpassengers that will be ridi

3. Subtract the combined weig

sengers from XXX lbs or XX

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750 and 1400 750 = 650 lbs

NOTE:

• The following table shows elate total load, cargo/luggaof your vehicle with varyinand number and size of oc

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs[295 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

illustration purposes only anthe seating and load carry c

• For the following exampleoccupants and cargo shou(392 kg).


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloadingcan cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, andincrease your stopping distance. Use tires of therecommended load capacity for your vehicle Never

Safety

WARNI

• Improperly inflated tires cause collisions.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Neveroverload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe andsatisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primaryareas are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Under-inflation increasessult in over-heating and ti

• Over-inflation reduces a shock. Objects on the rocause damage that result i

• Over-inflated or under-infhicle handling and can failoss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures calems. You could lose contr


• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicleto the other can cause the vehicle to drift to theright or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-

of the vehicle and can prodresponse or over responsivenes

Unequal tire pressures from sidand unpredictable steering res

Unequal tire pressure from si


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


ymended cold tire inflation pressure.

EconomyImproper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat-terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wearpatterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earliertire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rollingresistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability

Unequal tire pressure from sivehicle to drift left or right.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflationdriver’s side “B” Pillar or reardoor.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire prespocket-type pressure gauge

judgement when determini

may look properly inflated einflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will preventmoisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,which could damage the valve stem

Check tire pressures more oftenof outdoor temperatures, as temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by appro12°F (7°C) of air temperature c

h h ki ti i

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressureis defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tireinflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

when checking tire pressure inthe winter.

Example: If garage temperatuoutside temperature = 32°F inflation pressure should be inwhich equals 1 psi (7 kPa) foroutside temperature condition

Tire pressure may increase froduring operation. DO NOT re build up or your tire pressure

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds andwithin posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at highspeeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is veryimportant Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

Radial Ply Tires

WARNI

Combining radial ply tires won your vehicle will cause


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicleloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-

tion. Refer to your authorized tire or original equipmentvehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-mum load is dangerous. The added strain on yourtires could cause them to fail. You could have a

serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to themaximum capacity at continuous speeds above75 mph (120 km/h).

poorly. The instability coulways use radial ply tires

combine them with other ty

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damagemeets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven

• The damage is only on the

(sidewall damage is not rep• The puncture is no greater t

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs andadditional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that haveexperienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size andservice description (Load Index and Speed Code)

Summer Or Three Season T

Summer tires provide tractioconditions, and are not intendeon ice. Summer tires will ndesignation or mountain/snosidewall Use summer tires on

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


service description (Load Index and Speed Code).

Tire Types

All Season Tires – If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-tween different all season tires. All season tires can beidentified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation onthe tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

sidewall. Use summer tires ondo so may adversely affect th

your vehicle.Snow Tires

Some areas of the country reqduring the winter. Snow tiremountain/snowflake symbol o

If you need snow tires, select ttype to the original equipment

in sets of four; failure to do sosafety and handling of your ve

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than whatwas originally equipped with your vehicle and shouldnot be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer tooriginal equipment or an authorized tire dealer forrecommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold

Run Flat Tires – If Equippe

Run Flat tires allow you the ca(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) afpressure. This rapid loss of infrun flat mode. A run flat moinflation pressure is of/or belo


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p g p gtire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skidand traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should bechecked before using these tire types.

inflation pressure is of/or beloRun Flat tire reaches the run

driving capabilities and needately. A Run Flat tire is not rep

It is not recommended drivincapacity or to tow a trailer whmode.

See the Tire Pressure Monitorimation.

Spare Tires – If Equipped

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of aspare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in What To Do InEmergencies for further information.

CAUTION!

rotation for your vehicle. If yorefer to an authorized tire deatire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire – If Equ

The compact spare is for temp

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take

your vehicle through an automatic car wash with acompact, full size or limited-use temporary spareinstalled. Damage to the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire AndWheel – If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire andwheel equivalent in look and function to the original

equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axleof your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire

You can identify if your vehcompact spare by looking at th

the Tire and Loading Informatdriver’s side door opening or Compact spare tire descriptionor “S” preceding the size des80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited trea

ment tire should be repaired (oon your vehicle at the first opp

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount aconventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since thewheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.Do not install more than one compact spare tire andwheel on the vehicle at any given time.

front or rear axle of your vehictire may have limited tread lifto the tread wear indicators, thspare tire needs to be replacedyour original equipment tireoriginal equipment tire and rei


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

Compact spares are for temporary emergency useonly. With these spares, do not drive more than50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limitedtread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wearindicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to bereplaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, whichapply to your spare. Failure to do so could result inspare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare – If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the

first opportunity.

Limited-Use Spare – If EquiThe limited-use spare tire is fuse only. This tire is identifiedlimited-use spare wheel. This limitations for this spare. Thoriginal equipped tire on the vehicle, but it is not. Installatiotire affects vehicle handling. S

your original equipment tireoriginal equipment tire and reifirst opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehiclehandling. With this tire, do not drive more than thespeed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snowspin your vehicle’s wheels abfor longer than 30 seconds coping when you are stuck.

R f t “F i A St k V

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed onyour Tire and Loading Information Placard located

on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of thedriver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the originalequipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall iton your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in lossof vehicle control.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck VeEmergencies” for further infor

WARNI

Fast spinning tires can be dated by excessive wheel speage or failure. A tire could exone. Do not spin your vehi30 mph (48 km/h) for more tously when you are stuck, an

a spinning wheel, no matter

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tiresto help you in determining when your tires should bereplaced.

These indicators are molded ingrooves. They will appear as b

becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). Whetread wear indicators, the tire sreplacement tires in this section

Life Of Tire


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is

factors including, but not limi

• Driving style

• Tire pressure

• Distance driven

• Performance tires, tires wihigher, and summer tires

tread life. Rotation of these tenance schedule is highly r1 — Worn Tire2 — New Tire

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after sixyears, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure tofollow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.You could lose control and have a collision resulting

Information placard or the Vehthe size designation of your Speed Symbol for your tire wiequipment tire sidewall. See ample found in the Tire Safety manual for more information r

d S d S b l f i

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as littleexposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contactwith oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of manycharacteristics. They should be inspected regularly forwear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-lent to the originals in size, quality and performancewhen replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading

and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace rear tires as a pair. Replacing affect your vehicle’s handlinwheel, make sure that the whthose of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contaoriginal equipment dealer withave on tire specifications or

equivalent replacement tires safety, handling, and ride of y

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other thanthat specified for your vehicle. Some combinationsof unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-pension dimensions and performance characteris-i l i i h i h dli d

WARNING! (C

• Failure to equip your veadequate speed capability failure and loss of vehicle

CAUTI


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, andbraking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-

able handling and stress to steering and suspen-sion components. You could lose control and havea collision resulting in serious injury or death. Useonly the tire and wheel sizes with load ratingsapproved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index orcapacity, other than what was originally equippedon your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load

index could result in tire overloading and failure.You could lose control and have a collision.

(Continued)

CAUTI

Replacing original tires withmay result in false speedomings.

SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRES

IF EQUIPPED

A light load vehicle conditiongers [150 lbs (68 kg) each] plu

Cold tire inflation pressures fowill be found on the face of th

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-bodyclearance. Follow these recommendations to guardagainst damage.

• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, asrecommended by the traction device manufacturer

Please follow the table below type, and axle recommendatio

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


recommended by the traction device manufacturer.

Vehicle Axle Recommendations Tire Sizes

1500 Models Rear Only P265/70R17

2500 Models Rear Only LT245/70R17ELT265/70R18ELT275/70R18E

2500 Power Wagon Mod-els

Rear Only LT285/70R17D

3500 (Single Rear Wheel)

Models

Rear Only LT265/70R18E

LT275/70R18E3500 (Dual Rear Wheel)

ModelsFront/Rear LT235/80R17E

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)between front and rear axles can cause unpredictablehandling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION! (C

• Install device as tightly atighten after driving abou

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 • Drive cautiously and avoi

bumps, especially with a l


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe thefollowing precautions:

• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-tween tires and other suspension components, it isimportant that only traction devices in good condi-tion are used. Broken devices can cause seriousdamage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noiseoccurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove

the damaged parts of the device before further use.

(Continued)

bumps, especially with a l• Do not drive for prolong

ment.• Observe the traction device

tions on the method ofspeed, and conditions fosuggested operating speedturer’s if it is less than 30

• Do not use traction devices

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate atdifferent loads and perform different steering, driving,and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear atunequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires

The suggested rotation methoshown in the following diagrdoes not apply to some directireversed.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with

aggressive tread designs such as those on all season typetires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintainmud, snow and wet traction levels and contribute to asmooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the propermaintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permis-sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusualwear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-

formed. Tire Rota

Directional Tires – If Equipped

For the R/T package with 22” tires and wheels, therotational direction of the tire must be taken into consid-eration when rotating the tires. The recommended rota-tion pattern for directional tires is shown below.

Dual Rear Wheels – If Equi

The tires used on dual whematched for wear to prevent ovTo check if tires are even, layfour tires. The straight edge sh


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Tire Rotation Tire Rota

CAUTION!

3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one approveddirection of rotation. This is to accommodate theasymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the On/Off-Road tire and the use of Outline White Letter (OWL)tires

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR

The Tire Pressure Monitor Sysdriver of a low tire pressure bamended cold placard pressure

The tire pressure will vary witpsi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


tires.

• When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to be

remounted on the rim, or installed at a differentlocation, to maintain the correct placement of thetire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel positionon the truck. For example, if the spare is used toreplace an outer rear tire it will have to be re-mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dishedinward. That way the tread design of asymmetricaltires and the white writing of the OWL tires will

maintain proper position.

psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12 F (6.5the outside temperature decre

decrease. Tire pressure shoulcold inflation tire pressure. Tpressure after the vehicle has nthree hours, or driven less ththree hour period. The cold tinot exceed the maximum inflathe tire sidewall. Refer to “Tirin “Starting and Operating” fproperly inflate the vehicle’s t

also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal andthere should be no adjustment for this increased pres-sure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warninglimit for any reason, including low temperature effects

d l l h h h

to be driven for up to 20 (25 km/h) in order for the TPMtion.

For example, your vehicle mcold (parked for more than throf 30 psi (207 kPa). If the amb( C) d h d


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tirepressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turnoff until the tire pressure is at or above the recommendedcold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-minates, you must increase the tire pressure to therecommended cold placard pressure in order for the “TirePressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The

system will automatically update and the “Tire PressureMonitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the systemreceives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need

(20°C) and the measured tire pa temperature drop to 20°F (-7pressure to approximately 23pressure is sufficiently low enoPressure Monitoring Telltale Lmay cause the tire pressure topsi (186 kPa), but the “Tire PreLight” will still be ON. In Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lafter the tires are inflated to th

cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the originalequipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures andwarning have been established for the tire sizeequipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-eration or sensor damage may result when using

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended tand maintenance or to provior condition.

• The TPMS should not be usewhile adjusting your tire pr

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


eration or sensor damage may result when usingreplacement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causesensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealantsor balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with aTPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,always reinstall the valve stem cap. This willprevent moisture and dirt from entering the valvestem, which could damage the TPM sensor.

while adjusting your tire pr

• Driving on a significantly uthe tire to overheat and Under-inflation also reducetread life, and may affect thstopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressure using an accurate tire pressuregauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-ing Telltale Light.”

S l t t h ill ff t ti

NOTE: It is particularly impotire pressure in all of the tiresand to maintain the proper pr

The TPMS consists of the follo

• Receiver module,

• Four TPM sensors and


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure inthe tire.

Base System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wirelesstechnology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors tomonitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to eachwheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressurereadings to the receiver module.

• Four TPM sensors, and

•

TPM Telltale LightThe matching full size spare wequipped) has a TPM sensor. Tcan be used in place of any oTPMS will only monitor the prwhen it is used in place of a rowith a pressure below the lowcause the “Tire Pressure Mon

illuminate or the chime to sou

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” willilluminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIREPRESSURE” message will display in the EVIC,

and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in oneor more of the four active road tires. An Inflate to XX

message will also be displayed Should this occur you

Service TPMS WarningIf a system fault is detected, theTelltale Light” will flash on and remain on solid. The system faulthe ignition switch is cycled, providing the system fault stillMonitoring Telltale Light” wil

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


message will also be displayed. Should this occur, youshould stop as soon as possible, check the inflation

pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tireto the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressurevalue as shown in the Inflate to XX message. Once thesystem receives the updated tire pressures, the systemwill automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni-toring Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” mes-sage will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven forup to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the

TPMS to receive this information.

Monitoring Telltale Light wilcondition no longer exists. A sy

any of the following:1. Signal interference due to el

next to facilities emitting thethe TPM sensors.

2. Installing aftermarket windmaterials that may block ra

3. Accumulation of snow or

wheel housings.4. Using tire chains on the veh

5. Using wheels/tires not equ

Vehicles with Full Size Spare

1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assemblyhas a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.

2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tirethat has a pressure below the low-pressure warninglimit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will

Premium System – If Equip

The Tire Pressure Monitor Systechnology with wheel rim momonitor tire pressure levels. wheel as part of the valve stereadings to the receiver modu


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p g ysound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be

displayed, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring TelltaleLight” will turn ON. An Inflate to XX message willalso be displayed.

3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph(24 km/h) will turn off the “Tire Pressure MonitoringTelltale Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message,as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressurewarning limit in any of the four active road tires.

NOTE: It is particularly impo

tire pressure in all of the tiresand to maintain the proper pr

The TPMS consists of the follo

• Receiver module,

• Four TPM sensors,

• Various TPMS messages, wtronic Vehicle Information C

• TPM Telltale Light

The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can beused in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with apressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate orthe chime to sound.


STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM



The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” willilluminate in the instrument cluster and a chimewill sound when tire pressure is low in one or

more of the four active road tires. In addition, the EVICwill display a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for aminimum of five seconds and a graphic showing thepressure values of each tire with the low tire pressurevalues flashing or in a different color. An Inflate to XX

message will also be displayed.

Should this occur, you shouldand inflate the tires with a lowflashing or in a different color ivehicle’s recommended cold pvalue as shown in the Inflatesystem receives the updated will automatically update, th

EVIC will stop flashing or return to it’s original color, andthe “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turnoff. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMSto receive this information.

Service TPMS Warning


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


If a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds andthen remain on solid. The system fault will also sound achime. In addition, the EVIC will display a SERVICETPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five secondsand then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressurevalue to indicate which sensor is not being received.

If the ignition switch is cycled,providing the system fault stilno longer exists, the “Tire PreLight” will no longer flash,

SYSTEM message will no longer display, and a pressurevalue will display in place of the dashes. A system faultcan occur due to any of the following:

1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or drivingnext to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies asthe TPM sensors.

Vehicles with Full Size Spare

1. The matching full size sparehas a TPM sensor that can b

2. If you install the full size spahas a pressure below the loupon the next ignition switc

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains

materials that may block radio wave signals.3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or

wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

and the “Tire Pressure Mon

turn ON. In addition, the ETIRE PRESSURE” message low tire pressure value flashAn Inflate to XX message w

3. After driving the vehicle fo15 mph (25 km/h) the “Telltale Light” will turn OFwill be updated and stop

original color, as long as nolow-pressure warning limiroad tires.

Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) 3500Series Trucks

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire PressureInformation System (TPIS).

The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses wire-less technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sen-

t t it ti l l S t d t

• Six TPM sensors (Dual Reations)

• Pressure display in the ElectCenter (EVIC)

The TPIS system will display a(SRW) applications) or six (D

li ti ) ti l


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


sors to transmit tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted toeach wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tirepressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check thetire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthlyand to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPIS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module

• Four TPM sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW) applica-tions)

applications) tire pressure valu

If a system fault is detected,SERVICE TPM SYSTEM messseconds and then display dapressure value to indicate wreceived.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,providing the system fault still exists. If the system faultno longer exists, the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM messagewill no longer be displayed, and a pressure value willdisplay in place of the dashes. A system fault can occurdue to any of the following:

• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving

General Information

This device complies with ParRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Ofollowing conditions:


• This device must accept a

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Signal interference due to electronic devices or drivingnext to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as

the TPM sensors.

• Installing aftermarket window tinting that containsmaterials that may block radio wave signals.

• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels orwheel housings.

• Using tire chains on the vehicle.

• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

including interference that

eration.The TPM sensors are regulateding licenses:

United States G

Canada 1

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

3.6L/6.4L Engine

These engines are designed to meet allemissions regulations and provide excel-lent fuel economy and performance whenusing high quality unleaded “regular”gasoline having an octane rating of 87 The

performance. The use of premimended, as it will not providegasoline in these engines.

Light spark knock at low enginyour engine. However, continhigh speeds can cause damagerequired. Poor quality gasoline


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The

use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it willnot provide any benefit over regular gasoline in theseengines.

5.7L Engines

This engine is designed to meet all emis-sions regulations and provide satisfactoryfuel economy and performance when us-ing high quality unleaded gasoline having

an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufac-turer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum

q q y gas hard starting, stalling, and

ence these symptoms, try an before considering service for

Over 40 auto manufacturer’s wendorsed consistent gasoline wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) whnecessary to deliver enhancedand durability for your vehiclemends the use of gasolines th

fications, if they are available.

Reformulated GasolineMany areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-prove air quality.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-

CAUTI

Do not use gasolines containol. Use of these blends madriveability problems and msystem components.

Problems that result from usi

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-vide excellent performance and durability of engine andfuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-ates are required in some areas of the country during thewinter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.

Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used inyour vehicle.

Problems that result from usiE-85 ethanol blends are not manufacturer. While MTBE ismethanol, it does not havemethanol.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fue

Non-FFV vehicles are compatiing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasocontent may void the New Veh

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• operate in a lean mode

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on

• poor engine performance

• poor cold start and cold drivability

MMT In GasolineMMT (Methylcyclopentadienyis a manganese-containing m blended into some gasoline to blended with MMT provides n beyond gasoline of the sameMMT. Gasoline blended with


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• poor cold start and cold drivability

• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once withE-85 perform the following:

• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)

• change the engine oil and oil filter

• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the

engine controller memoryMore extensive repairs will be required for prolongedexposure to E-85 fuel.

life and reduces emissions sys

vehicles. The manufacturer rwithout MMT be used in your of gasoline may not be indicattherefore, you should ask youthe gasoline contains MMT. MMand California reformulated g

Materials Added To Fuel

All gasoline sold in the Unicontain effective detergent addetergents or other additives is

conditions and they would result in additional cost.Therefore, you should not have to add anything to thefuel.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

F ll th id li t i t i hi l ’

CAUTION! (C

• An out-of-tune engine or malfunctions can cause thoverheat. If you notice a psome light smoke, your enor malfunctioning and mayvice. Contact your autho

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s

performance:• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.

Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-mance and damage the emissions control system.

(Continued)

vice. Contact your authoassistance.

• The use of fuel additivessold as octane enhancersMost of these products conof methanol. Fuel system dmance problems resultingfuels or additives is not tmanufacturer.

NOTE: Intentional tampering system can result in civil penalyou.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.Follow the precautions below to prevent carbonmonoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

WARNING! (C

• Guard against carbon montenance. Have the exhausttime the vehicle is raiseconditions repaired prompwith all side windows full


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g ymonoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can

kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such asa garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with theengine running for an extended period. If thevehicle is stopped in an open area with the enginerunning for more than a short period, adjust theventilation system to force fresh, outside air intothe vehicle.

(Continued)

ADDING FUEL

The fuel filler cap (gas cap) ifiller door, on the left side of tdoor and remove the fuel caclockwise.

CAUTI

• Damage to the fuel systesystem could result from tank filler tube cap (gas ca

• A poorly fitting gas cap cthe fuel system.

• A poorly fitting gas cap m

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the captether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.

• A poorly fitting gas cap m

tion Indicator Light (MIL)• To avoid fuel spillage and

off” the fuel tank after nozzle “clicks” or shuts of

WARNI

• Never have any smoking mvehicle when the gas cap i

being filled.

Fuel Filler Cap


• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine isrunning.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into aportable container that is inside of a vehicle. Youcould be burned. Always place gas containers onthe ground while filling.

WARNI

Static electricity can cause aliquid, vapor or gas in anreduce risk of serious injurcontainers:• Always place container on

ing


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g g

NOTE:

• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.This is an indication that the gas cap is tightenedproperly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turnon if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make surethat the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle isrefueled.

•

When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tankis full.

ing.•

Keep the pump nozzle in cwhen you are filling it.• Use only approved contai

uid.• Do not leave container un• A static electric charge cou

hazard.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageIf the vehicle diagnostic system determinesthat the fuel filler cap is loose, improperlyinstalled, or damaged, a loose gascap indicatorwill display in the EVIC telltale display area.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-f ti Ti ht th f l fill l d

This label contains the monthGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GRating (GAWR) front and rear,Number (VIN). A Month-Dayincluded on this label and indiHour of manufacture. The bar bottom of the label is your VI

G V hi l W i h R i

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


formation. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press

the SELECT button to turn off the message. If theproblem continues, the message will appear the next timethe vehicle is started.

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label

affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.

Gross Vehicle Weight Ratin

The GVWR is the total permissincluding driver, passengers, vThe label also specifies maximrear axle systems (GAWR). TotGVWR and front and rear GA

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is def

weight a truck can carry, incdriver, all passengers, options

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the frontand rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargoarea so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in thesystem with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension

Inflation PressureThis is the cold tire inflation prall loading conditions up to fu

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is of the vehicle with all fluids, incapacity conditions and with


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p g , ) pcomponents sometimes specified by purchasers for in-creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-cle’s GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label representsthe actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tiresmust be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire sizelisted.

capacity conditions, and with

loaded into the vehicle. The frvalues are determined by wecommercial scale before anyadded.

Loading

The actual total weight and threar of your vehicle at the grou by weighing it when it is loade

The entire vehicle should first cial scale to insure that the GVW

The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle shouldthen be determined separately to be sure that the load isproperly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either thefront or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load iswithin the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shiftedfrom front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until thespecified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier

CAUTION! (Cparts on your vehicle can brway your vehicle handles. Tlose control. Also overloadinyour vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p gitems down low and be sure that the weight is distributedequally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effecton the way your vehicle steers and handles and the waythe brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR

or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,

(Continued)

In this section you will find saon limits to the type of towinwith your vehicle. Before toreview this information to towand safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Lfollow the requirements and manual concerning vehicles us

Common Towing DefinitionsThe following trailer towing related definitions will assistyou in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongueweight The total load must be limited so that you do not

measure GTW is to put yourvehicle scale. The entire weigsupported by the scale.

Gross Combination Weight

The GCWR is the total permissand trailer when weighed in c

Gross Axle Weight Rating (G


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not

exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/VehicleCertification Label” in “Starting and Operating” forfurther information.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of allcargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded andready for operation condition. The recommended way to

Gross Axle Weight Rating (G

The GAWR is the maximum caaxles. Distribute the load oveevenly. Make sure that you dorear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Ltion Label” in “Starting andinformation.

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximumfront or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving conditioncan result if either rating is exceeded. You could losecontrol of the vehicle and have an accident.

Tongue Weight (TW)

Trailer Sway ControlThe trailer sway control can belink that can be installed betwthe trailer tongue that typicalltion associated with the telescany unwanted trailer swaying

If equipped, the electronic Tr

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on thehitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be lessthan 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this aspart of the load on your vehicle.

Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by themaximum width of the front of a trailer.

recognizes a swaying trailer aindividual wheel brakes and/oattempt to eliminate the trailer

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supweight, just as if it were luggagsome other connecting point oof hitches are the most popula

they are commonly used to towtrailers.

Weight-Distributing HitchA weight-distributing system works by applying lever-age through spring (load) bars. They are typically usedfor heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to thetow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When usedin accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-vides for a more level ride, offering more consistentsteering and brake control thereby enhancing towing

WARNI

• An improperly adjusted wsystem may reduce handlinperformance and could res

• Weight distributing systemwith surge brake couplers.and trailer manufacturer or


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing

safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway controlalso dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds andcontributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (loadequalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier TongueWeights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicleand trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWRrequirements.

Vehicle dealer for addition

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


EXAMPLE — Without Weight-Distributing Hitch(Incorrect)

EXAMPLE — With Weight-Di

Fifth-Wheel HitchThe fifth-wheel hitch is a specoupling that mounts over the in the truck bed. It connects trailer with a coupling king pi

Gooseneck Hitch

The gooseneck hitch employs


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g p y

which attaches to a ball mountruck. The coupling arm connover the rear axle in the truck

EXAMPLE — Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)

Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer WeightThe following chart provides the maximum trailerweight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type cantow and should be used to assist you in selecting thecorrect trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight

Hitch Type Max. Trailer Hitch Max.

Trailer Hitch Type and MaFifth Wheel - 2500/3500 Models

2

Gooseneck - 2500ModelGooseneck - 3500Model

3

Refer to the “Trailer Towin

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


yp

Trailer WeightClass III BumperHitch - 1500 Model

5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)

Class IV - 1500Model

10,450 lbs (4 740 kg)

Class V - 2500/3500Models

17,000 lbs (7 711 kg)

Trailer Weight Ratings)” foTrailer Weight (GTW) towabtrain

All trailer hitches should be pyour vehicle.

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to a 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) without added eqthe standard equipment.

Ram 1500 4x2

ST SLT/Outdoorsman S

3.6L V-6 8–Speed Auto-ti T i i

Standard Towing:5 000 lb (2 268 k )

Standard Towing:5 000 lb (2 268 k )


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


matic Transmission 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)Max Towing: 6,500 lbs (2948 kg)Max Payload: 1,910 lbs(866 kg)

5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)Max Towing: 6,500 lbs (2

948 kg)Max Payload: 1,890 lbs

(857 kg)

5.7L HEMI® V-8 6–SpeedAutomatic Transmission

Standard Towing:5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)

Max Towing: 10,450 lbs(4 740 kg)

Max Payload: 1,730 lbs(785 kg)




M

Ram 1500 4x4ST SLT/Outdoorsman S

3.6L V-6 8–Speed Auto-matic Transmission

Standard Towing:5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)Max Towing: 6,300 lbs (2857 kg)Max Payload: 1,930 lbs(875 kg)

Standard Towing:5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)Max Towing: 6,250 lbs (2834 kg)Max Payload: 1,900 lbs(861 kg)

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


( g) ( g)








M

Ram 2500 And 3500ST SLT/Outdoorsman/Sport L


Max Towing: 10,100 lbs (4581 kg)Max Payload: 1,780 lbs(807 kg)

Max Towing: 12,300 lbs (5579 kg)Max Payload: 3,120 lbs (1415 kg)





8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Automatic Transmission (4 581 kg)


(5 579 kg)

Max Payload: 3,120 lbs (1415 kg)

NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following websiteaddresses:

• http://www.ramtrucks.com

• http://www.ramtruck.ca (Canada)

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60%the front of the trailer. This placon the tow hitch of your vehiclwheels or heavier in the rear ca

severely side to side which wthe vehicle and trailer. Failurefront is the cause of many traile

the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailerhitch. Consider the following itemweight on the rear axle of the

• The tongue weight of the tr

• The weight of any other typut in or on your vehicle

• The weight of the driver an

NOTE: Remember that every

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


y

trailer adds to the load on youfactory-installed options or dea be considered as part of the tRefer to “Tire Safety Informatformation Placard” in “Startinther information.

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-train components the following guidelines are recom-mended:

CAUTION!

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles(805 km) the new vehicle is driven The engine axle

WARNI

Improper towing can lead to guidelines to make your trpossible:

• Make certain that the loadand will not shift during cargo that is not fully secucan occur that may be di


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle

or other parts could be damaged.• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a

trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)and do not make starts at full throttle. This helpsthe engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in atthe heavier loads.

can occur that may be dicontrol. You could lose conhave a collision.

• When hauling cargo or toverload your vehicle or tcause a loss of control, poage to brakes, axle, enginesuspension, chassis structu

WARNING! (Continued)• Safety chains must always be used between your

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains tothe hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross thechains under the trailer tongue and allow enoughslack for turning corners.

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on agrade. When parking, apply the parking brake on

WARNING! (C• Total weight must be distr

vehicle and the trailer suchratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

3 GAWR

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g p g, pp y p g

the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission inPARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make surethe transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,block or chock the trailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.

(Continued)

3. GAWR

4. Trailer tongue weight rautilized.

Towing Requirements – Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compactspare tire.

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safeand satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres

replacement procedures. Reload carrying capacity will GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements – Tra

• Do not interconnect the hvacuum system of your vehThis could cause inadequpersonal injury.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-sures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – GeneralInformation” in “Starting and Operating” for theproper inspection procedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire

p j y

• An electronically actuated required when towing a actuated brakes. When towia hydraulic surge actuated b brake controller is not requ

• Trailer brakes are recomm1,000 lbs (454 kg) and requi

1,653 lbs (750 kg).

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)loaded, it should have its own brakes and theyshould be of adequate capacity. Failure to do thiscould lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higherbrake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING! (C• Towing any trailer will

distance. When towing yotional space between yourin front of you. Failure to accident.

Integrated Trailer Brake Mo

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s

hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brakesystem and cause it to fail. You might not havebrakes when you need them and could have anaccident.

(Continued)

Your vehicle may have an Inteule (ITBM) for Electric and (EOH) trailer brakes.

NOTE: This module has beewith electric trailer brakes andlic systems. Some previous Ecompatible with ITBM.

The user interface consists of t

Manual Brake Control Lever

Slide the manual brake contactivate power to the trailer’s eof the tow vehicle’s brakes. If lever is activated while the bgreater of the two inputs detethe trailer brakes.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The trailer and the vehicle’s bwhen either vehicle braking orapplied.

1 — GAIN Adjustment Button2 — GAIN Adjustment Button3 — Manual Brake Control Lever

Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light

This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.

If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition isturned on, pressing the GAIN adjustment button orsliding the manual brake control lever will display theGAIN setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake StatusIndicator Light” will not be displayed.

GAIN

The GAIN setting is used to sefor the specific towing conditioas towing conditions change. tions include trailer load, vehand weather.

Adjusting GAIN

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the IntegratedTrailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake StatusIndicator Light” will flash.

GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)

Pressing these buttons will adjust the brake controlpower output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. TheGAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 ordecreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).

NOTE: This should only be penvironment at speeds of a(30–40 km/h).

1. Make sure the trailer brakcondition, functioning nor justed. See your trailer deal

2. Hook up the trailer and mtions according to the trailetions.

3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is pluggedin, the trailer connected message should appear in theEVIC (if the connection is not recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be available), the GAINsetting will illuminate and the correct type of trailermust be selected from the EVIC options.

4. Press the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheeluntil “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.

NOTE: 1500 Models Only – Electric will only be available dthe vehicle.

7. Press the RIGHT arrow aDOWN buttons until the pappears on the screen.

8. In a traffic-free environmenlevel surface at a speed of


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


5. Press the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter“TRAILER TOW”.

6. Press the UP or DOWN buttons until Trailer BrakeType appears on the screen.

p

and squeeze the manual pletely.

9. If the trailer wheels lockuptires), reduce the GAIN setturn freely, increase the GA

Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heaviertrailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable evenwith the maximum GAIN setting of 10.

LightElectric

HeavyElectric

LightEOH

HeavyEOH

Type of Trailer

ElectricTrailer

ElectricTrailer

Electricover

Electricover Hy-

EVIC Display Messages

The trailer brake control inteVehicle Information Center (Ealong with a single chime, wmalfunction is determined itrailer brake control, or on the tVehicle Information Center” Instrument Panel” for further

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Brakes Brakes Brakes Hy-draulicTrailerBrakes

y

draulicTrailerBrakes

Load *Under10,000 lbs

*Above10,000 lbs

*Under10,000 lbs

*Above10,000lbs

* The suggested selection depends and may change

depending on the customer preferences for braking per-formance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving androad state may also affect the selection.

CAUTI

Connecting a trailer that is nITBM system may result in rof trailer braking. There maping distance or trailer instabin damage to your vehicle, tr

WARNING!Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with theITBM system may result in reduced or complete lossof trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop-ping distance or trailer instability which could resultin personal injury.

NOTE:

Towing Requirements – Tra

Whenever you pull a trailer, restoplights and turn signals on motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may pin wiring harness. Use a factness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• An aftermarket controller may be available for usewith trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake systems. To determine the type of brakes onyour trailer and the availability of controllers, checkwith your trailer manufacturer or dealer.

• Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it maycause damage to the electrical system and electronic

modules of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring harness.

The electrical connections are but you must mate the harnRefer to the following illustrat

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Four-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

Seven-Pin Co

1 — Battery 52 — Backup Lamps 63 — Right Stop/Turn 7 4 — Electric Brakes

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stoppingand backing the trailer up in an area away from heavytraffic.


The “DRIVE” range can be selected when towing. Thetransmission controls include a drive strategy to avoidfrequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent

When towing a loaded trailespeeds (20 mph [32 km/h] vehicle in first gear (using the avoid transmission overheatin

If you regularly tow a trailer focontinuous operation, then chmission fluid and filter(s) as fleet, or frequent trailer towingSchedule” for the proper main


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


q g g , qshifting does occur while in DRIVE, select “TOW/HAUL” mode or select a lower gear range (using theElectronic Range Select (ERS) switches).

NOTE: Using “TOW/HAUL” mode or selecting a lowergear range (using the ERS switches) while operating thevehicle under heavy loading conditions will improveperformance and extend transmission life by reducing

excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will alsoprovide better engine braking.

Schedule for the proper main

NOTE: Check the automatic before towing (6-speed autom

Tow/Haul Mode

To reduce potential for automaing, turn the “TOW/HAUL” fehilly areas, or select a lowe

Electronic Range Select (ERS) grades.

Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When using the speed control, if you experience speeddrops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage untilyou can get back to cruising speed.

• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads tomaximize fuel efficiency.

Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

Air Suspension System

To aid in attaching/detaching tthe air suspension system caSuspension System” in “Starfurther information.

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-heating, take the following actions:

City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

Highway DrivingReduce speed.

NOTE: The vehicle must remposition while attaching a trathe air suspension system.

SNOWPLOW

1500 Models Only

NOTE: Do not use this modapplications.

WARNING!Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment shouldnot be added to the front end of your vehicle. Theairbag crash sensors may be affected by the change inthe front end structure. The airbags could deployunexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a colli-sion resulting in serious injury or death.

WARNING! (CDo not expect that the airbscribed earlier in this manua

2500/3500 Models Only

Snowplow Prep Packages arinstalled option. These packanecessary to equip your vehicl


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CAUTION!

Using this vehicle for snowplow applications cancause damage to the vehicle.

WARNING!

Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely

affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.

(Continued)

NOTE: Before installation ofrecommended that the owner/the recommendations containeBuilders Guide. See your authsnowplow manufacturer for thunique electrical systems thaproperly assure operator safetyvehicle systems.

WARNING!Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adverselyaffect performance of the airbag system in a collision.Do not expect that the airbag will perform as de-scribed earlier in this manual.

CAUTION!

• Check the runners and cuttin

The cutting edge should becm) above ground in snow

• Check that snowplow lightitioning properly.

Snowplow Prep Package Mo

For Information about snowwww.ramtrucks.com or refer t

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exte-rior lamps are not properly installed.

Before Plowing

• Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluidlevel.

• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight-ness.

ers Guide.

1. The maximum number ofshould not exceed two.

2. The total GVWR or the FGAWR should never be exc

3. Cargo capacity will be redoptions or passengers, etc.

The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow

system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers,options, and cargo, must not exceed either the GrossVehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR)ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Com-pliance Certification Label on the driver’s side dooropening.

NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting pas-sengers.

The blade should be lowered

parked.

Maintain and operate your vehment following the recommenspecific snowplow manufactur

Over The Road Operation WAttached

The blade restricts air flow to t


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g

Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica-tions at the factory without consideration for the weightof the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and resetif necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplowseason. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.

engine to operate at higher thTherefore, when transportingcompletely and position it aconditions permit. Do not exceoperator should always maintaand allow adequate passing cl

Operating Tips

Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)should be maximum operating speed. The operatorshould be familiar with the area and surface to becleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution whenplowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.

General Maintenance

Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the

When plowing snow, to avoid

train damage, the following pserved.

• Operate with transfer case ior congested areas where exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). A4H.

• Vehicles with automatic tra

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


plow manufacturer’s instructions.

Keep all snowplow electrical connections and batteryterminals clean and free of corrosion.

range when plowing deep operiods of time to avoid tra

• Do not shift the transmissireturned to idle and wheepractice of stepping on the bthe transmission.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition Wheels OFFThe Ground

Two-WheelDrive Models

Four-Whee

Flat Tow NONE NOT AL-LOWED

See In• Automatic transm• Manual transmi

NEUTRAL)


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Transfer case in N• Tow in forward d

Dolly Tow Front NOT AL-LOWED

NOT A

Rear OK NOT A

On Trailer ALL OK

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be

lowered to the “Entry/Exit” (lowest) level, and haveautomatic leveling disabled, before tying them down(from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “AirSuspension – If Equipped” for more information. If thevehicle cannot be lowered to the “Entry/Exit” level (forexample, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fas-tened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to followthese instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or

1. Properly secure the dolly to

the dolly manufacturer’s in

2. Drive the rear wheels onto

3. Firmly apply the parking brmission in PARK, manual trNEUTRAL).

4. Properly secure the rear whthe dolly manufacturer’s in

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


cause loss of proper tie-down tension.Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrainwill result.

Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) isallowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle

trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:

5. Turn the ignition switch remove the key fob.

6. Install a suitable clamping ing, to secure the front whee

CAUTION!• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will

cause severe transmission damage. Damage fromimproper towing is not covered under the NewVehicle Limited Warranty.

• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid mayleak from the transmission, causing damage tointernal parts.

Recreational Towing – Fou

NOTE: Both the manual shift fer cases must be shifted intoational towing. Automatic traninto PARK for recreational towmust be placed in gear (NOTational towing. Refer to the transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shvehicle.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CAUTI

• Front or rear wheel lifts mdamage to the transmissioccur if a front or rear wrecreational towing.


• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing thisvehicle backwards can cause severe damage to thetransfer case.

• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARKfor recreational towing.

• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (notin Neutral) for recreational towing.

•

f i l i f h d

CAUTION! (C

• Do not disconnect the rear will leak from the transfer internal parts.

• Do not use a bumper-mouon your vehicle. The budamaged.

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Before recreational towing, perform the procedureoutlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to becertain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-quirements can cause severe transmission and/ortransfer case damage. Damage from improper tow-ing is not covered under the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.

(Continued)

Use the following procedure trecreational towing.

WARNI

You or others could be injurthe vehicle unattended withNEUTRAL (N) position with


the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)position disengages both the front and rear drive-shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicleto move, even if the transmission is in PARK. Theparking brake should always be applied when thedriver is not in the vehicle.

CAUTION!

3. Press and hold the brake pe

4. Depress the clutch pedal on

5.

• With manual shift transfcase lever into NEUTRAL

• With electronic shift transftransfer case NEUTRAL have a small, recessed N

f i h ) h


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CAUTION!It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain thatthe transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) beforerecreational towing to prevent damage to internalparts.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the enginerunning. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

transfer case switches) tha ballpoint pen or similar obrectangular NEUTRAL stransfer case control knobcator light will blink whiThe light will stop blinkinshift to NEUTRAL (N) is ccompleted and the NEU

release the NEUTRAL (N)6. Release the parking brake.

7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manualtransmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there isno vehicle movement.

9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission inDRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.

10. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly applythe parking brake. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles

ith K l E t N G d h ld th EN

12. Turn the ignition switch t

cycle the key or the KeylessRUN position and back to the key fob from the igniti

13. Attach the vehicle to the totow bar.

14. Release the parking brake

NOTE: With electronic shift tr

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


with Keyless Enter-N-Go, press and hold the EN-GINE START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.

11. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manualtransmission in gear (NOT in Neutral). On 8-speedtransmissions the shifter will automatically selectPARK when the engine is turned off.

• Steps 2 through 4 are requiprior to pressing the NEUTRcontinue to be met until theIf any of these requiremepressing the NEUTRAL (Nmet during the shift, the NEwill flash continuously untior until the NEUTRAL (N) b

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position

for a shift to take place and for the position indicatorlights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in theON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and noposition indicator lights will be on or flashing.

• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator lightindicates that shift requirements have not been met.

Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)

U th f ll i d t hi l f

4. Start the engine. Shift the

TRAL. Depress the clutch mission.

• With manual shift transfcase lever to the desired p

• With electronic shift transfswitch, press and hold th(N) button until the NEUturns off. After the NEU

t ff l th NEUT


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle fornormal usage.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-nected to the tow vehicle.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Press and hold the brake pedal.

turns off, release the NEUTNEUTRAL (N) button hascase will shift to the posittor switch.

• With electronic shift transselector switch, press andesired transfer case posi(N) indicator light turns o

indicator light turns on.

NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL

(N), turning the engine OFF is not required, but may behelpful to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed automatictransmission, the engine must remain running, sinceturning the engine OFF will shift the transmission toPARK (and the transmission must be in NEUTRAL forthe transfer case to shift out of NEUTRAL).

5. Turn the engine OFF. Shift automatic transmission intoPARK. On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will auto-

ti ll l t PARK h th i i t d ff

11. Shift the transmission int

pedal (and clutch pedal oand check that the vehicle

NOTE: With electronic shift tr

• Steps 3 and 4 are requiremeto pressing the button to shand must continue to be mcompleted. If any of these before pressing the button o

th hift th NEUTRAL (N

STAR

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


matically select PARK when the engine is turned off.

6. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on a manualtransmission).

7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.

8. Start the engine.

9. Press and hold the brake pedal.

10. Release the parking brake.

the shift, the NEUTRAL (Ncontinuously until all requir button is released.

• The ignition switch must befor a shift to take place andlights to be operable. If the iON/RUN position, the shiftposition indicator lights wi

• A flashing NEUTRAL (N)indicates that shift requirem

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIESCONTENTS

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .607

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .607

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 1500

SERIES TRUCKS 608

▫ Reinstalling The Jack And(1500 Series) . . . . . . . .

▫ Hub Caps/Wheel Covers

▫Wheel Nuts

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


SERIES TRUCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608▫ Jack Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609

▫ Removal Of Jack And Tools (1500 Series) . . . . .609

▫ Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611

▫ Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615

▫ Jack Instructions (1500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . .616

▫ To Stow The Flat Or Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622

Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . JACKING AND TIRE CHA

3500 SERIES TRUCKS . . .

▫ Jack Location. . . . . . . .

▫ Removal Of Jack And To3500 Series). . . . . . . . .

▫ Removing The Spare Ti

▫ Preparations . . . . . . . .

▫ Jack Instructions (2500, 3500 Series) . . . . . . . . .635

▫ To Stow The Flat Or Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641

▫ Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (2500 And3500 Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643

▫ Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped . . . .645

▫ Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646

HOISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649

FREEING A STUCK VEHIC

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKIF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE

▫ Column Shifter — If Equ

▫ Center Console Shifter —

MANUAL PARK RELEASE

TRANSMISSION

606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .650

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652

TRANSMISSION . . . . . .

TOWING A DISABLED V

▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models

▫ Four-Wheel Drive Mod

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on theupper switch bank just below the radio.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warningflasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-

tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncomingtraffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time toturn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEA

In any of the following situapotential for overheating by tak

• On the highways — slow d

• In city traffic — while stoppin NEUTRAL, but do notspeed.

NOTE: There are steps that y

an impending overheat condit

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when yourvehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard forother motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, theHazard Warning flashers will continue to operate eventhough the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashersmay wear down your battery.

an impending overheat condit

• If your air conditioner (A/Csystem adds heat to the enturning the A/C off can hel

• You can also turn the temperheat, the mode control to floto high. This allows the supplement to the radiator from the engine cooling sys

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damageyour vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehiclewith the air conditioner turned off until the pointerdrops back into the normal range. If the pointerremains on HOT (H), and you hear continuouschimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for

service

JACKING AND TIRE CHAN

TRUCKS

WARNI

• Do not attempt to change vehicle close to moving trathe road to avoid the danoperating the jack or chan

• Being under a jacked-up v

vehicle could slip off the j


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


service.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot enginecoolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. Ifyou see or hear steam coming from under the hood,do not open the hood until the radiator has had timeto cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressurecap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

vehicle could slip off the jcould be crushed. Never punder a vehicle that is on aunder a raised vehicle, tawhere it can be raised on

• Never start or run the engon a jack.


• The jack is designed to be used as a tool forchanging tires only. The jack should not be used tolift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicleshould be jacked on a firm level surface only.Avoid ice or slippery areas.

NOTE: To assist with changing a spare tire, the airsuspension system has a feature which allows the auto-

matic leveling to be disabled Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Jack Location

The jack and jack tools arepassenger seat.

Removal Of Jack And Tool

To access the jack and jack toplastic access cover, located passengers seat. To remove theof the cover (closest to the fron

to release a locking tab Once

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


matic leveling to be disabled. Refer to Electronic VehicleInformation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding YourInstrument Panel” for further information.

to release a locking tab. Onceloose, slide the cover toward tis free from the seat frame.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing boltcounterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slidethe assembly out from under the seat.

Release the tool bag straps frtools from bag.

Jack Access Cover Jack And Tools (

WARNING! (C

you may experience abrupt stion or sharp turns. A looseother objects in the vehicle force, resulting in serious in

Removing The Spare Tire

1. Remove the spare tire befor

truck Attach the wheel wrtube with the curved ang

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

After using the jack and tools, always reinstall themin the original carrier and location. While driving

(Continued)

truck. Attach the wheel wrtube with the curved angvehicle. Insert the tube thrtween the lower tailgate anand into the winch mechan

Jack And Tool Bag


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. Rotate the wheel wrenchuntil the spare tire is on the slack to allow you to pull it o

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gainaccess to the spare tire retainer.

4. Lift the spare tire with one tilt the retainer at the end o


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel. NOTE: The winch mechanismthe jack extension tube only. Uspower tools is not recommenwinch.

Preparations

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice orslippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of thevehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough offthe road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

4. Place the shift lever into PA

vehicles, shift the transfer c5. Turn the ignition OFF.

Block both wheel diagoposition. Forwheel is beirear wheel.

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p g j g g

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Set the parking brake.

NOTE: Passengers should nwhen the vehicle is being jack

Jack Instructions (1500 Series)

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings tohelp prevent personal injury or damage to yourvehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from theedge of the roadway as possible before raising thevehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

WARNING! (C

• Do not let anyone sit in thjack.

• Do not get under the vehicyou need to get under a raservice center where it can

• Only use the jack in the polifting this vehicle during

• If working on or near a

careful of motor traffic.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to

be raised.• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic

transmission in PARK; a manual transmission inREVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on ajack.

(Continued)

• To assure that spare tiresecurely stowed, spares mvalve stem facing the grou

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated in the Jacking

3. Placement of the jack:

4x2 Series Trucks Front JackinThere is a jack location indicatolower control arm.

Jack Warning Label

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


J gInstructions for this vehicle.

1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.

2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise oneturn while the wheel is still on the ground.

4X2 Front Jacking Lo

When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack under

the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below.

4x4 Series Trucks Front Jackin

There is a jack location indicatolower control arm.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


4X2 Front Jacking Location

4X4 Front Jacking Lo

When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack

under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below.

4x2 and 4x4 Rear Jacking Loc

Operate the jack using the jackwrench. The tube extension required.

For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, wheassemble the jack drive tube todrive tube to the extension tubaxle between the wheel and thdrive tubes extending to the re

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


4X4 Front Jacking Location

CAUTI

Before raising the wheel offthat the jack will not damageand adjust the jack position

4. By rotating the lug wrench cuntil the wheel just clears th

WARNI

Raising the vehicle higher t


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.

Raising the vehicle higher tthe vehicle unstable and caslip off the jack and hurt sovehicle only enough to remo

Rear Jacking Location

5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install

the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shapedend of the wheel nuts toward the wheel. To avoid therisk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fullytighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has beenlowered.

6. Using the lug wrench, finish tightening the wheel nutsusing a crisscross pattern. The correct wheel nuttightness for a cone type wheel nut is 120–140 ft lbs

(160–190 N·m) torque, for a flanged type wheel nut is130–160 ft lbs (175–215 N·m) torque If in doubt about

WARNI

A loose tire or jack thrown fhard stop could injure somways stow the jack parts andin the places provided.

7. Install the wheel center ca blocks. Do not install chrcenter caps on the spare wh

damage.

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


130 160 ft lbs (175 215 N·m) torque. If in doubt aboutthe correct tightness, have them checked with a torquewrench by your authorized dealer or at a servicestation.

8. Lower the jack to its fully cl jack will not lower by turn by hand, it may be necessaryin order to lower the jack. Sand tools as previously des

9. Adjust the tire pressure wh

NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do

not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.To Stow The Flat Or Spare

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels can-not be stored under the vehicle because the wheelretainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Securethe flat tire in the bed of the truck. Have the flat tirerepaired or replaced immediately.

WARNING!

1. Turn the wheel so that the

ground and toward the reanience in checking the spawheel retainer through the


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hardstop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Havethe deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-ately.


properly across the wheel o

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tubewith the curved angle facing away from the vehicle.Insert the tube through the access hole between thelower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into thewinch mechanism tube.

4. Rotate the lug wrench hawheel is drawn into place agvehicle. Continue to rotatemechanism slip, or click thr be overtightened. Push agaiensure it is firmly in place.

Reinstalling The Jack And

1. Tighten the jack all the wayturn-screw counterclockwis

2. Position the jack and toolwrench is under the jack ne


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use withthe jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or otherpower tools is not recommended and can damage thewinch.

Jack And To

3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holdingthe jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and toolsunder the seat so that the bottom slot engages into thefastener on the floor.

NOTE: Ensure that the jack down location.

5. Turn the wing bolt clockwisReinstall the plastic cover.

Jack And Tools Tied

Jack Hold Dow

WARNING! (C


Hub Caps/Wheel Covers —

The hub caps must be removedoff the ground.

CAUTI


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!


(Continued)

CAUTI

Use a back-and-forth motionDo not use a twisting motioncap, damage to the hub cap f

You must use the flat end of thwheel skins. Insert the flat tip

Jack And Tools (1500 Series)

back-and-forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this

procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. Whenreplacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lugnut bolt circle and strike the high side down with arubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skinsare firmly seated around the wheel.

Wheel Nuts

All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the

especially important during th

kilometers of operation to a become properly set. All wheelseated against the wheel. The wtightened to recommended tnuts to final torque in increm bolt circle, tightening the wheenut just previously tighteneachieved. Recommended torqlowing chart.

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is

TypeNut

StudSize

Hex Size TorqueFt Lbs

Cone M14 x 1.5 22 mm 120-140

Flanged M14 x 1.5 22 mm 130-160

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 2500 AND 3500SERIES TRUCKS

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of thevehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough offthe road to avoid the danger of being hit whenoperating the jack or changing the wheel.

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. Youcould be crushed. Never put any part of your body

WARNING! (C

• The jack is designed to changing tires only. The jalift the vehicle for serviceshould be jacked on a fAvoid ice or slippery area

Jack Location

The jack and jack tools are

passenger seat.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p y p y yunder a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to getunder a raised vehicle, take it to a service centerwhere it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle ison a jack.

(Continued)

Removal Of Jack And Tool

To access the jack and jack toplastic access cover, located passengers seat. To remove theof the cover (closest to the fronto release a locking tab. Once

loose, slide the cover toward tis free from the seat frame.

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing boltcounterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slidethe assembly out from under the seat.

Remove the jack and tools froTurn the jack-turn-screw countfrom bracket assembly.

Jack Access Cover Jack And Tools (25

WARNING! (C


Removing The Spare Tire

1. Remove the spare tire befortruck. Attach the wheel wr

tube with the curved angvehicle Insert the tube thr


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!


(Continued)

vehicle. Insert the tube thrtween the lower tailgate anand into the winch mechan

Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2. Rotate the wheel wrenchuntil the spare tire is on the slack to allow you to pull it o


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gainaccess to the spare tire retainer.


WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel. NOTE: The winch mechanismthe jack extension tube only. Uspower tools is not recommenwinch.

Preparations

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice orslippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of thevehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough offthe road to avoid the danger of being hit whenoperating the jack or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

4. Place the shift lever into PAvehicles, shift the transfer c

5. Turn the ignition OFF.

Block both wheel diagoposition. Forwheel is beirear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should n


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g

3. Set the parking brake.

gwhen the vehicle is being jack

Jack Instructions (2500, 3500 Series)

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings tohelp prevent personal injury or damage to yourvehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from theedge of the roadway as possible before raising thevehicle.

•

Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to

b i d

WARNING! (C

• Do not let anyone sit in thjack.

• Do not get under the vehicyou need to get under a raservice center where it can

• Only use the jack in the polifting this vehicle during

• If working on or near a

careful of motor traffic.• To assure that spare tire

l d

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


be raised.• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic

transmission in PARK; a manual transmission inREVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on ajack.

(Continued)

securely stowed, spares mvalve stem facing the grou

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated in the JackingInstructions for this vehicle.

3. Placement of the jack:

4x2 Series Trucks Front JackinFor 2500 and 3500 4x2 series front wheel, place the bottle behind the wheel. Locate thpossible on the straight part o

Operate the jack using the jackwrench. The tube extension,required.

Jack Warning Label


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.

2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, thewheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise oneturn while the wheel is still on the ground.

4x4 Series Trucks Front Jackin

For 2500 and 3500 4x4 series tfront wheel, assemble the jackconnect the drive tube to the jack under the axle as close to tdrive tubes extending to the frextension and wheel wrench.

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


4x2 Front Jacking Location

4x2 and 4x4 Rear Jacking Loc

For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, wheassemble the jack drive tube todrive tube to the extension tubaxle between the spring and thdrive tubes extending to the re

4 4 F J ki L i


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


4x4 Front Jacking Location

Rear Jacking Lo

Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.

CAUTION!

Before raising the wheel off the ground, make surethat the jack will not damage surrounding truck partsand adjust the jack position as required.

NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning thedial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to usethe jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.

4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise thehi l il h h l j l h f

WARNI

Raising the vehicle higher tthe vehicle unstable and caslip off the jack and hurt sovehicle only enough to remo

5. Remove the wheel nuts ansingle rear-wheel (SRW) truand wheel nuts with the con

nuts toward the wheel. Omodels (DRW) the wheel nubl ith fl t f Li htl

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface. bly with a flat face. Lightly avoid the risk of forcing the fully tighten the wheel nutslowered.

6. Using the lug wrench, finish tightening the wheel nutsusing a crisscross pattern. The correct wheel nut

tightness for a cone type wheel nut is 120–140 ft lbs(160–190 N·m) torque, for a flanged type wheel nut is130–160 ft lbs (175–215 N·m) torque. If in doubt aboutthe correct tightness, have them checked with a torquewrench by your authorized dealer or at a servicestation.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision orhard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al-

7. Install the wheel center ca blocks. Do not install chr

center caps on the spare whdamage.

8. Lower the jack to its fully cl jack will not lower by turn by hand, it may be necessaryin order to lower the jack. Sand tools as previously des

9. Adjust the tire pressure wh

NOTE: Do not oil wheel stud


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheelin the places provided.

NOTE: Do not oil wheel studnot substitute with chrome pla

To Stow The Flat Or Spare

NOTE: Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immedi-ately.

WARNING!

A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hardstop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Havethe deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-ately.

1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing thed d t d th f th hi l f 2 Lift the spare tire with one

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for conve-nience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide thewheel retainer through the center of the wheel.

2. Lift the spare tire with one tilt the retainer at the end oproperly across the wheel o

3 Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube 4 Rotate the lug wrench ha


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tubewith the curved angle facing away from the vehicle.Insert the tube through the access hole between thelower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into thewinch mechanism tube.

4. Rotate the lug wrench hawheel is drawn into place agvehicle. Continue to rotatemechanism slip, or click thr be overtightened. Push agaiensure it is firmly in place.

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with

Reinstalling The Jack And Series)

1. Tighten the jack all the wayturn-screw counterclockwis

2. Position the jack and tooMake sure the lug wrench jack turn-screw. Snap tools iInstall the jack into bracke jack-turn-screw clockwise

bracket assembly.

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use withthe jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or otherpower tools is not recommended and can damage thewinch.

Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly Jack Hold Dow


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the storageposition holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slipthe jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slotengages into the fastener on the floor.

NOTE: Ensure that the jack aslides into the front hold down

4. Turn the wing bolt clockwisReinstall the plastic cover.

Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly Jack Hold Dow

Hub Caps/Wheel Covers —

The hub caps must be removedoff the ground.

CAUTI

Use extreme caution when rear center caps. Damage canand/or the wheel if screwdrivpulling motion, not a pry

mended to remove the caps.

For single rear wheel (SRW) mJack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


For single rear wheel (SRW) mend of the lug wrench to pry t blade end into the pry off notchhub cap with a back and forth

Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)

On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you mustfirst remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a

hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of therear hub caps. Position the hook and pull out on theratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheelskins can now be removed. For the front hub cap onmodels use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to prythe caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed.

CAUTION!

• Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap.Do not use a twisting motion when removing the

You must use the flat end of thwheel skins. Insert the flat tip

back and forth motion, loosen procedure around the tire unt

Replace the wheel skins first usreplacing the hub caps, tilt thenut bolt circle and strike therubber mallet. Be sure that theare firmly seated around the w

Wheel NutsAll wheel nuts should be tighte

t th ibilit f h l


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g ghub cap, damage to the hub cap; finish may occur.

• The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has twopry off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jackhandle driver is located squarely in the cap notchbefore attempting to pull off.

nate the possibility of wheel s bolt holes in the wheels becespecially important during thkilometers of operation to a become properly set. All wheelseated against the wheel. The w

tightened to recommended t

nuts to final torque in increments. Progress around the bolt circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel

nut just previously tightened until final torque is

achieved. Recommended torqlowing chart.

TypeNut

StudSize

Hex Size TorqueFt Lbs

Cone M14 x 1.5 22 mm 120-140

Flanged M14 x 1.5 22 mm 130-160

8-Stud — Dual Rear WheelsDual wheels are flat-mounted and center-piloted. The lugnuts are a two piece assembly When the tires are being

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are beingrotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add twodrops of oil at the interface between the hex and thewasher.

Dual wheel models require a stightening adapter (included

rectly tighten the lug nuts. Alsremove and install dual rear wlifting device.

NOTE: When installing a sparwheel end combination, the individual tires must be compadifference, the larger tire shoulocation. The correct direction

installations must also be obse

Oiling Location


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting theinner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assem- bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on theinner wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must becompletely off the ground when tightening, to ensurewheel centering and maximum wheel clamping.

g

These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows: 2. Retighten the wheel nuts intorques listed in the table. G

second time to verify thatachieved. Retighten to sp(160 km) and after 500 mile

It is recommended that wheel to specifications at all times. Tspecifications at each lubricati

HOISTING

A conventional floor jack malocations. Refer to the graphic

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


1. Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to asnug fit.

tions. However, a floor jack or used on any other parts of the

Tightening Pattern

CAUTION!

Never use a floor jack directly under the differentialhousing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehiclemay result.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery inanother vehicle or by using a portable battery boosterpack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperlyso please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

CAUTI

Do not use a portable batteother booster source with athan 12 Volts or damage to thalternator or electrical system

WARNI

Do not attempt jump-starting

It could rupture or explode an

Preparations For Jump-Sta


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE: When using a portable battery booster packfollow the manufacturer’s operating instructions andprecautions.

The battery in your vehicle is engine compartment, behind th

NOTE: The positive battery protective cap. Lift up on thepositive battery post.

WARNI

• Take care to avoid the radever the hood is raised. Iignition switch is ON. Ymoving fan blades.

• Remove any metal jewelbands and bracelets that coelectrical contact. You coul

• Batteries contain sulfuric

skin or eyes and generateflammable and explosivesparks away from the battPositive Battery Post

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p y

1. Set the parking brake, shift tinto PARK and turn the ign

2. Turn off the heater, radio, acal accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, parkthe vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the

parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as thiscould establish a ground connection and personalinjury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

CAUTI

Failure to follow these prodamage to the charging systeor the discharged vehicle.

1. Connect the positive (+) endpositive (+) post of the disc

2. Connect the opposite end ocable to the positive (+) pos

3. Connect the negative end (-)negative (-) post of the boos


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-plosion.

4. Connect the opposite end ocable to a good engine grouthe discharged vehicle’s engand the fuel injection system

WARNING!

Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of thedischarged battery. The resulting electrical sparkcould cause the battery to explode and could result inpersonal injury.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and thenstart the engine in the vehicle with the discharged

battery.Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables inthe reverse sequence:

8. Disconnect the opposite endcable from the positive (+) p

9. Disconnect the positive (+from the positive (+) post o

If frequent jump-starting is reqyou should have the battery spected at your authorized de

CAUTI

Accessories plugged into thdraw power from the vehiclein use (i e cellular phon

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


q

6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from theengine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable

from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

in use (i.e., cellular phonplugged in long enough withe vehicle’s battery will ddegrade battery life and/or pstarting.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, itcan often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn thesteering wheel right and left to clear the area around thefront wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVEand REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gearand REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gentlypressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accel-erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rockingmotion, without spinning the wheels or racing the en-

gine.

NOTE: For trucks equipped with 8-speed automatici i Shif b DRIVE d REVERSE

CAUTI

Racing the engine or spinnintransmission overheating angine to idle with the transmisleast one minute after evecycles. This will minimize the risk of transmission faefforts to free a stuck vehicl

NOTE: Press the

ESC Off swStability Control (ESC) syste

before rocking the vehicle. RC l” i “S i A d O


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


transmission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE canonly be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) orless. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRALfor more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedalto engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

Control” in “Starting And Opmation. Once the vehicle has bOff switch again to restore E

CAUTION!

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spinthe wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-train damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fastmay lead to transmission overheating and failure.It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheelsabove 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-

mission shifting occurring).

WARNING!

WARNING! (C

explode and injure someonecle’s wheels faster than 30longer than 30 seconds conping when you are stuck anda spinning wheel, no matter

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS

Your vehicle may be equipp

hooks.NOTE: For off-road recovery,both of the front tow hooks

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, oreven failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could

(Continued)

both of the front tow hooksdamage to the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.

• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with towhooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-ing serious injury.

CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue avehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks fortow truck hookup or highway towing. You couldd h l

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE

If a malfunction occurs and moved out of the PARK positifollowing procedures to tempo

Column Shifter — If Equipp

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Firmly apply the parking b

3. Tilt the steering wheel to th

4. Press and maintain firm pre

5. Insert a screwdriver or simil


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


damage your vehicle. (ringed circle) on the bottoand push and hold the over

6 M th hift l t th NEUTRAL iti

Center Console Shifter — I

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Firmly apply the parking b

3. Using a small screwdriver oshift lever override access cothe shift lever).

4. Press and maintain firm pre

5. Insert the screwdriver or si

hole, and push and hold tdown.Shift Lever Override Access Port

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.

7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

6 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position

MANUAL PARK RELEASE TRANSMISSION

WARNI

Always secure your vehicleparking brake, before activRelease. Activating the Maallow your vehicle to roll awthe parking brake or by provehicle. Activating the Man

unsecured vehicle could ledeath for those in or aroundShift Lever Override Access Cover


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.

7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.

In order to push or tow the vtransmission will not shift out battery), a Manual Park Relea

Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:

2. Using a small screwdriver oManual Park Release access

the parking brake release haof the steering column.

3. Using the screwdriver orManual Park Release lever lmiddle of the lever) to the r

4. While holding the lockinposition, pull the tether

rearward, until it locks in pdriver’s seat. Release the lothe Manual Park Release levposition

Manual Park Release Pull Strap

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

position.

5. The vehicle is now out of PRelease the parking brake securely connected to a tow

To Reset The Manual Park Release:

1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.

2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to itsoriginal position, until the locking tab snaps into placeto secure the lever.

3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the leveris locked in its stowed position.

4. Re-install the access cover.

TOWING A DISABLED VEH

This section describes procedu

vehicle using a commercial wrmission and drivetrain are opmay also be towed as descrTowing” in the “Starting and O

NOTE: Vehicles equipped wilowered , and placed in tranthem down (from the body) onRefer to Air Suspension in Smore information. If the vehicltransport mode (for example,downs must be fastened to th


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


downs must be fastened to thFailure to follow these instructto be set and/or cause loss of p

TowingCondition

WheelsOFF the

Ground

2WD Models 4W

Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:• Transmission in NEUTRAL• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed• 15 miles (24 km) max distance (6–speed transmission)• 30 miles (48 km) max distance (8–speed transmission)

See instructioning” under “St• Automatic Tr• Manual TranNEUTRAL)• Transfer Cas• Tow in forwa

Wheel Liftor Dolly

Tow

Front NO

Rear OK NO

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BES

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to preventdamage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and otherequipment designed for this purpose, following equip-

ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is

mandatory. Attach a tow bar main structural members of thor associated brackets. State

vehicles under tow must be ob

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN

position, not the ACC position.If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery isdischarged, see ”Manual Park Release” or “Shift LeverOverride” in this section for instructions on shifting theautomatic transmission out of PARK for towing.

CAUTION!

Do not use sling type equipment when towing.When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do notattach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-age to your vehicle may result from improper towing

If flatbed equipment is not avsion is operable, this vehicle

wheels on the ground) under • The transmission must be in

• The towing speed must not

• The towing distance must nfor 6-speed transmission, 8-speed transmission.

If the transmission is not operatowed faster than 30 mph (48miles (24 km), for 6-speed t(48 km) for 8-speed transmi


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.

Two-Wheel Drive Models

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle withall four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

(48 km) for 8 speed transmiwheels OFF the ground. Accepthe vehicle on a flatbed, or wiand the rear wheels on a towinsuitable steering wheel stabiliz

in the straight position) with the rear wheels raised andthe front wheels on the ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-ments can cause severe engine and/or transmissiondamage. Damage from improper towing is not cov-ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Four-Wheel Drive Models

The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheelsOFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow thevehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and

the transfer case is in NEUTRsion is in PARK (for automatic

(NOT in Neutral, for manua“Recreational Towing” in “Stadetailed instructions.

CAUTI

• Front or rear wheel lifts mdamage to the transmissioccur if a front or rear w

towing.• Towing this vehicle in vi

quirements can cause sev

WHAT TO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the opposite end on a towing dolly.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfercase is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in theforward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF

transfer case damage. Daming is not covered under thWarranty.

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .668



ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .671

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .671

EMISSIONS INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 672

MAINTENANCE PROCED

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . .

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filte

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery

▫ Air Conditioner Mainten

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .672

REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673

DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673

▫ Front Driveshaft Lubricat(Four-Wheel Drive) ModOnly) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683

▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694

▫ Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle FluidLevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696

▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698

FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ POWER DISTRIBUTION

VEHICLE STORAGE . . .

REPLACEMENT BULBS

BULB REPLACEMENT . .

▫ Base Quad / Premium BiBeam Headlamp, High BFront Park And Turn – If

▫ Fog Lamps – If Equipped

▫ Rear Tail/Stop, Turn SignLamps

666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


▫ Appearance Care And Protection FromCorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702

Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Center High-Mounted StWith Cargo Lamp . . . . .

▫ Cab Top Clearance Lamps – If Equipped . . . .729

▫ Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear

Wheels) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730

▫ Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) —If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .731

FLUID CAPACITIES . . .

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AN

PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . .

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Battery


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


y2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir3 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fus4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir


1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (6-Speed Trans Only) 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fus3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir6 — Battery


1 — Coolant Pressure Bottle 6 — Battery


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


y2 — Transmission Dipstick 7 — Power Distribution Center (PDC3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Solvent4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Air Cleaner Filter

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard

diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitorsthe performance of the emissions, engine, and automatictransmission control systems. When these systems areoperating properly, your vehicle will provide excellentperformance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-sions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II systemwill turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It

will also store diagnostic codes and other information toassist your service technician in making repairs. Al-though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not

d t i th i d d l f i

CAUTI

•

Prolonged driving with tfurther damage to the emicould also affect fuel econovehicle must be serviced becan be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing, whisevere catalytic converter will soon occur. Immediat

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Mess

If the vehicle diagnthat the fuel filler

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


need towing, see your authorized dealer for service assoon as possible.

installed, or damagewill display in the E

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Inf“Understanding Your Instrumformation. Tighten the fuel fill

the SELECT button to turn off the message. If theproblem continues, the message will appear the next time

the vehicle is started.A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler capmay also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCEPROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to passan inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

d h ( ) f d

Normally, the OBD II system system may not be ready if y

serviced, recently had a dead bment. If the OBD II system sready for the I/M test, your v

Your vehicle has a simple iwhich you can use prior to gocheck if your vehicle’s OBD II do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to

not crank or start the engin

2. If you crank or start the engthis test over.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is noton when the engine is running, and that the OBD IIsystem is ready for testing.

this test over.

3. As soon as you cycle the iposition, you will see the Mof a normal bulb check.

4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things willhappen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and thenreturn to being fully illuminated until you turn OFFthe ignition or start the engine. This means that yourvehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you shouldnot proceed to the I/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fullyilluminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start theengine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system

is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see yourauthorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was

Regardless of whether your vready or not, if the MIL is ill

vehicle operation you should h before going to the I/M stationyour vehicle because the MIrunning.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR® pamaintenance and repairs is hisure the designed performacaused by the use of non-MOnance and repairs will not be coLimited Warranty.

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p y yrecently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,you may need to do nothing more than drive yourvehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD IIsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routinemay then indicate that the system is now ready.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has thnel, special tools, and equipmoperations in an expert man

available which include detailed service information foryour vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before

attempting any procedure yourself.NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems may void your warranty and could result in civilpenalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around amotor vehicle. Only do service work for which youhave the knowledge and the proper equipment. Ifyou have any doubt about your ability to perform aservice job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

h i

MAINTENANCE PROCEDU

The pages that follow contain

services determined by the engvehicle.

Besides those maintenance itemaintenance schedule, there armay require servicing or repla

CAUTI

• Failure to properly maintform repairs and serviceresult in more costly recomponents or negatively


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


chanic.components or negativelymance. Immediately haveexamined by an authorizrepair center.


• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids

that protect the performance and durability of yourvehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,transmission, power steering or air conditioning.Such damage is not covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty. If a flush is needed because ofcomponent malfunction, use only the specified

fluid for the flushing procedure.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

The best time to check the engminutes after a fully warmed

Checking the oil while the vehimprove the accuracy of the omaintain the oil level withindipstick. Adding one quart ofthe bottom of the SAFE zone wtop of the safe zone on these e

CAUTI

Overfilling or underfilling toil aeration or loss of oil presyour engine.

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Checking Oil Level

To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, theengine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Checkthe oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.

Change Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-tion.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelvemonths, whichever occurs first.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection under alltypes of operating conditions, the manufacturer onlyrecommends engine oils that are API Certified and meetthe requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395

American Petroleum InstituIdentification Symbol

This sym been cePetroleumanufaAPI Cer

CAUTI

Do not use chemical flushes


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395. Do not use chemical flushes chemicals can damage your not covered by the New Veh

Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L/5.7L Engines (1500Models Only)

MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem-peratures. This engine oil improves low temperaturestarting and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommendedengine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information onengine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion.

NOTE: SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Fiat9.55535-S1 or Fiat 9.55535-S3 may be used when SAE

Engine Oil Viscosity – 5.7L Models Only)

MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oior Shell Helix® is recommendperatures. This engine oil imstarting and vehicle fuel econcap also shows the recommendyour engine. For informationlocation, refer to “Engine CompYour Vehicle” for further infor

NOTE: Vehicles equipped wiSAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do soperation of the Multi-Displacfer to “Multi-Displacement S

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.fer to Multi Displacement SOperating” for further informa

Lubricants which do not havefication mark and the correct S ber should not be used.

NOTE: For 2500/3500 trucks with a 5.7L engine operat-ing under a gross combined weight rating of 14,000 lbs (6350 kg) or greater, SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommendedfor all operating temperatures.

Engine Oil Viscosity – 6.4L Engine

Use Pennzoil UltraTM 0W40 engine or equivalentMOPAR oil meeting the Chrysler Material StandardMS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information onengine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-partment” in this section.

Synthetic Engine Oils

Disposing Of Used Engine

Care should be taken in dispos

oil filters from your vehicle.indiscriminately discarded, canenvironment. Contact your astation or governmental agenwhere used oil and oil filters cyour area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

Thi m f t ’ i


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changesare followed.

This manufacturer’s engines filter. Use a filter of this type foof replacement filters varies

quality filters should be used to assure most efficientservice. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oilfilter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the propermaintenance intervals.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can

provide a measure of protection in the case of enginebackfire. Do not remove the air induction system (aircleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessaryfor repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Se

The quality of replacement

varies considerably. Only highused to assure most efficient secleaner filters are a high quamended.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with aYou will never have to add wtenance required.

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


near the engine compartment before starting thevehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result inserious personal injury.

WARNING!

•

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and canburn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluidto contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not leanover a battery when attaching clamps. If acidsplashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-diately with large amounts of water. Refer to“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do InEmergencies” for further information.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not usea booster battery or any other booster source withan output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cableclamps to touch each other

CAUTI

•

It is essential when replabattery that the positive positive post and the negathe negative post. Battery p(+) and negative (-) andbattery case. Cable clampterminal posts and free of

• If a “fast charger” is used wvehicle, disconnect both v

fore connecting the chargeuse a “fast charger” to pro


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


clamps to touch each other.• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash handsafter handling.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner

should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealerat the start of each warm season. This service shouldinclude cleaning of the condenser fins and a performancetest. Drive belt tension should also be checked at thistime.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning

system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-tioning components. Such damage is not covered bythe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNI

• Use only refrigerants andapproved by the manufactioning system. Some unaflammable and can explounapproved refrigerants orsystem to fail, requiring Warranty Information Boofor further warranty inform

• The air conditioning syst

under high pressure. To injury or damage to the syor any repair requiring lishould be done by an expe

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


should be done by an expe

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-

carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the EnvironmentalProtection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioningservice be performed by authorized dealer or otherservice facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C systemsealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressoroil, and refrigerants.

Front Driveshaft Lubrication – 2500/3500(Four-Wheel Drive) Models (Ram Trucks Only)

Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot poin

seat tracks, door hinge pivot ptailgate, sliding doors and hoocated periodically with a lithiMOPAR® Spray White Lube ttion and to protect against ruapplication of any lubricant, th be wiped clean to remove dustexcess oil and grease shouldattention should also be givennents to ensure proper functiounderhood services, the hoodand safety catch should be cle


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


change. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for theproper maintenance intervals. Use MOPAR® Type MS-6560 (lithium-based grease), or equivalent.

The external lock cylinders shyear, preferably in the Fall anamount of a high quality lubLock Cylinder Lubricant direc

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the

windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and amild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-tions of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periodsmay cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always usewasher fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirtfrom a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice fromthe windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact withpetroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-h l d f f P

Adding Washer Fluid

The fluid reservoir is located u

be checked for fluid level at reservoir with windshield wadiator antifreeze). When refillivoir, take some washer fluid towel and wipe the wiper bla blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your win cold weather, select a solutio

exceeds the temperature ranrating information can be foucontainers.

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poorperformance of blades may be present with chattering,marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditionsare present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-sary.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solventsare flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Caremust be exercised when filling or working aroundthe washer solution.

After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster fora few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing orfreezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshieldwasher solution used with water as directed on the

container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing pointto avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.

Exhaust System

The best protection against ca

the vehicle body is a properly msystem.

If you notice a change in the soor if the exhaust fumes can be dor when the underside or rear have an authorized technicianhaust system and adjacent boaged, deteriorated, or misposi

or loose connections could perinto the passenger compartmexhaust system inspected eachfor lubrication or oil change. R


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They containcarbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless andodorless. Breathing it can make you unconsciousand can eventually poison you. To avoid breathingCO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “ThingsTo Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation.

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you parkover materials that can burn. Such materials might

be grass or leaves coming into contact with yourexhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-tact anything that can burn.

CAUTI

• The catalytic converter rleaded fuel only. Leaded geffectiveness of the catalysdevice and may seriouslymance and cause serious d

• Damage to the catalytic convehicle is not kept in propIn the event of engine minvolving engine misfire o

performance, have your veContinued operation of yomalfunction could cause thresulting in possible dam

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


y g g pvehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assureproper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalystdamage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions controlsystems can result in civil penalties being assessedagainst you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioningengine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe

and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stopthe vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-tions, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibilitydamage:

•

Do not shut off the engine when the transmission is inmotion.

• Do not try to start the enginevehicle.

• Do not idle the engine widisconnected or removed, testing, or for prolonged p

idle or malfunctioning oper


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Cooling System

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot enginecoolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. Ifyou see or hear steam coming from under the hood,do not open the hood until the radiator has had timeto cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressurecap when the radiator is hot.

Engine Coolant Checks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12months (before the onset of freezing weather, whereapplicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or

t i th t h ld b d i d

spraying water from a gardenface of the A/C condenser (if eradiator core.

Check the engine cooling systecracking , tears, cuts and tighthe coolant recovery bottle aentire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal opnot running), check the coolinproper vacuum sealing by dr

engine coolant (antifreeze) froThe radiator drain cock is loctank. If the cap is sealing pro(antifreeze) will begin to drain

b l O O O

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for anyaccumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently

sion bottle. DO NOT REMOVSURE CAP WHEN THE COO

Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a

considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with areliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thoroughrinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properlydispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).


Selection Of Coolant

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTI

• Mixing of engine coolantspecified Organic Additivgine coolant (antifreeze),damage and may decreasOrganic Additive Technolant is different and shouHybrid Organic Additive Tgine coolant (antifreeze) oible” coolant (antifreeze)

coolant (antifreeze) is intrsystem in an emergency, need to be drained, flushedOAT coolant (conforming


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


authorized dealer as soon


• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additionalrust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may notbe compatible with the radiator engine coolant andmay plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use withpropylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-tifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved enginecoolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that

ll t d d m i t i t l Thi i l

you use the same engine coolaing to MS-12106) throughout t

Please review these recommenAdditive Technology (OAT) ethat meets the requirements odard MS-12106. When adding e

• We recommend using MOP10 Year/150,000 Mile FormuTechnology) that meets theMaterial Standard MS-12106

• Mix a minimum solution ofthat meets the requirementsdard MS-12106 and distilledtrations (not to exceed 70%

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that

(−34° F (−37° C) are anticipa

• Use only high purity water ized water when mixing t

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality waterwill reduce the amount of corrosion protection in theengine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-cording to the temperatures occurring in the area wherethe vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is notrecommended and can result in cooling system damage.If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,

have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OATcoolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as possible.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine

The cap should be inspected aaccumulation of foreign mater

WARNI

• The warning words “DO Ncooling system pressure caNever add engine coolanengine is overheated. Do ncap to cool an overheatepressure to build up in

prevent scalding or injupressure cap while the spressure.

• Do not use a pressure cspecified for your vehicle


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of enginecoolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolantexpansion bottle.

specified for your vehiclegine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is

a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Checkwith your local authorities to determine the disposalrules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-basedengine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow itto remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a childor pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean upany ground spills immediately.

Checking Coolant Level – 3.6L and 5.7L EnginesWith the engine OFF and cold, the level of the enginecoolant should be between the MIN and MAX range onthe dipstick.

To check the coolant level:

1. Open the coolant reservoir.

2. Lift and remove the plastic

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


pneck.

3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there isno need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for

When additional engine coolanmaintain the proper level, itcoolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Checking Coolant Level – 6

The level of the coolant in the should be between the “MIN” bottle when the engine is cold

The radiator normally remainsno need to remove the cap unfreeze point or replacing en

Advise your service attendanengine operating temperature bottle need only be checked otional engine coolant (antifreethe proper level it should be a


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing enginecoolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this.As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

the proper level, it should be aDo not overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/

kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor comingfrom the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or highhumidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot enginecoolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows noevidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be

safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and inthe coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-

• If frequent engine coolant required, the cooling systemfor leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antminimum of 50% OAT coo12106) and distilled water fotion of your engine which conents.

• Make sure that the coolant hoses are not kinked or obs

•

Keep the front of the radiatequipped with air conditioncondenser clean.

• Do not change the thermosoperation If replacement

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p g (freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolantexpansion bottle must also be protected againstfreezing.

operation. If replacement ONLY the correct type thermresult in unsatisfactory enperformance, poor gas emissions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake

system components should be inspected periodically.Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the propermaintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure andpossibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting orriding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally

high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, andpossible brake damage. You would not have your fullbraking capacity in an emergency.

Brake Fluid Level Check

The fluid level of the master cy

when performing under the hoif the brake system warningfailure.

The brake master cylinder hreservoir. On the outboard side“MAX” dot and an “MIN” dokept within these two dots. DMAX mark because leakage m

With disc brakes the fluid levethe brake linings wear. Howevfluid level may be caused by ashould be conducted.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Use only the manufacturer’s rRefer to “Fluids, Lubricants,“Maintaining Your Vehicle” fo

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake

fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for furtherinformation. Using the wrong type of brake fluidcan severely damage your brake system and/orimpair its performance. The proper type of brakefluid for your vehicle is also identified on theoriginal factory installed hydraulic master cylinderreservoir.

(Continued)

WARNING! (C

• To avoid contamination

moisture, use only new brabeen in a tightly closed concylinder reservoir cap secfluid in a open container abair resulting in a lower bcause it to boil unexpectelonged braking, resulting This could result in a colli

•

Overfilling the brake fluispilling brake fluid on hothe brake fluid to catch fidamage painted and vinyl taken to avoid its contact w

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM



• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate

the brake fluid. Brake seal components could bedamaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.This could result in a collision.

Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level

For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are notrequired. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasonsthe exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be

inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect thefluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-tion. This inspection should be made with the vehicle ina level position.

For 1500 Model axles, the fluidthe bottom of the fill hole (withof hole) for the FDU215 HD fr

axle.

For all 2500/3500 Model axles1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mthe 9.25 in front and 3/4 in ± 1/10.5 in rear axles. The 11.5 in rein ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm

Drain And Refill

Refer to the “Maintenance Smaintenance intervals.

Lubricant Selection

Refer to “Fluids Lubricants


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p Refer to Fluids, Lubricants,“Maintaining Your Vehicle” fo

NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant willresult in corrosion and possible failure of differentialcomponents. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be

encountered in some off-highway types of service, willrequire draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.

Limited-Slip Differentials

1500 Model rear axles equipped with a Limited SlipDifferential require that 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR® LimitedSlip Additive be added to the gear lubricant. Refer to“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining

Your Vehicle” for further information. The MOPAR®Limited Slip Additive should be added to the gearlubricant whenever a fluid change is made to an axleequipped with a Limited Slip Differential.

2500/3500 M d l l DO NOT REQUIRE li it d

NOTE: When refilling an axle ential, (which requires a LimLimited Slip Additive should

lubricant is added to insure pr

Transfer Case

Drain And Refill

Refer to the “Maintenance Smaintenance intervals.

Lubricant Selection

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants,“Maintaining Your Vehicle” fo

Fluid Level Check

This fluid level can be checke

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2500/3500 Model axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limitedslip oil additive (friction modifiers).

This fluid level can be checkeplug. The fluid level should befiller plug hole with the vehic


Selection Of Lubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid toensure optimum transmission performance and life. Useonly the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Referto “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this sectionfor fluid specifications. It is important to maintain thetransmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-mended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in anytransmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-turer’s recommended fluid may cause deteriorationi t i i hift lit d/ t t

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly reany special additives in theTransmission Fluid (ATF) is aits performance may be impairtives. Therefore, do not add atransmission. The only exceptiof special dyes for diagnosingtransmission sealers as they m

CAUTI

Do not use chemical flushesthe chemicals can damage yonents. Such damage is noVehicle Limited Warranty.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


in transmission shift quality and/or torque convertershudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts” in this section for fluid specifications.

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid Level Check – Eight-Speed Transmission

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does notrequire adjustment under normal operating conditions.Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore thetransmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer cancheck your transmission fluid level using special servicetools.

If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,visit your authorized dealer immediately to have thetransmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle

with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-sion damage.

CAUTI

• If a transmission fluid lea

thorized dealer immediatedamage may occur. Your aproper tools to adjust the

Fluid Level Check – Six-Spe

It is best to check the fluid leveat normal operating temperatuThis normally occurs after at

driving. At normal operating tnot be held comfortably betweread the transmission sump display (refer to “Electronic V[EVIC]” for further informatio

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


[EVIC] for further informatio

Use the following procedure to check the transmissionfluid level properly:

1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the EVICdisplay, and operate the vehicle as required to reachthe normal operating temperature.

2. Park the vehicle on level ground.

3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this procedure.

4. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brakepedal.

5. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi-tion (allowing time for the transmission to fully en-gage in each position) ending with the transmission in

6. Remove the dipstick, wipe iseated.

7. Remove the dipstick again a both sides. The fluid level reis a solid coating of oil on bNote that the holes in the dif the actual level is at or aboshould be between the “HOon the dipstick at normal opfluid level is low, add fluid to bring it to the proper le

ONLY the recommended cants, and Genuine PartsAfter adding any quantity otube, wait a minimum of tfully drain into the transmis


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


gage in each position), ending with the transmission inPARK.

fully drain into the transmisfluid level.

NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission belowthe operating temperature, the fluid level should be between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick

with the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only use the COLDregion of the dipstick as a rough reference when settingthe fluid level after a transmission service or fluidchange. Re-check the fluid level, and adjust as required,once the transmission reaches normal operating tempera-ture.

CAUTION!

If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it maynot register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid untilthe temperature is elevated enough to produce anaccurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to

th fl id

NOTE: To prevent dirt and transmission after checking orsure that the dipstick cap is

normal for the dipstick cap toits fully seated position, as engaged in the dipstick tube.

Fluid And Filter Changes – Transmission

Under normal operating condithe factory will provide satisf

life of the vehicle.Routine fluid and filter changever change the fluid and ficontaminated (with water, etcdisassembled for any reason

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


warm the fluid.

8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.

disassembled for any reason.

Fluid And Filter Changes – Six-SpeedTransmission


In addition, change the fluid and filter(s) if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-mission is disassembled for any reason.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roadspassable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed ontrees and road surfaces during other seasons are highlycorrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,

hot or cold weather and othehave an adverse effect on pain body protection.

The following maintenance recyou to obtain maximum beresistance built into your vehi

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of depaint and protective coatings f

The most common causes are:• Road salt, dirt and moisture

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


co os e to t e eta you e c e Outs de pa k g,which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme

• Salt in the air near seacoast

• Atmospheric fallout/indust

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild

car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely withclear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bugand Tar Remover to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect

your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing

that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTI

• Do not use abrasive or str

such as steel wool or scoscratch metal and painted

• Use of power washers exkPa) can result in damage decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or du

near the ocean, hose off the ua month.

• It is important that the drainof the doors, rocker panels, aopen

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs isconsidered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similarcause that destroys the paint and protective coating,have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. Thecost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are wellpackaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, considermud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon aspossible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to

Wheel And Wheel Trim Car

• All wheels and wheel trim, chrome plated wheels, showith a mild soap and water

• To remove heavy soil and/oMOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.

CAUTI

Do not use scouring pads, steor metal polishes. Do not u

products may damage the wAvoid automatic car washes or harsh brushes that may dtective finish. Only MOPAequivalent is recommended


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint tomatch the color of your vehicle.

equivalent is recommended.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure –If Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-ner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blottingwith a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or amild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and removestain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-PurposeCleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Usea fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of

Interior Care

Use MOPAR® Total Clean to ccarpeting.

Use MOPAR® Total Clean to c

MOPAR® Total Clean is specleather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can becleaning with a damp soft clocan act as an abrasive and damand should be removed promStubborn soils can be removeand MOPAR® Total Clean. Carsoaking your leather upholstedo not use polishes, oils, cleangents or ammonia based clea

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

gents, or ammonia-based cleaupholstery. Application of a required to maintain the origin

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used inclosed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketonbased cleaning products to clean leather seats, asdamage to the seat may result.

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and foglights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible tostone breakage than glass headlights.

To minimize the possibility ofreducing light output, avoid wremove road dirt, wash with

lowed by rinsing.Do not use abrasive cleaning cwool or other aggressive mate

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cwith MOPAR® Glass Cleanhousehold-type glass cleaner. N

cleaner. Use caution when cledow equipped with electric dquarter window equipped wnot use scrapers or other shscratch the elements.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and thereforedifferent lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on thetowel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleanerdirectly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle aremolded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, caremust be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may beused, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasivecleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp

rag.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical

If the belts need cleaning, uselukewarm water. Do not removwash them. Dry with a soft clo

Replace the belts if they appea buckles do not work properly.

Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cove

For cleaning and protecting thcover, use MOPAR® WhitewaMOPAR® Leather and Vinyl C

Spray-On Bedliner – If Equ

During ownership, the shine aBedliner can fade from oxidathauling and hard water staexposure will lead to fading,

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemicalsolvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

over time.

To help maintain the appeaBedliner, the manufacturer reco

rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean yourtruck at least twice per year using the MOPAR®Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner available at your local

authorized dealer.To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-OnBedliner, Follow The Steps Below:

1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove anyloose dirt and debris.

2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a softcloth or brush.

3. Rinse bedliner with water.

4. Once dry, apply a small amount of MOPAR®Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel orsponge and wipe over the entire surface of the truck

WARNI

Do not use silicon-based pro

your bedliner. Silicon-baseslippery and may result in p

Spray-On Bedliners are chemdifferent types of chemicalshydraulic fluids) for short poccurs on your Spray-On Bedlsoon as possible to avoid perm

Repairing The Spray-On Bed

While extremely tough, it iSpray-On Bedliner. One comloading a heavy pallet and dragfloor of the bed If a nail or sha


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


p g p bedliner.

floor of the bed. If a nail or shathe weight of the pallet a scratcnot covered by your new vehic

to cover the metal exposed by the scratch is required. Torepair a tear or gouge, follow the directions provided inthe MOPAR® Quick Repair Kit.

FUSES

POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER

The Power Distribution Center is located in the enginecompartment near the battery. This center contains car-tridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. Adescription of each fuse and component may be stampedon the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each

fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds tothe following chart.

Power Distribution

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Cavity Car-tridgeFuse

MicroFuse

Description

F01 80 AmpRed

Rad Fan ControlModule – If

equipped

F03 60 AmpYellow

Rad Fan – If Equipped

F05 40 AmpGreen

Compressor for AirSuspension – If

Equipped

F06 40 AmpGreen

Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability

Control Pump

F07 40 AmpG

Starter Solenoid


MicrFuse

F08 40 AmpGreen

(Gas &Cum-mins

Diesel)20 AmpYellow

(1500LD Die-

sel)


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Green


MicroFuse

Description

F09 40 AmpGreen

(Gas &Cum-mins

Diesel)30 Amp

Pink

(1500LD Die-

sel)

Diesel Fuel Heater –If Equipped

F10 40 AmpGreen

Body Controller /Exterior Lighting #2


MicrFuse

F10 50 AmpRed

F11 30 AmpPink

F12 40 AmpGreen

F13 40 AmpGreen

F14 40 AmpG

MAINT

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g gGreen


MicroFuse

Description

F15 30 AmpPink

Electric Park BrakeRight Side – If

Equipped

F19 30 AmpPink

SCR – If Equipped

F20 30 AmpPink

Passenger DoorModule

F21 30 AmpPink Drive Train ControlModule

F22 20 AmpYellow

Engine ControlModule

F23 30 AmpPi k

Body Controller #1


MicrFuse

F24 30 AmpPink

F25 30 AmpPink

F25 30 AmpPink

F26 30 Amp

Pink

F28 20 AmpYellow


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Pink


MicroFuse

Description

F29 20 AmpYellow

Trailer Tow ParkingLights – If Equipped

F30 30 AmpPink

Trailer Tow Recep-tacle

F32 30 AmpPink

Drive Train ControlModule – If

Equipped

F33 20 AmpYellow

Cummins DieselFuel Heater #1 – If Equipped / Rear

Blower – If Equipped


MicrFuse

F34 30 AmpPink

F35 30 AmpPink

F36 30 AmpPink

F37 30 AmpPink

F38 30 AmpPink

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Equipped


MicroFuse

Description

F39 30 AmpPink

Vehicle System In-terface Module #1–

If Equipped

F41 10 AmpRed

Active Grill Shutter

F42 20 AmpYellow

Horn

F43 10 AmpRed Snow Plow (Left) –If Equipped

F44 10 AmpRed

Diagnostic Port

F46 10 AmpR d

Tire Pressure Moni-t


MicrFuse

F47 10 AmRed

F49 10 AmRed

F50 20 AmYellow

F51 10 AmRed

F52 5 AmTan


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Red tor Tan


MicroFuse

Description

F53 20 AmpYellow

Trailer Tow – LeftTurn/Stop Lights

F54 20 AmpYellow

Adjustable Pedals

F55 20 AmpYellow

E38 Radio – If Equipped

F56 15 AmpBlue

Additional DieselContent – If

Equipped

F57 20 AmpYellow

Transmission


MicrFuse

F58 20 AmYellow

(GasEngin

/ 25Amp

Natur(Cum

minsDiese

Engin

F60 15 AmBlue

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


F61 20 AmYellow


MicroFuse

Description

F62 10 AmpRed

Air ConditioningClutch

F63 20 AmpYellow

IgnitionCoils (Gas),Urea Heater (Cum-

mins Diesel)

F64 25 AmpNatural

Fuel Injectors /Powertrain

F65 10 AmpRed

USB interface

F66 10 AmpRed

Sunroof / Passen-ger Window

Switches / RainSensor


MicrFuse

F67 10 AmRed

F69 15 AmBlue

F70 30 Am

Green

F71 25 AmNatur

F72 10 AmRed


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Sensor Red


MicroFuse

Description

F74 20 AmpYellow

(GasEngine& 1500

LD Die-sel) / 10

Amp

Red(Cum-mins

DieselEngine)

Brake VacuumPump Gas/Diesel –

If Equipped

F75 10 A C l t T


MicrFuse

F76 10 AmRed

F77 10 AmRed

F78 10 AmRed

F79 15 AmBlue

F80 10 AmRed

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


F75 10 AmpRed

Coolant Tempera-ture Valve Actuator

Red


MicroFuse

Description

F81 20 AmpYellow

Trailer Tow RightTurn/Stop Lights

F82 10 AmpRed

Steering ColumnControl Module/

Cruise Control

F84 15 AmpBlue

Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster

F85 10 AmpRed

Airbag Module

F86 10 AmpRed

Airbag Module


MicrFuse

F87 10 AmRed

F88 15 AmBlue

F90/F91 20 Am

Yellow

F93 20 AmYellow

F94 10 Am


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


9 0Red


MicroFuse

Description

F95 10 AmpRed

Rear Camera /Park Assist

F96 10 AmpRed

Rear Seat HeaterSwitch

F97 25 AmpNatural

Rear Heated Seats& Heated Steering

Wheel – If Equipped

F98 25 AmpNatural

Front HeatedSeats – If Equipped


MicrFuse

F99 10 AmRed

F101 15 AmBlue

F104 20 AmYellow

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


CAUTION!

• When installing the power distribution center

cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properlypositioned and fully latched. Failure to do so mayallow water to get into the power distributioncenter and possibly result in an electrical systemfailure.

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to useonly a fuse having the correct amperage rating. Theuse of a fuse with a rating other than indicated mayresult in a dangerous electrical system overload. Ifa properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicatesa problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are storing your vehicle recommend that you take the

mize the drain on your vehicle• Disconnect the negative cab

• Any time you store your service (i.e., vacation) for twair conditioning system at iin the fresh air and high ensure adequate system lubpossibility of compressor dastarted again.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

All of the inside bulbs are brAluminum base bulbs are not


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Interior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Overhead Console

Lamps

TS 212–9

Dome Lamp 7679

For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer forreplacement instructions.

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Base Quad Headlamp –Low Beam

H11

Base Quad Headlamp –High Beam

9005

Front Turn Signal Lamp(B Q d H dl )

3157NA

Premium Bi HalogenProjector Headlamp -

Low BeamPremium Bi HalogenProjector Headlamp -High Beam

Front Turn Signal Lamp(Premium Headlamp)

Fog Lamp (Horizontalshape)

Fog Lamp (Verticalshape)

Center High MountedStop Lamp (CHMSL)

Rear Cargo Lamp

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


(Base Quad Headlamp) Rear Cargo Lamp

Bulb Number

LED Center HighMounted Stop Lamp

(CHMSL)/Cargo Lamp

LED (Serviced at Autho-rized Dealer)

Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA

Base Rear Tail/Turn andStop Lamp

3157K

Premium Rear Tail/Turnand Stop Lamp

LED (Serviced at Autho-rized Dealer)

Premium Backup Lamp T20

Rear Lamp Bar IDMarker Lamp 194

Side Marker Lamps(Dual Rear Wheels)

194

Backup Lamp 921

R Li Pl L 194

BULB REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Lens fogging can ocspheric conditions. This will us

conditions change to allow th back into a vapor. Turning thaccelerate the clearing process

Base Quad / Premium Bi-HHeadlamp, High Beam HeaTurn – If Equipped

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect and isolate the n

3. Remove the four plastic puthe upper radiator seal to thfender ledges.

4 R th t l ti


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Rear License Plate Lamp 194 4. Remove the two plastic pusupper radiator seal to the ra

5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle.

6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachmentscrews.

7. Reach into the front wheel wheel, remove the fastener, access hole in the front of

shield. Access to the rear othrough this access hole.

8. Reach through the access splash shield and lift the slidto disengage it from the locfront lamp unit housing.

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboardedge of the lamp and pull it straight forward todisengage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.

10. Disconnect the wiring har bulb socket.

11. Replace bulb(s) as necessar

CAUTI

• Do not contaminate the bwith your fingers or by alloily surfaces. Shortened b

• Always use the correct breplacement. An incorrecoverheat and cause damagsocket, or the lamp wiring

NOTE: There are access coveraccess holes in the quad froequipped). These covers MUSbulb has been replaced


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


bulb has been replaced.

Fog Lamps – If Equipped

1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to accessthe back of the front fog lamp housing.

2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connectorfrom the fog lamp bulb.

3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise ¼ turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.

4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.

CAUTION!

Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching itwith your fingers or by allowing it to contact otheroily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.

Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal

1. Remove the two screws thsheetmetal.

2. Pull the outboard side oenough to unsnap the two re

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g pside of the lamp housing fpost retainers in the outer b

3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb socket.

4. Rotate the bulb socket coununlock it from the housing.

5. Pull the bulb straight out of

CAUTI

Do not contaminate the buwith your fingers or by allooily surfaces. Shortened bul

6. Reverse the procedure to in


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) WithCargo Lamp

1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to

the body as shown.

2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wir-

3. Turn the desired bulb socksocket and bulb from housi

4. Pull the desired bulb straig

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


ing harness to the body.

CAUTI

Do not contaminate the buwith your fingers or by allooily surfaces. Shortened bul

• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lam

• Inside Bulb: Center High-

5. Reverse the procedure for housing.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Cab Top Clearance Lamps – If Equipped

1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.

2. Rotate the socket ¼ turn and pull it from the lampassembly.

3. Pull the bulb straight from

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — IfEquipped

1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain accessto the bulb sockets.

2. Turn the socket ¼ turn coun bulb.

3. Pull the bulb straight out fr

4. Reverse the procedure for inhousing.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g

Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — IfEquipped

1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.

2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.

3. Turn the socket ¼ turn coufrom assembly to access the

4. Pull the bulb straight out fr

5. Reverse the procedure for inhousing.

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S.

Fuel (Approximate)

1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 32 Gallons 2500/3500 Shortbed Models 34 Gallons 2500/3500 Longbed Models 35 Gallons Engine Oil With Filter3.6L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.7L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 5.7L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-30, API Certified),

for 2500/3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weightrating greater than 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).

7 Quarts

6.4L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40 engine oil meet-ing the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633 foruse in all operating temperatures.)

7 Quarts


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


U.S.

Cooling System

3.6L Engine (We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/

Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the require-ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.)

14 Quarts

5.7L Engine – 1500 Models (We recommend you use MOPAR®Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets therequirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.)

16 Quarts

5.7L Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you useMOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula thatmeets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.)

18.7 Quarts

5.7L Engine – 2500/3500 Models w/Heavy Duty (We recommendyou use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile For-mula that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material StandardMS-12106.)

19.2 Quarts

6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of Chrysler Ma-terial Standard MS 12106

18.7 Quarts

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


terial Standard MS-12106.

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or GenuineEngine Coolant We recommend you use MOP

10 Year/150,000 Mile FormulaTechnology).

Engine Oil – 5.7 We recommend you use APEngine Oil, meeting the requiterial Standard MS-6395 suchand Shell Helix®. Refer to you

correct SAE grade.Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine For 2500/3500 trucks operatingunder a gross combined weight rating greater than14,000 lbs/(6,350 kg.)

We recommend you use APEngine Oil, meeting the requiterial Standard MS-6395 suchand Shell Helix®. Refer to youcorrect SAE grade.


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


g

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine

Engine Oil – 6.4L For best performance and maall types of operating condition

recommends full synthetic enAmerican Petroleum InstituteThe manufacturer recommenUltraTM 0W-40 or equivalent ing the requirements of ChrMS-12633 for use in all operat

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOFilters.

Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use MO0.043 in [1.1 mm])



MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


[ ])


Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane

Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engines 87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Oct

Fuel Selection – 6.4L Engines 87 Octane

Chassis


Automatic Transmission — Eight-Speed Automatic We recommend you use only ATF™ Automatic TransmissiFailure to use the correct fluid

performance of your transmisAutomatic Transmission — Six-Speed Automatic withGasoline Engine (For Diesel Engine see Diesel Supple-ment)

We recommend you use only Amission Fluid. Failure to use Athe function or performance orecommend MOPAR® ATF+4

Transfer Case We recommend you use MO


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Case Fluid.


Front Axle – 1500 Four-Wheel Drive Models We recommend you use MOPLubricant SAE 75W-85.

Rear Axle – 1500 Models We recommend you use MOP bricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-898les require the addition of 5Limited Slip Additive (MS-101

Front and Rear Axle – 2500/3500 Models We recommend you use SyntLimited-Slip 10.5/11.5 inch Radditive is not required.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MO

brake fluid is not available, thPower Steering Reservoir– 2500/3500 Models We recommend you use MOPA

+4 or MOPAR® ATF+4® Auto

MAINTA

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .740

▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil changeindicator system. The oil change indicator system will

remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil changeindicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditionssuch as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot orcold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage willinfluence when the “Oil Change Required” message is

displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the

change oil message to illumin(5,600 km) since last reset. Havsoon as possible, within the ne

Your authorized dealer will resmessage after completing the scheduled oil change is perfothan your authorized dealer, threferring to the steps describedInformation Center (EVIC)/O“Understanding Your Instrumformation.

8

MAI

NTEN

ANCE

SCHEDU

LES

740 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


NOTE:

1500 Models Only

• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals

exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months on1500 trucks, whichever comes first.

2500 – 3500 Models

• Under no circumstances should oil change intervalsexceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or twelve months on2500 – 3500 trucks, whichever comes first.

Severe Duty All Models

• Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if thevehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environ-ment. This type of vehicle use is considered SevereDuty

Once A Month Or Before A L

• Check engine oil level

• Check windshield washer fl

• Check the tire inflation presswear or damage

• Check the fluid levels of thmaster cylinder, power steOnly) and automatic transmneeded

• Check function of all interio

MAIN

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Required Maintenance

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the followingpages for required maintenance.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By OilChange Indicator System:

• Change oil and filter.

• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicatorsystem turns on.

• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as

required.• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped

with dipstick.

At Every Oil Change IntervChange Indicat

• Inspect brake pads, shoe

and park brake.• Inspect engine cooling

hoses.

• Inspect exhaust system.

• Inspect engine air cleaneoff-road conditions.

• Lube the front drive shaftmodels only).

8

MAI

NTEN

ANCE

SCHEDU

LES


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Maintenance Chart

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

2

0 ,

0 0 0

3

0 ,

0 0 0

4

0 ,

0 0 0

5

0 ,

0 0 0

6

0 ,

0 0 0

7

0 ,

0 0 0

8

0 ,

0 0 0

9

0 ,

0 0 0

1 0

0 ,

0 0 0

1 1

0 ,

0 0 0

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Or Kilometers:

3 2 ,

0 0 0

4 8 ,

0 0 0

6 4 ,

0 0 0

8 0 ,

0 0 0

9 6 ,

0 0 0

1 1 2 ,

0 0 0

1 2 8 ,

0 0 0

1 4 4 ,

0 0 0

1 6 0 ,

0 0 0

1 7 6 ,

0 0 0

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X

Inspect front suspension, tie rod

ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X Inspect the front and rear axlesurfaces. If gear oil leakage issuspected, check the fluid level.If using your vehicle for police,taxi, fleet, off-road or frequenttrailer towing, change axle fluid.

X X X X X

MAIN

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM




2 0 ,

0 0 0

3 0 ,

0 0 0

4 0 ,

0 0 0

5 0 ,

0 0 0

6 0 ,

0 0 0

7 0 ,

0 0 0

8 0 ,

0 0 0

9 0 ,

0 0 0

1 0 0 ,

0 0 0

1 1 0 ,

0 0 0

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Or Kilometers:

3 2 ,

0 0 0

4 8 ,

0 0 0

6 4 ,

0 0 0

8 0 ,

0 0 0

9 6 ,

0 0 0

1 1 2 ,

0 0 0

1 2 8 ,

0 0 0

1 4 4 ,

0 0 0

1 6 0 ,

0 0 0

1 7 6 ,

0 0 0

Inspect the brake linings, replaceas necessary.

X X X X X

Adjust parking brake as neces-sary.

X X X X X

Inspect transfer case fluid. X X

Additional MaintenanceReplace engine air filter. X X X

Replace spark plugs(3.6L engine).**

X


X

8

MAI

NTEN

ANCE

SCHEDU

LES


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM




2 0 ,

0 0 0

3 0 ,

0 0 0

4 0 ,

0 0 0

5 0 ,

0 0 0

6 0 ,

0 0 0

7 0 ,

0 0 0

8 0 ,

0 0 0

9 0 ,

0 0 0

1 0 0 ,

0 0 0

1 1 0 ,

0 0 0

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Or Kilometers:

3 2 ,

0 0 0

4 8 ,

0 0 0

6 4 ,

0 0 0

8 0 ,

0 0 0

9 6 ,

0 0 0

1 1 2 ,

0 0 0

1 2 8 ,

0 0 0

1 4 4 ,

0 0 0

1 6 0 ,

0 0 0

1 7 6 ,

0 0 0


X

Flush and replace the enginecoolant at 10 years or 150,000miles (240,000 km) whichevercomes first.

X

Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter(s) (six-speed auto-matic only), if using your vehiclefor police, taxi, fleet, or frequenttrailer towing.

X

MAIN

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM




2 0 ,

0 0 0

3 0 ,

0 0 0

4 0 ,

0 0 0

5 0 ,

0 0 0

6 0 ,

0 0 0

7 0 ,

0 0 0

8 0 ,

0 0 0

9 0 ,

0 0 0

1 0 0 ,

0 0 0

1 1 0 ,

0 0 0

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Or Kilometers:

3 2 ,

0 0 0

4 8 ,

0 0 0

6 4 ,

0 0 0

8 0 ,

0 0 0

9 6 ,

0 0 0

1 1 2 ,

0 0 0

1 2 8 ,

0 0 0

1 4 4 ,

0 0 0

1 6 0 ,

0 0 0

1 7 6 ,

0 0 0

Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter (six-speed auto-matic only).

Inspect the transfer case fluid,change for any of the following:police, taxi, fleet, or frequenttrailer towing.

X

Change the transfer case fluid.

Inspect and replace PCV valve ifnecessary.

X

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,yearly intervals do not apply.

8

MAI

NTEN

ANCE

SCHEDU

LES


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


y y pp y

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around amotor vehicle. Do only service work for which you

have the knowledge and the right equipment. Ifyou have any doubt about your ability to perform aservice job, take your vehicle to a competent me-chanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-hicle could result in a component malfunction andeffect vehicle handling and performance. Thiscould cause an accident.

MAIN

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTA

CONTENTS

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICEFOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .751

▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .751

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .751

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .751

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .752▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .753

▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .753

▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753

▫ Customer Assistance ForSpeech Impaired (TDD/

▫ Service Contract . . . . . .

WARRANTY INFORMATI

MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . .

REPORTING SAFETY DE▫ In The 50 United States A

Washington, D.C.. . . . .

▫ In Canada. . . . . . . . . .

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .756

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATIONUNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . .757

▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .757

▫ Traction Grades. . . . . .

▫ Temperature Grades. . .

750 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FORYOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to havethe right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. Allwork to be performed may not be covered by thewarranty. Discuss additional charges with the servicemanager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’sservice history. This can often provide a clue to thecurrent problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vspecific work you want done. or work done that is not on youservice advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Reque

If you list a number of items vehicle by the end of the day, the service advisor and list theAt many authorized dealer, vehicle at a minimal daily char

is advisable to make these arrfor an appointment.

IF YOU NEED CO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitallyinterested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happywith our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to anauthorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, andare most concerned that you get prompt and high qualityservice. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have thefacilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, andthe latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed

correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should alwadealer service manager first. solved with this process.

• If for some reason you are st

general manager or owner They want to know if you n

• If an authorized dealer is ucern, you may contact the center.

Any communication to the manter should include the followin

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Numb

• Vehicle delivery date and m


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


y

Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (866) 726–4636

Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French

In Mexico contact:

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Customer Assistance For TImpaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who havmanufacturer has installed spcation Devices for the Deaf) ecenter. Any hearing or speechhas access to a TDD or a con(TTY) in the United States, camanufacturer by dialing 1–800

Canadian residents with heariassistance can use the special n by Bell Canada. For TTY teleand for Voice callers, dial 1 800a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a serto help protect you from therepairs after the manufacture

IF YOU NEED CO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Outside Mexico City: 1 800 505 1300 repairs after the manufacture

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind onlythe manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased amanufacturer’s service contract, you will receive PlanProvisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail

within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If youhave any questions about the service contract, call themanufacturer’s Service Contract National CustomerHotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any servicecontract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. Itis not responsible for any service contract other than the

manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,and you require service after the manufacturer’s NewVehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to thecontract documents, and contact the person listed inthose documents.

We appreciate that you have when you purchased the vehihas also made a major investmtraining to assure that you are

the ownership experience. Yousincere efforts to resolve any wconcerns.

WARNI

Engine exhaust, some of its cvehicle components contaknown to the State of Califo

birth defects, or other reprotion, certain fluids containedproducts of component wearcals known to the State of Cand birth defects, or other re


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on theDVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler GroupLLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR® PARTS

MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories areavailable from an authorized dealer. They are recom-mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicleoperating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that couldcause a crash or cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying themanufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar coinvestigation, and if it finds tha group of vehicles, it may ocampaign. However, NHTSA c

individual problems betweedealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may Hotline toll free at 1–888–329153), or go to http://wwwAdministrator, NHTSA, 1200 West Building, Washington, Dobtain other information about

http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicshould contact the Customer Sdiately. Canadian customers w

IF YOU NEED CO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations andRecalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either thewebsite or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please callfor an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering

manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-mation that students and professional technicians need in

diagnosing/troubleshooting, ping, servicing, and repairing hicles. A complete working ksystem, and/or components is

language with illustrations, diDiagnostic Procedure Manual

Diagnostic Procedure Manualscharts and detailed illustrationmake it easy for students and problems on computer-controfeatures. They show exactly

problems the first time, using ing and drivability procedureand a complete list of all tools


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with theassistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilitiesand safety tips.

Call toll free at:

• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)

• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)

Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPTIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading catethe National Highway Traffic S

specific grade rating assigned in each category is shown on tyour vehicle.

All passenger car tires must crequirements in addition to th

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comthe wear rate of the tire whenconditions on a specified govexample, a tire graded 150 woutimes as well on the governme100. The relative performance actual conditions of their use,

IF YOU NEED CO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


significantly from the norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices, and differences in road charac-teristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop onwet pavement, as measured under controlled conditionson specified government test surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-mance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, orpeak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are Arepresenting the tire’s resistancand its ability to dissipate

controlled conditions on a sptest wheel. Sustained high tematerial of the tire to degeneraexcessive temperature can leadgrade C corresponds to a levelpassenger car tires must meetVehicle Safety Standard No. 1sent higher levels of performa

wheel, than the minimum requ


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established fora tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-ing, either separately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.

IF YOU NEED CO

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


INDEX

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .689Adding Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86Airbag, Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .679Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280

Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . .Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . Alarm System (Security AlarAlterations/Modifications, V

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock Brake System (ABAnti-Lock Warning Light . . . .Anti-Theft Security Alarm (TAnti-Theft System. . . . . . . . Appearance Care . . . . . . . . .Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Down Power Windows .Automatic Door Locks . . . . .Automatic Headlights . . . . .Automatic Transmission . . . .

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . Fluid and Filter Changes .Fluid Change . . . . . . . . .

762 INDEX

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698

Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696

Back-Up Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .30Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55Body Builders Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6Body Mechanism Lubrication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . .Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . .Master Cylinder . . . . . . . .

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Warning Light . . . . . . . . Brake/Transmission InterlocBulb Replacement . . . . . . . .Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cab Top Clearance Lights . .Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . .Caps, Filler

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . .Power Steering . . . . . . . . Radiator (Coolant Pressure)

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .703Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .276Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124Child Restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .704Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

Compact Disc (CD) MaintenaCompact Spare Tire. . . . . . .Console, Overhead . . . . . . . Contract, Service. . . . . . . . .

Coolant Pressure Cap (RadiaCooling System. . . . . . . . . . Adding Coolant (AntifreezeCoolant Capacity . . . . . . Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . Disposal of Used Coolant Drain, Flush, and Refill . .Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .Points to Remember . . . . .Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . .Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . .Selection of Coolant (Antif

Corrosion Protection . . . . . .Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . .

764 INDEX

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .752

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170

Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470Dipsticks

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Driving

Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452

Through Flowing, Rising, orWater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . .

Electrical Power Outlets. . . Electric Rear Window DefrosElectronically Shifted TransfeElectronic Brake Control Syste

Anti-Lock Brake System . .Brake Assist System . . . . .Traction Control System .

Electronic Range Select (ERSElectronic Speed Control (CruElectronic Stability Control (EElectronic Vehicle InformationEmergency Brake . . . . . . . . Emergency, In Case of

Freeing Vehicle When StucHazard Warning Flasher . .

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655

Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .672Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607

Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . Enhanced Accident ResponseEntry System, Illuminated .

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Event Data Recorder. . . . . . Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . .Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . .Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . .

FiltersAir Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . .Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine Oil Disposal . . . . .

FlashersTurn Signal . . . . . . . . . . .

Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . Flooded Engine Starting . . . .

766 INDEX

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .736Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .732Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128Fluid Level Checks

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .734Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173Fold Flat Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696

Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567

Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Added . . . . . . . Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . Octane Rating . . . . . . . . .

Requirements . . . . . . . . . Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . Fuel System Caution . . . . . .Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . .Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . .Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . .Gasoline, Reformulated . . .

GaugesSpeedometer . . . . . . . . . .Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . .

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . .Gear Select Lever Override . .General Information . . . . . .

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706Grocery Bag Retainer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570

Guide, Body Builders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6GVWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567

HazardDriving Through Flowing, Rising, or ShallowStanding Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .722

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .179Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . High Beam/Low Beam Select

Hill Descent Control . . . . . . Hill Descent Control IndicatoHitches

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .Hoisting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . Hub Caps. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ignition Key Removal . . . . .Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . .Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . .Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . .Inflation Pressure Tires . . . .

768 INDEX

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707

Integrated Trailer Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583Interior Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .180Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) .

Lane Change and Turn Signa

Lane Change Assist. . . . . . .Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . .Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . .Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . .Automatic Headlights . . .Brake Assist Warning . . . Brake Warning . . . . . . . . .

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .722Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .729Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .727

Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . .276Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .519Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Instrument Cluster . . . . . .Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . .Security Alarm (Theft AlarService . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . Theft Alarm (Security AlarTire Pressure Monitoring (TTraction Control . . . . . . . Transfer Case . . . . . . . . .

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . .Warning (Instrument Clust

Limited-Slip Differential . . . .Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . .

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

770 INDEX

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682

Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .740Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .672Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .756

Manual TransmissionFluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .697Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .736

Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Electric Powered . . . . . . .Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .

Modifications/Alterations, VMonitor, Tire Pressure SystemMopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . .Multi-Function Control Leve

Navigation System (Uconnect®New Vehicle Break-In Period

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . Occupant Restraints (Sedan)

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452Oil, Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .732Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678

Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Outside Rearview Mirrors . Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overdrive OFF Switch. . . . .Overhead Console. . . . . . . .Overheating, Engine . . . . . .Owner’s Manual (Operator M

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Panic Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . .Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . Park Sense System, Rear . . .Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . .

Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . Pickup Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . Placard, Tire and Loading Inf

772 INDEX

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


PowerDistribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .226Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Power Steering Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .736Pregnant Women and Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .304Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .687

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . Rain Sensitive Wiper SystemRamp Travel Index . . . . . . .Rear Axle (Differential) . . . .Rear Cargo Area Utility RailsRear Park Sense System. . . .Rear Seat, Folding. . . . . . . .Rear Window Features . . . . .Rear Window, Sliding . . . . .Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . Recorder, Event Data . . . . . .Recreational Towing . . . . . .

Shifting into Transfer Case

Shifting out of Transfer CasReformulated Gasoline . . . .Refrigerant. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . Remote Control

Starting System . . . . . . . .

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .335Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673Replacement Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .755Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160Restraints, Child. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128Safety Defects, Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .755Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule, Maintenance . . . . .Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . .Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjustable Upper ShoulderAnd Pregnant Women . . .Child Restraint . . . . . . . . Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . .Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . .Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Untwisting Procedure . . . Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .Folding Floor . . . . . . . . . Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .

774 INDEX

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .751Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .756Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602

Shift Lever Override . . . . . .Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . Shoulder Belt Upper AnchorSide Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . .Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . .Sliding Rear Window

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow Chains (Tire Chains). Snow Plow. . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speed Control (Cruise ContrSpeedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . Stabilizer/Sway Bar System Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Transmission . .Cold Weather . . . . . . . . .

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . .366Steering

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .335Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . .237Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . . .544Suspension, Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tilt Steering Column . . . . . .Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tire and Loading InformationTire Markings. . . . . . . . . . . Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . .Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Compact Spare . . . . . . . . Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General Information . . . . .

High Speed . . . . . . . . . . .Inflation Pressures . . . . . .Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . .Load Capacity . . . . . . . . Pressure Monitor System (T

776 INDEX

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .757Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707

Tonneau Cover Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576

Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Traction Control . . . . . . . . .Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . .Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .

Cooling System Tips . . . . Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Minimum Requirements . .Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Trailer and Tongue WeighWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . .

Trailer Weight. . . . . . . . . . .Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . .

Electronically Shifted . . . Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . .

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .736Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376

Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .30Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .757Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357

Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . .

Warning Lights (Instrument CWarnings and Cautions. . . . Warranty Information . . . . .Washers, Windshield . . . . . . Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . .Water

Driving Through . . . . . . .Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . Wheel and Wheel Trim Care Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . .Wheel Nut Torque. . . . . . . .

Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . Rigging Techniques . . . . .Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

778 INDEX

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Windshield Washers . . . . . . Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield Wiper Blades. . Windshield Wipers . . . . . . .Wiper Blade Replacement . .Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . .

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


780 INDEX

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQU

Special design considerations are incorpora

vehicle’s electronic system to provide imm

frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios a

equipment must be installed properly by train

The following must be observed during insta

The positive power connection should be ma

the battery and fused as close to the battery

The negative power connection should be m

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


The negative power connection should be m

Chrysler Group LLC

14D241-126-AA First Edition

8/21/2019 2014 ram OM


2014 ram om

Documents